SDF 26 Electrical-Es

AWS DATA CENTER DESIGN ENGINEERING (DCDE) REVISION 1.
7
VYNMSA061 SPECIFICATION 4 OCT 2021
División 26 Electricidad
SECCIÓN 260001 - REQUISITOS GENERAL ES PARA SISTEMAS ELÉCTRICOS .................................................2

SECCIÓN 260513 - CABLES DE MEDIA TENSIÓN......................................................................................................7
SECCIÓN 260519 - CABLES DE CONDUCTORES ELÉCTRICOS DE BAJA TENSIÓN ........................................11
SECCIÓN 260526 - CONEXIÓN A TIERRA Y UNIÓN PARA SISTEMAS ELÉCTRICOS .....................................15
SECCIÓN 260529 - PERCHAS Y SOPORTES PARA SISTEMAS ELÉCTRICOS .....................................................22
SECCIÓN 260533 - PASILLOS Y CAJAS PARA SISTEMAS ELÉCTRICOS ...........................................................28
SECCIÓN 260536 - BANDEJAS DE CABLE S PARA SISTEMAS ELÉCTRICOS ...................................................38
SECCIÓN 260543 - CONDUCTOS SUBTERRÁNEOS Y VÍAS DE RODADURA PARA SISTEMAS ELÉCTRICOS 45
SECCIÓN 260544 - MANGUITOS Y SELLOS DE MANGUITO PARA VÍAS DE RODADURA Y CABLEADO
ELÉCTRICOS .................................................................................................................................................................56
SECCIÓN 260548 - CONTROLES DE VIBRACIONES Y SÍSMICOS PARA SISTEMAS ELÉCTRICOS ..............59
SECCIÓN 260553 - IDENTIFICACIÓN DE SISTEMAS ELÉCTRICOS .....................................................................65
SECCIÓN 260573 - ESTUDIO DE COORDINACIÓN DE DISPOSITIVOS PROTECTORES DE SOBRECORRIENTE 78
SECCIÓN 260801 - REQUISITOS GENERAL ES DE ENSAYO DE ACEPTACIÓN PARA ELÉCTRICAARTE ...89
SECCIÓN 260923 - DISPOSITIVOS DE CONTROL DE ILUMINACIÓN .................................................................97
SECCIÓN 261200 - TRANSFORMADORES DE DISTRIBUCIÓN DE MEDIA TENSIÓN ....................................107
SECCIÓN 261300 - TENSIÓN MEDIA.........................................................................................................................121
SECCIÓN 262200 - TRANSFORMADORES DE BAJA TENSIÓN ...........................................................................137
SECCIÓN 262413 - CUADROS ELÉCTRICOS (SISTEMA 3PHASE, 4WIRE, WYE ) ............................................142
SECCIÓN 262413.1 - ESQUEMA DE CONTROL DE TRANSFER ENCIA AUTOMÁTICA .................................176
SECCIÓN 263213.2 - GENERADORES DE LA CÁMARA DE MÁQUINAS (3-FASE, 4- HILOS)........................196
SECCIÓN 262416 - PANELES......................................................................................................................................222
SECCIÓN 262500 - CONJUNTOS DE BUS CERRADOS (OPTDC) .........................................................................236
SECCIÓN 262726 - DISPOSITIVOS DE CABLEADO ...............................................................................................236
SECCIÓN 263213.1 - GENERADORES DE MOTORES (3-FASE, 4- HILOS)..........................................................243
SECCIÓN 263213.2 - GENERADORES DE LA CÁMARA DE MÁQUINAS (3-FASE, 4- HILOS)........................273
SECCIÓN 263353.1 - FUENTE DE ALIMENTACIÓN ESTÁTICA DE LA CASA ................................................299
SECCIÓN 263353.3 - ALIMENTACIÓN ESTÁTICA CRÍTICA ININTERRUMPIDA ............................................316
SECCIÓN 263533 - EQUIPO DE CORRECCIÓN DEL FACTOR DE POTENCIA....................................................333
SECCIÓN 263600 - INTERRUPTORES DE TRANSFER ENCIA...............................................................................345
SECCIÓN 265119 - ILUMINACIÓN INTERIOR CON LED ......................................................................................353
SECCIÓN 265219 - ALUMBRADO DE EMERGENCIA Y DE SALIDA ..................................................................365
SECCIÓN 265600 - ALUMBRADO EXTERIOR ........................................................................................................375
AWS DATA CENTER DESIGN ENGINEERING (DCDE) REVISION 1.7
SECCIÓN 260001 - REQUISITOS GENERALES PARA SISTEMAS ELÉCTRICOS
GENERAL
 DOCUMENTOS RELACIONADOS
 Los dibujos y las disposiciones generales del Contrato, incluidas las Condiciones Generales y
Complementarias y las Secciones de Especificación de la División 01, se aplican a esta Sección.
 Los artículos indicados en RED son específicos del sitio. Será responsabilidad del contratista verificar
los requisitos y el cumplimiento en función de la geografía o los requisitos especiales de AHJ.
 DEFINICIONES
 AHJ: Autoridad que tiene jurisdicción.
 ARC: Conducto rígido de aluminio.
 ATS: interruptor de transferencia automática o esquema de transferencia automática
 BF: Factor de lastre.
 CCT: Temperatura de color correlacionada.
 CRI: Índice de reproducción cromática.
 ENT: Tubería eléctrica no metálica.
 EPDM: Caucho terpolímero etileno-propileno-dieno.
 EMT: Tubería metálica eléctrica.
 Interferencia electromagnética.
 EPMS: Sistema de Monitoreo de Energía Eléctrica.
 EQT: Prueba de calificación de equipos
 Ethernet: Red de área local basada en los estándares IEEE 802.3.
 FAT: Prueba de aceptación de fábrica
 FMC: Conducto metálico flexible.
 Firmware: Software (programas o datos) que se ha escrito en la memoria de solo lectura (ROM). El
firmware es una combinación de software y hardware. Los medios de almacenamiento con ROMs que
tienen datos o programas grabados en ellos son firmware.
 FWT: Prueba de testigos de fábrica

 Interruptor de circuito de falla a tierra.
 GRC: Conducto de acero rígido galvanizado.
 HTML: Lenguaje de marcado de hipertexto.
 Descarga de alta intensidad.
 IBC: Código Internacional de la Construcción.
 IMC: Conducto metálico intermedio.
 I/O: Input/output.
 KY Pulse: término utilizado por la industria de la medición para describir un método de medición del
consumo de electricidad basado en un estado de cambio de relé en respuesta a la rotación del disco en el
medidor.
 LFMC: Conducto metálico flexible estanco.
 LFNC: Conducto no metálico flexible y resistente a líquidos.
 LAN: Red de área local; a veces plural como "LAN."
 LCD: Pantalla de cristal líquido.
 Baja tensión: Según se define en NFPA 70 para circuitos y equipos que funcionan a menos de 50 V o
circuitos de control remoto, señalización y de potencia limitada.
 LER: Clasificación de la eficacia de las luminarias.
 Lumen: Salida medida de lámpara y luminaria, o ambos.
 Luminaria: Luminaria completa, incluida la carcasa de lastre si se proporciona.
 Modbus TCP/IP: Un protocolo abierto para el intercambio de datos de proceso.
 Monitoreo: Adquisición, procesamiento, comunicación y visualización de datos de estado del equipo,

valores de parámetros eléctricos medidos, datos de evaluación de calidad de energía, señales de eventos
y alarmas, informes tabulados y registros de eventos.
 MPA: Acuerdo Maestro de Compra
 NETA ATS: Especificación de prueba de aceptación.
 NC: Normalmente está cerrado.
 NO: Normalmente está abierto.
 NBR: Caucho acrilonitrilo-butadieno
 PDU: Unidad de distribución de energía
 Pigtail: Cable corto utilizado para conectar un dispositivo a un conductor de circuito de rama.
 PLC: Controlador lógico programable.
 PC: Ordenador personal; a veces plural como "PC."
 Poste: Estructura de soporte de luminaria, incluida la torre utilizada para la iluminación de áreas grandes.
 RFI: Interferencia de radiofrecuencia.
 RMC: Conducto metálico rígido.
 RNC: Conducto rígido no metálico
 rms: Valor raíz-medio-cuadrado del voltaje alterno, que es la raíz cuadrada del valor medio del cuadrado
de los valores de voltaje durante un ciclo completo.
 RS-232: Un estándar TIA para comunicaciones asíncronas de datos en serie entre dispositivos terminales.
 RS-485: Un estándar TIA para comunicaciones multipunto usando dos pares trenzados.
 SVR: Clasificación de tensión suprimida.
 Un poste, doble tiro.
 TCP/IP: Protocolo de control de transporte/protocolo de Internet incorporado en Microsoft Windows.
 THD: Distorsión armónica total.
 TVSS: Supresor de tensión transitoria.
 UTP: Par trenzado sin blindaje.
 UPS: Fuente de alimentación ininterrumpida; utilizado tanto en singular como en plural.
 WAN: Wide area network.
 CÓDIGOS Y NORMAS
 Cumplimiento de las adaptaciones y requisitos del código AHJ local.
 PRESENTACIONES DE ACCIÓN
 Datos del producto: Para cada tipo de producto indicado.
 Incluir datos del producto que indiquen las dimensiones.

 Incluya planos dimensionados, elevaciones, secciones y detalles.
 Detalles y tipos de cerramientos.
 Detalle configuraciones de bus cuando sea necesario
 Proporcione clasificaciones de cortocircuito cuando sea apropiado.
 Muestras:
 Tienda de dibujos:
 Diagramas de interconexión que muestran el cableado instalado en el campo.

 Diagramas de cableado de energía, señal y control.
 Incluya diagramas de cableado con denominación de punto de terminación, diagramas de comunicación
y detalles, y detalles de dispositivos para todos los equipos que se comunican con EPMS.
 Presentación de diseño delegado: Para restricciones sísmicas.
 Detalles de contención sísmica: Firmado y sellado por un ingeniero profesional calificado, con licencia
en el estado donde se encuentra el proyecto, que es responsable de su preparación.
 Cálculos de diseño: Calcule los requisitos para seleccionar restricciones sísmicas.
 Fabricación de detalles, incluyendo anclajes y accesorios a la estructura.
 PRESENTACIONES INFORMATIVAS
 Datos de calificación: Para la agencia de pruebas.
 Material Certificados
 Informes de control de calidad de la fuente.
 Informes de control de calidad de campo.
 Certificados de producto: Firmado por el fabricante del producto.
 Los ofertantes deberán proporcionar una revisión del cumplimiento de las especificaciones,
especificaciones relacionadas y dibujos. El Compliance Review será una revisión línea por línea de cada
especificación con la siguiente información: "C", "D" o "E" marcada en el margen de la Especificación
original y cualquier Addenda posterior.
 "C" Cumplir sin excepciones.

 "D" Cumplir con las desviaciones. Para todas y cada una de las desviaciones, proporcione una nota de
pie de página numerada con las razones de las desviaciones propuestas y cómo puede satisfacerse la
intención de la Especificación.
 "E" Excepción tomada. Para cada excepción, proporcione una nota de pie de página numerada con las
razones y posibles alternativas (con los costos)
 Planos de coordinación: Planos de planta
 La portada de presentación indicará si el equipo coincide idénticamente con el equipo de la fase(s)

anterior, cuando proceda.
 Certificación de Calificación Sísmica del Fabricante: Presente la certificación de que los equipos
eléctricos, accesorios y componentes soportarán las fuerzas sísmicas definidas en la División 26 Sección
"Controles de Vibración y Sísmica para Sistemas Eléctricos."
 Base para la certificación: Indique si la certificación de resistencia se basa en la prueba real de los
componentes ensamblados o en el cálculo.
 El término "soportar" significa "la unidad permanecerá en su lugar sin separación de ninguna parte del
dispositivo cuando se somete a las fuerzas sísmicas especificadas y la unidad será plenamente operativa
después del evento sísmico."
 Dibujos dimensionados de la unidad de equipo: Identifique el centro de gravedad y localice y describa

las disposiciones de montaje y anclaje.
 Descripción detallada de los dispositivos de anclaje en los que se basa la certificación y sus requisitos de
instalación.
 SOLICITUDES DE LIQUIDACIÓN
 Datos de operación y mantenimiento: Para cada tipo de equipo o dispositivo a incluir en los manuales de
emergencia, operación y mantenimiento.
 PRESENTACIONES DE MATERIAL DE MANTENIMIENTO
 Proporcionar materiales adicionales, antes de que comience la instalación, que coincidan con los
productos instalados y que estén empaquetados con una cubierta protectora para su almacenamiento e
identificados con etiquetas que describan el contenido.
 GARANTÍA DE CALIDAD
 Calificaciones de la Agencia de Pruebas: Una agencia, con la experiencia y la capacidad para realizar
las pruebas indicadas, y que es aceptable para las autoridades que tienen jurisdicción.
 Supervisor de campo de la Agencia de Pruebas: Persona calificada para supervisar las pruebas in situ
especificadas, con conocimiento de los requisitos estándar de NETA, la práctica de las pruebas de
aceptación y la validación de los resultados de las pruebas. El supervisor de campo debe estar
certificado en la práctica de prueba o puesta en marcha o Ingeniero profesional con licencia.
 Limitaciones de la fuente: Obtener productos y accesorios a través de una fuente de un solo fabricante.
 Componentes eléctricos, dispositivos y accesorios: Enumerados y etiquetados como se define en NFPA

70, Artículo 100, por una agencia de pruebas aceptable para las autoridades que tienen jurisdicción, y
marcado para el uso previsto.
 CONDICIONES DEL PROYECTO
 Interrupción del servicio eléctrico existente: No interrumpa el servicio eléctrico a las instalaciones
ocupadas por el propietario u otros a menos que se permita en las siguientes condiciones y luego solo
después de organizar para proporcionar el servicio eléctrico temporal de acuerdo con los requisitos
indicados:
 Notificar al Gerente de Construcción y Propietario no menos de catorce días antes de la interrupción

propuesta del servicio eléctrico.
 No proceda con la interrupción del servicio eléctrico sin el permiso escrito del Gerente de Construcción
y Propietario.
 Limitaciones ambientales: Equipos de velocidad para funcionamiento continuo a valores de amperios

indicados para las siguientes condiciones:
 Temperatura ambiente no superior a 140 grados F.
 REQUISITOS DE RENDIMIENTO
 Rendimiento sísmico: El equipo eléctrico deberá soportar los efectos de los movimientos sísmicos
determinados de acuerdo con SEI/ASCE 7.
 El término "soportar" significa "la unidad permanecerá en su lugar sin separación de ninguna parte del
dispositivo cuando se someta a las fuerzas sísmicas especificadas y la unidad será plenamente operativa
después del evento sísmico".
SECCIÓN 260513 - CABLES DE MEDIA TENSIÓN
GENERAL
 DOCUMENTOS RELACIONADOS
 Especificaciones:
 260001 Requisitos generales para sistemas eléctricos.

 019113 Requisitos generales de puesta en marcha.
 260801 Requisitos generales de prueba de aceptación para sistemas eléctricos.
 Revisión actual de las especificaciones de los controles
 260553 Identificación para Sistemas Eléctricos.
 260526 Conexión a tierra y unión para sistemas eléctricos.
 260548 Controles de vibración y sísmicos para sistemas eléctricos.
 260553 Identificación para Sistemas Eléctricos.
 Los planos y las disposiciones generales del Contrato, incluidas las Condiciones Generales y
Complementarias, se aplican a esta Sección.
 RESUMEN
 Esta sección incluye cables y empalmes, terminaciones y accesorios relacionados para sistemas de
distribución eléctrica de media tensión.
 PRESENTACIONES DE ACCIÓN
 Facilítese la declaración de cumplimiento de la partida C/D/E con cada uno de los requisitos
enumerados en la presente especificación y las especificaciones conexas descritas en el punto 1.1
A, de conformidad con la especificación 260001. Se describirán los motivos de las desviaciones y
excepciones.
 GARANTÍA DE CALIDAD
 Instalador: Conecte un empalmer de cable, entrenado y certificado por el fabricante de material de

empalme, para instalar, empalmar y terminar el cable de media tensión.
PRODUCTOS
 FABRICANTES
 Fabricantes: Sujeto al cumplimiento de los requisitos, proporcionar productos por uno de los siguientes:
 Cables:
 Okonite Company (La).

 Pirelli Cables & Sistemas NA.

 Southwire.
 Productos y accesorios de empalme y terminación de cables:
 Raychem Corp.; División de Energía Telefónica e Industrial; Tyco International Ltd.

 Thomas & Betts Corporation/Elastimold.
 3M; División de Productos Eléctricos.
 CABLES
 Tipo de cable: MV105.
 Cumplir con UL 1072, AEIC CS 8, ICEA S-93-639 y ICEA S-97-682.
 Conductor: Copper.
 Conductor Stranding: Compacto redondo, concéntrico, clase B.
 Relleno del filamento: Los intersticios del conductor se llenan con el compuesto impermeable.
 Tipos de aislamiento del conductor:.

 Polietileno reticulado.
 Caucho de etileno-propileno.
 Tensión nominal: 15 kV o 35kV.
 Espesor de aislamiento: 133 por ciento de nivel de aislamiento.
 Blindaje: Cinta de cobre, helicoidal aplicada sobre escudo aislante semiconductor.
 Las chaquetas se pueden aplicar sobre el aislamiento o la armadura.
 Chaqueta de cable: PVC resistente a la luz solar.
 KITS DE EMPALME
 El empalme de cables MV no está permitido sin la aprobación previa del propietario y el ingeniero.
 Para obtener la aprobación de empalme, presente las razones del empalme, las calificaciones del
empalme de cable, los materiales y los métodos, así como los procedimientos de prueba para
garantizar la esperanza de vida del empalme.
 TERMINACIONES SÓLIDAS
 Terminaciones de cables blindados: Cumpla con las siguientes clases de IEEE 48. La clase de
aislamiento es equivalente a la del cable. Incluye correa de tierra de escudo para terminaciones de
cables blindados.
 Clase 1 Terminaciones: Tipo modular, amueblado como un kit, con tubo de alivio de estrés;
múltiples, de silicona moldeada de goma, módulos aislantes; correa de protección de tierra;
y conector de compresión.
 CONECTORES AISLADOS SEPARABLES
 Descripción: Sistema modular, conforme a IEEE 386, con desconexión, terminadores de cable de
un solo polo y con terminales a juego, estacionarios, enchufables, sin salida diseñados para la
tensión del cable y para el sellado contra la humedad.
 Terminaciones en puntos de distribución: Tipo modular, que consiste en terminadores instalados

en cables y uniones terminales modulares, sin salida, para interconectar cables.
 Terminadores de cable de ruptura de carga: unidades de tipo codo con 200-A de carga marca/
rotura y clasificación de corriente continua; coordinado con el diámetro de aislamiento, el tamaño
del conductor y el material del cable que se termina. Incluya el punto de prueba en el cuerpo del
terminador que está acoplado a la capacitancia.
 Terminadores de cable sin conexión: unidad de tipo codo con clasificación de corriente continua
600-A; diseñado para desconectar y conectar sin energía; coordinado con el diámetro de
aislamiento, el tamaño del conductor y el material del cable que se termina. Incluya el punto de
prueba en el cuerpo del terminador que está acoplado a la capacitancia.
 Uniones terminales de frente muerto: Grupos montados en soporte modular de terminales

estacionarios de frente muerto que se acoplan y coinciden con los terminadores de cable por
encima. Unidades de dos, tres o cuatro terminales, como se indica, con conexión de conductor
estanca entre terminales completamente nominal, aislada y con conexión a tierra, soportes de
accesorios estándar del fabricante, soportes de montaje de acero inoxidable y hardware de fijación.
 Tapa protectora: Aislante, protección electrostática, tapón de sellado de agua con cable de drenaje.
 Accesorio de alimentación portátil: Conexión de dos terminales, sin salida dispuesta para
montaje extraíble en el soporte accesorio de la unión de terminal estacionaria.
 Kit de puesta a tierra: codos saltados, unidades de accesorios portátiles de alimentación,
tapas de protección, barras de prueba adecuadas para poner a tierra simultáneamente tres
fases de alimentadores y estuche de transporte.
 Aislante Standoff: Terminal portátil, solo sin salida para montaje extraíble en soporte
accesorio de unión terminal estacionaria. Aisladores adecuados para el aislamiento
completamente aislado del terminador de cable-codo energizado.
 Indicadores de falla de punto de prueba: Clasificaciones de disparo de corriente aplicables y

dispuestas para su instalación en puntos de prueba de conectores separables de rotura de carga, y
completas con indicadores de autorregulación capaces de instalarse con un hot stick de escopeta y
probarse con una herramienta de prueba.
 Juego de herramientas: Hot stick de escopeta con indicador de terminal energizado, herramienta de
prueba de indicador de falla y estuche de transporte.
 MATERIALES IMPERMEABILIZANTES
 Cinta para primer curso en objetos metálicos: cinta de embalaje de tubos de PVC de 10 milímetros
(250 micrómetros) de espesor, protectora contra la corrosión, resistente a la humedad.
 Cinta de prueba de arco: cinta ignífuga, flexible, conformable, intumescente a 0,3 pulgadas (8
mm) de espesor, compatible con la chaqueta del cable.
 Cinta de tela de vidrio: tipo adhesivo sensible a la presión, de 1/2 pulgada (13 mm) de ancho.
 CONTROL DE CALIDAD DE LA FUENTE

 Pruebe e inspeccione los cables según ICEA S-97-682 antes de enviarlos.
EJECUCIÓN
 INSTALACIÓN
 Instalar cables según IEEE 576.
 Conductores de tracción: No exceda las tensiones máximas de tracción recomendadas por el

fabricante y los valores de presión de la pared lateral.
 Cuando sea necesario, use un compuesto de tracción o lubricante aprobado por el fabricante
que no deteriore el conductor o el aislamiento.
 Utilice medios de tracción, incluyendo cinta de pescado, cable, cuerda y agarres de cables
de tejido de cesta que no dañarán los cables y las pistas de rodadura. No utilice enganches
de cuerda para tirar de la fijación al cable.
 Instale cables expuestos paralelos y perpendiculares a las superficies de los elementos

estructurales expuestos y siga los contornos de la superficie cuando sea posible.
 Instale cinta de advertencia de "cable enterrado" de 12 pulgadas (305 mm) por encima de los cables.
 En las alcantarillas, los orificios de mano, las cajas de extracción, las cajas de conexiones y las
bóvedas de cables, los cables de tren alrededor de las paredes por la ruta más larga de entrada a
salida y los cables de soporte a intervalos adecuados para evitar el hundimiento.
 El empalme de cables MV no está permitido sin la aprobación previa del propietario e ingeniero.
 Instale terminaciones en los extremos de los conductores y selle los extremos de los cables
multiconductores con kits estándar.
 Instale componentes de conector aislado separables de la siguiente manera:
 Casquillo protector: En cada empalme del terminal, con uno en cada terminal al cual ningún
alimentador está indicado para ser conectado.
 Accesorio de alimentación portátil: Tres.
 Aislante de separación: Tres.
 Prueba de arco: A menos que se indique lo contrario, cable de media tensión a prueba de arco en
lugares no protegidos por conducto, bandeja de cable, entierro directo o materiales de terminación.
Además de las instrucciones escritas del fabricante de la cinta aislante de arco, aplique la prueba
de arco de la siguiente manera:
 Funda de cable limpia.

 Envuelva los componentes metálicos del cable con cinta para envolver tubos de 10 milímetros
(250 micrómetros).
 Contornos de superficie lisos con masilla aislante eléctrica.
 Aplique cinta aislante de arco en una capa de media solapa con el lado recubierto hacia el cable.
 Cinta de protección contra el arco con bandas de 1 pulgada- (25 mm) de ancho de media
solapa, adhesivo, cinta de tela de vidrio 2 pulgadas (50 mm) o.c.
 Seal around cables passing through fire-rated elements according to Division 07 Section
"Penetration Firestopping."
 Ground shields of shielded cable at terminations, splices, and separable insulated connectors.
Ground metal bodies of terminators, splices, cable and separable insulated-connector fittings, and
hardware.
 Identify cables according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
 Execute site tests in accordance to specification 260801 Acceptance Testing Requirements section.
END OF SECTION 260513
SECTION 260519 – LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Specifications:
1. 260001 General Requirements for Electrical Systems.

2. 019113 General Commissioning Requirements.
3. 260801 General Acceptance Testing Requirements for Electrical Systems.
4. Current Revision of the Controls Specifications
5. 260553 Identification for Electrical Systems.
6. 260548 Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Building wires and cables rated 600V and less

2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600V and less
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

B. Provide line item C/D/E Compliance Statement with each requirement listed in this specification and
the related specifications outlined in 1.1 A above, in accordance with specification 260001. Reasoning
behind Deviations and Exceptions shall be described.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CALBES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Alcan Products Corporation; Alcan Cable Division.

2. American Insulated Wire Corp.; a Leviton Company.
3. General Cable Corporation.
4. Senator Wire & Cable Company.
5. Southwire Company
B. Aluminium or Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70.
C. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for Types THHN-THWN and XHHW.
D. Multiconductor Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for metal-clad cable, Type MC and Type SO with
ground wire.
2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES

1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.

2. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc.
3. O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC.
4. 3M; Electrical Products Division.
5. Tyco Electronics Corp
B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and
class for application and service indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS

A. Feeders: Aluminum or Copper as indicated per drawings. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller;
stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.
B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.
3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND

WIRING METHODS
A. Service Entrance: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.
B. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.
C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single
conductors in raceway.
D. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN-THWN, single
conductors in raceway.
E. Feeders Installed below Raised Flooring: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.
F. Feeders in Cable Tray Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.
G. Exposed Branch Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.
H. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in
raceway, or Metal-clad cable, Type MC for lighting and general use branch circuits only. Type MC Cable
of all sizes shall be terminated with insulated cable connectors to protect the cable insulation from sharp
edges.
I. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN-THWN,
single conductors in raceway.
J. Branch Circuits Installed Below Raised Flooring: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.
K. Branch Circuits in Cable Tray: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.
L. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord with stainless-steel, wire-
mesh, strain relief device at terminations to suit application.
M. Class 1 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.
N. Class 2 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not
deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling
tensions and sidewall pressure values.
C. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will
not damage cables or raceway.
D. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members and
follow surface contours where possible.
E. Support cables according to Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."
F. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 26 Section "Identification for
Elec- trical Systems."
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening
values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
B. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or
better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.
C. Delete subparagraph below unless aluminum conductors are specified.
1. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice and tap conductor for aluminum conductors.
D. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 12 inches of slack.
3.5 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with re-
quirements in Division 26 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling."
3.6 FIRESTOPPING
A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original
fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare test
reports.
B. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
C. Tests and Inspections:
1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test all
feeders and critical branch circuits for compliance with requirements.
2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance
Test- ing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
3. Infrared Scanning: During Level 4 commissioning, when systems are powering simulated load,
perform an infrared scan of each termination for all conductors No. 3 AWG and larger.
a) Instrument: Use an infrared scanning video camera device designed to measure

temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide
calibration record for device.
b) Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies terminations are
checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected,
remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.
D. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:
1. Test procedures used.

2. Test results that comply with requirements.
3. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve
compliance with requirements.
E. E. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
SECTION 260526 – GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Specifications:

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Grounding systems and equipment.
A. Provide line item C/D/E Compliance Statement with each requirement listed in this specification
and the related specifications outlined in 1.1 A above, in accordance with specification 260001.
Reasoning behind Deviations and Exceptions shall be described.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Informational Submittals: Plans showing dimensioned as-built locations of grounding features

specified in "Field Quality Control" Article, including the following:
1. Test wells.
2. Ground rods.
3. Ground rings.
4. Grounding arrangements and connections for separately derived systems.
5. Grounding for sensitive electronic equipment.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For grounding to include in emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and
Maintenance Data," include the following:
1. Instructions for periodic testing and inspection of grounding features at test wells, ground
rings, and grounding connections for separately derived systems based on NETA MTS and
NFPA 70B.
a. Tests shall determine if ground-resistance or impedance values remain within

specified maximums, and instructions shall recommend corrective action if values do
not.
b. Include recommended testing intervals.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.
1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.
B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUCTORS
A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by
applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Bare Copper Conductors:

1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3.
2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.
3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33.
4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter.
5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor.
6. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8
inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.
7. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper
ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.
C. Bare Grounding Conductor and Conductor Protector for Wood Poles:
1. No. 4 AWG minimum, soft-drawn copper.

2. Conductor Protector: Half-round PVC or wood molding; if wood, use pressure-treated fir,
cypress, or cedar.
D. Grounding Bus: Predrilled rectangular bars of annealed copper, 1/4 by 4 inches in cross section,
with 9/32-inch holes spaced 1-1/8 inches apart. Stand-off insulators for mounting shall comply
with UL 891 for use in switchboards, 600 V. Lexan or PVC, impulse tested at 5000 V.
2.2 CONNECTORS
A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in
which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items
connected.
B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, pressure type with at least
two bolts.
C. Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe.
D. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for

materials being joined and installation conditions.
E. Bus-bar Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless compression-type wire
terminals, and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar.
2.3 GROUNDING ELECTRODES
A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel; 3/4 inch by 10 feet in diameter.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATIONS
A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No.
6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated.
B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare copper conductor, No. 2/0 AWG minimum.
1. Bury at least 24 inches below grade.

2. Duct-Bank Grounding Conductor: Bury 12 inches above duct bank when indicated as part
of duct-bank installation.
C. Isolated Grounding Conductors: Green-colored insulation with continuous yellow stripe. On
feeders with isolated ground, identify grounding conductor where visible to normal inspection,
with alternating bands of green and yellow tape, with at least three bands of green and two bands
of yellow.
D. Grounding Bus: Install in electrical and telephone equipment rooms, in rooms housing service
equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.
1. Install bus on insulated spacers 2 inches minimum from wall, 6 inches above finished floor
unless otherwise indicated.
2. Where indicated on both sides of doorways, route bus up to top of door frame, across top of
doorway, and down to specified height above floor; connect to horizontal bus.
E. Conductor Terminations and Connections:
1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors.

2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors except at test wells and as otherwise
indicated.
3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors.
4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.
3.2 GROUNDING UNDERGROUND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS
A. Comply with IEEE C2 grounding requirements.
B. Grounding Manholes and Handholes: Install a driven ground rod through manhole or handhole
floor, close to wall, and set rod depth so 4 inches will extend above finished floor. If necessary,
install ground rod before manhole is placed and provide No. 1/0 AWG bare, tinned-copper
conductor from ground rod into manhole through a waterproof sleeve in manhole wall. Protect
ground rods passing through concrete floor with a double wrapping of pressure-sensitive
insulating tape or heat-shrunk insulating sleeve from 2 inches above to 6 inches below concrete.
Seal floor opening with waterproof, non-shrink grout.
C. Grounding Connections to Manhole Components: Bond exposed-metal parts such as inserts, cable
racks, pulling irons, ladders, and cable shields within each manhole or handhole, to ground rod or
grounding conductor. Make connections with No. 4 AWG minimum, stranded, hard-drawn copper
bonding conductor. Train conductors level or plumb around corners and fasten to manhole walls.
Connect to cable armor and cable shields according to written instructions by manufacturer of
splicing and termination kits.
D. Pad-Mounted Transformers and Switches: Install two ground rods and ground ring around the pad.
Ground pad-mounted equipment and noncurrent-carrying metal items associated with substations
by connecting them to underground cable and grounding electrodes. Install tinned-copper
conductor not less than No. 2 AWG for ground ring and for taps to equipment grounding
terminals. Bury ground ring not less than 6 inches from the foundation.
3.3 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING
A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those
required by NFPA 70:
1. Feeders and branch circuits.

2. Lighting circuits.
3. Receptacle circuits.
4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.
5. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.
6. Flexible raceway runs.
7. Armored and metal-clad cable runs.
8. Busway Supply Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor from grounding
bus in the switchgear, switchboard, or distribution panel to equipment grounding bar
terminal on busway.
9. Computer and Rack-Mounted Electronic Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment
grounding conductor in branch-circuit runs from equipment-area power panels and power-
distribution units.
B. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct-mounted

electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, dampers,
humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct and
connected metallic piping.
C. Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install a separate insulated equipment
grounding conductor to each electric water heater and heat-tracing cable. Bond conductor to heater
units, piping, connected equipment, and components.
D. Isolated Grounding Receptacle Circuits: Install an insulated equipment grounding conductor

connected to the receptacle grounding terminal. Isolate conductor from raceway and from
panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the
applicable derived system or service unless otherwise indicated.
E. Isolated Equipment Enclosure Circuits: For designated equipment supplied by a branch circuit or
feeder, isolate equipment enclosure from supply circuit raceway with a nonmetallic raceway fitting
listed for the purpose. Install fitting where raceway enters enclosure, and install a separate
insulated equipment grounding conductor. Isolate conductor from raceway and from panelboard
grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable
derived system or service unless otherwise indicated.
F. Signal and Communication Equipment: In addition to grounding and bonding required by NFPA
70, provide a separate grounding system complying with requirements in TIA/ATIS J-STD- 607-
A.
1. For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other communication equipment, provide No. 4
AWG minimum insulated grounding conductor in raceway from grounding electrode
system to each service location, terminal cabinet, wiring closet, and central equipment
location.
2. Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets: Terminate grounding
conductor on a 1/4-by-4-by-12-inch grounding bus.
3. Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding terminal.
G. Metal Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Install grounding electrode and a separate
insulated equipment grounding conductor in addition to grounding conductor installed with
branch- circuit conductors.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise
indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be
subjected to strain, impact, or damage.
B. Ground Bonding Common with Lightning Protection System: Comply with NFPA 780 and UL 96
when interconnecting with lightning protection system. Bond electrical power system ground
directly to lightning protection system grounding conductor at closest point to electrical service
grounding electrode. Use bonding conductor sized same as system grounding electrode conductor,
and install in conduit.
C. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches below finished floor or final grade unless
otherwise indicated.
1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as otherwise
indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating if any.
2. For grounding electrode system, install at least three rods spaced at least one-rod length
from each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes, and
connect to the service grounding electrode conductor.
D. Test Wells: Ground rod driven through drilled hole in bottom of handhole. Handholes are
specified in Division 26 Section "Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems," and
shall be at least 12 inches deep, with cover.
1. Test Wells: Install at least one test well for each service unless otherwise indicated. Install
at the ground rod electrically closest to service entrance. Set top of test well flush with
finished grade or floor.
E. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance except
where routed through short lengths of conduit.
1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate
any adjacent parts.
2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install
bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.
3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect-type connection is
required, use a bolted clamp.
F. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:

1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from
building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances
to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes; use a bolted
clamp connector or bolt a lug-type connector to a pipe flange by using one of the lug bolts
of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding
conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to
conductor at each end.
2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters.
Connect to pipe with a bolted connector.
3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff
valve.
G. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of
associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install bonding jumper to bond across
flexible duct connections to achieve continuity.
H. Grounding for Steel Building Structure: Install a driven ground rod at base of each corner column
and at intermediate exterior columns at distances not more than 60 feet apart.
I. Ground Ring: Install a grounding conductor, electrically connected to each building structure
ground rod and to each building structure driven ground rod, extending around the perimeter of
building.
1. Install bare copper conductor not less than No. 2/0 AWG for ground ring and for taps to
building steel.
2. Bury ground ring not less than 24 inches from building's foundation.
J. Ufer Ground (Concrete-Encased Grounding Electrode): Fabricate according to NFPA 70; use a
minimum of 40 feet of bare copper conductor not smaller than No. 2/0 AWG.
1. Bond grounding conductor to reinforcing steel in at least four locations and to anchor bolts.
Extend grounding conductor below grade and connect to building's grounding grid or to
grounding electrode external to concrete.
3.5 LABELING
A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section 260553 - Identification for Electrical Systems
for instruction signs. The label or its text shall be green.
B. Install labels at the telecommunications bonding conductor and grounding equalizer and at the
grounding electrode conductor where exposed.
1. Label Text: "If this connector or cable is loose or if it must be removed for any reason,
notify the facility manager."
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B. Perform the Following Tests and Inspections:
1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been
energized, test for compliance with requirements.
2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted, electrical
connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
3. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance
level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, at ground test wells.
Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are connected.
a. Measure ground resistance no fewer than two full days after last trace of precipitation
and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or
seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural
ground resistance.
b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81.
4. Prepare dimensioned Drawings locating each test well, ground rod and ground-rod
assembly, and other grounding electrodes. Identify each by letter in alphabetical order, and
key to the record of tests and observations. Include the number of rods driven and their
depth at each location, and include observations of weather and other phenomena that may
affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve test results.
C. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
E. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values:
1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 kVA and Less: 10 ohms.
2. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 to 1000 kVA: 5 ohms.
3. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity More Than 1000 kVA: 3 ohms.
4. Power Distribution Units or Panelboards Serving Electronic Equipment: 1 ohm(s).
5. Substations and Pad-Mounted Equipment: 5 ohms.
6. Manhole Grounds: 10 ohms.
F. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect
promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.
SECTION 260529 – HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Specifications:

1.2 SUMMARY
1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.

2. Construction requirements for concrete bases.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Design supports for multiple raceways, including comprehensive engineering
analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria
indicated.
B. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported
systems and its contents.
C. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported

equipment and connected systems and components.
D. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads calculated
or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the applied force.
B. Product Data: For the following:
1. Steel slotted support systems.

2. Nonmetallic slotted support systems.
C. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Show fabrication and
installation details and include calculations for the following:
1. Trapeze hangers. Include Product Data for components.

2. Steel slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components.
3. Nonmetallic slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components.
4. Equipment supports.
A. Welding certificates.
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding
Code - Steel."
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
Comply with NOM-001-SEDE-2012
COORDINATION
C. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,
reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.
D. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are
specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field
assembly.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:
a. Allied Tube & Conduit.

b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
c. ERICO International Corporation.
d. GS Metals Corp.
e. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
f. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd.
2. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to

MFMA-4.
3. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.
B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1, NECA 101 and NOM-001-SEDE-2012
C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel and malleable-iron hangers, clamps, and associated
fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.
D. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes,
and bars; black and galvanized.
E. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their
supports to building surfaces include the following:
1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement

concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for
supported loads and building materials where used.
a. Hilti Inc.
b. ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc.
c. MKT Fastening, LLC.
d. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit.
2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated, stainless steel, for use in

hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate
for supported loads and building materials in which used.
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of

the following:
1) Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.

2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc.
3) Hilti Inc.
4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc.
5) MKT Fastening, LLC.
3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS
Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.
4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached
structural element.
5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325.
6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.
7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.
2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES
A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of
supported equipment.
B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel shapes
and plates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 and NOM-001-SEDE-2012 for application of hangers and
supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.
B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for
EMT, IMC, and RMC as scheduled in NECA 1, where its Table 1 lists maximum spacing less than
stated in NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter.
C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted support
system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding
specified design load limits.
1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps, single-bolt
conduit clamps, single-bolt conduit clamps using spring friction action for retention in
support channel.
D. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-1/2-
inch and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended
ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.
3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 and NOM-001-SEDE-2012 for installation requirements
except as specified in this Article.
B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and RMC
may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70.
C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will
be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static
design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb.
D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten
electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless
otherwise indicated by code:
1. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.

2. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor
fasteners on solid masonry units.
3. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.
4. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock
washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches thick or
greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4
inches thick.
5. To Steel: [Welded threaded studs complying with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, with lock washers
and nuts] [Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69]
[Spring- tension clamps].
6. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.
7. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,
panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers,
and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate by means that meet seismic-
restraint strength and anchorage requirements.
E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars.
F. Cut and de-burr all all-threads and cap to protect workers from injury.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS
A. Comply with installation requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for site-
fabricated metal supports.
B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to
support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
3.4 CONCRETE BASES
A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches larger in both
directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from edge
of the base. LAPEM (Equipment and Materials Testing Laboratory) must be present during the
construction process.
B. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete. Concrete materials, reinforcement, and

placement requirements are specified in Division 03 Section "[Cast-in-Place Concrete]
[Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete]."
C. Anchor equipment to concrete base.
1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting
drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be
embedded.
2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.
3.5 PAINTING
A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately
after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with
SSPC- PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
B. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-
repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
SECTION 260533 – RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Specifications:
5. 260543 Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems.
8. 260529 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.
9. 260544 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling.
1.2 SUMMARY
Un. Section Includes:

1. Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings.
2. Nonmetal conduits, tubing, and fittings.
3. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters.
4. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.
5. Handholes and boxes for exterior underground cabling.
B. Items indicated in RED are site specific. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to verify
requirements and compliance based on geography or special AHJ requirements.
Un. Provide line item C/D/E Compliance Statement with each requirement listed in this specification
B. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures,
and cabinets.
C. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, and
attachment details.
Un. Coordination Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are
shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of items involved:
1. Structural members in paths of conduit groups with common supports.
2. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in paths of conduit groups with
common supports.
B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosures, cabinets, and conduit racks and their mounting
provisions, including those for internal components, from manufacturer.
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of
assembled components or on calculation.
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate
and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and
their installation requirements.
4. Detailed description of conduit support devices and interconnections on which the
certification is based and their installation requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.
2. Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co.
3. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of EGS Electrical Group.
4. Robroy Industries.
5. Southwire Company.
6. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
7. Western Tube and Conduit Corporation.
8. Wheatland Tube Company; a division of John Maneely Company.
B. Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
C. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.
D. PVC-Coated Steel Conduit: PVC-coated rigid steel conduit.

1. Comply with NEMA RN 1.
2. Coating Thickness: 0.040 inch, minimum.
E. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.
F. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360.
G. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B.

1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886 and NFPA 70.
2. Fittings for EMT:
a. Material: Steel.
b. Type: Insulated setscrew, insulated compression or insulating bushings in damp and
wet locations.
3. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651, rated for
environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding jumper.
H. Joint Compound for GRC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having jurisdiction
for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded conduit
joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.
2.2 PVC-COATED STEEL CONDUIT
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements provide products by one of the following:
1. Kor Kap.
2. Perma-Cote.
3. Plasti Bond.
B. Description: PVC-coated rigid steel conduit.

1. ETL Verified and must bear the ETL PVC-001 label.
2. Hot dip galvanized inside and out.
3. Comply with NEMA RN 1.
4. PVC Coating Thickness: 0.040 inch, minimum.
5. Conduit must have a urethane coating on the interior of all conduit and fittings
a. Urethane coating thickness: .020 inch, minimum.
C. Fittings for Conduit; listed for type and size raceway with which used, and for application and
environment in which installed.
1. Condulets to be supplied with plastic encapsulated stainless steel cover screws.
2.3 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS

1. Anamet Electrical, Inc.
2. Arnco Corporation.
3. CANTEX Inc.
4. Condux International, Inc.
5. Electri-Flex Company.
6. Kraloy.
7. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.
8. RACO; a Hubbell company.
B. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as
defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
C. RNC: Type EPC-40-PVC, complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless otherwise indicated.
D. Fittings for RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.
E. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall have a VOC content of 510 and 550 g/L or less,
respectively, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2.4 METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS

1. Cooper B-Line, Inc.
2. Hoffman; a Pentair company.
3. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
B. Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 1 or Type 3R for outdoor
locations unless otherwise indicated, and sized according to NFPA 70.
1. Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
C. Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters,
hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for
complete system.
D. Wireway Covers: Screw-cover type unless otherwise indicated.
E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.
2.5 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS

1. Adalet.
2. Cooper Technologies Company; Cooper Crouse-Hinds.
3. EGS/Appleton Electric.
4. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company.
5. Hoffman; a Pentair company.
6. Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Division.
7. Kraloy.
8. Mono-Systems, Inc.
9. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of EGS Electrical Group.
10. RACO; a Hubbell Company.
11. Robroy Industries.
12. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company.
13. Stahlin Non-Metallic Enclosures; a division of Robroy Industries.
15. Wiremold / Legrand.
B. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets
installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations.
C. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.
D. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with
gasketed cover.
E. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 2 and UL 514C.
F. Metal Floor Boxes:

1. Material: Cast metal.
2. Type: Fully adjustable.
3. Shape: Rectangular.
4. Listing and Labeling: Metal floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
G. Luminaire Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of luminaire weighing 50 lb.
Outlet boxes designed for attachment of luminaires weighing more than 50 lb shall be listed and
marked for the maximum allowable weight.
H. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
I. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773,
galvanized, cast iron with gasketed cover.
J. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed
box.
K. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep.
L. Gangable boxes are prohibited.
M. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 12 with continuous-hinge
cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated.
1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.
2. Nonmetallic Enclosures: Fiberglass.
3. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel.
N. Cabinets:
1. NEMA 250, Type 12 galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable
front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.
2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge.
3. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage.
4. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.
5. Nonmetallic cabinets shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified
testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
2.6 HANDHOLES AND BOXES FOR EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND WIRING
A. General Requirements for Handholes and Boxes:

1. Boxes and handholes for use in underground systems shall be designed and identified as
defined in NFPA 70, for intended location and application.
2. Boxes installed in wet areas shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
B. Polymer-Concrete Handholes and Boxes with Polymer-Concrete Cover: Molded of sand and
aggregate, bound together with polymer resin, and reinforced with steel, fiberglass, or a
combination of the two.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:
a. Armorcast Products Company.
b. Carson Industries LLC.
c. CDR Systems Corporation; Hubbell Power Systems.
d. Oldcastle Precast, Inc.; Christy Concrete Products.
e. Synertech Moulded Products; a division of Oldcastle Precast, Inc.
2. Standard: Comply with SCTE 77.
3. Configuration: Designed for flush burial with open bottom unless otherwise indicated.
4. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural
load rating consistent with enclosure and handhole location.
5. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50.
6. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRIC.".
7. Handholes Minimum Size: 12 Inches Wide by 24 Inches Long and Larger: Have inserts for
cable racks and pulling-in irons installed before concrete is poured.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION
A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed Conduit: GRC.
2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: EMT.
3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, concrete encased.
4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,
Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC.
5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
B. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT.
2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT.
3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: GRC. Raceway locations include the
following:
a. Loading dock.
b. Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts, forklifts, and pallet-handling units.
c. Mechanical rooms.
4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT.
5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,
Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet
locations.
6. Damp or Wet Locations: GRC.
7. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4 stainless steel
in damp or wet locations.
C. Minimum Raceway Size: 1/2-inch trade size.
D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.
1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless
otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. Insulating bushings shall be added to
protect the cable insulation from stripping.
2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this type
of conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing
conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and apply in
thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer.
3. EMT: Use insulated setscrew, insulated compression or insulating bushings to protect the
cable insulation from sharp edges in damp or wet areas, steel fittings. Comply with NEMA
FB 2.10.
4. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with NEMA
FB 2.20.
E. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth.
F. Install surface raceways only where indicated on Drawings.
G. Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 120 deg F (49 deg C).
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements on
Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum conduits. Comply
with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and number of
floors.
B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes.
Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.
C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.
D. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems"
for hangers and supports.
E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.
F. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for control
wiring conduits, for which more bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches of changes in
direction.
G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.
Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.
H. Support conduit within 12 inches of enclosures to which attached.
I. Raceways Embedded Below Slabs:

1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement.
Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. Secure raceways
to reinforcement at maximum10-foot intervals.
2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings.
3. Arrange raceways to keep a minimum of 2 inches of concrete cover in all directions.
4. Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved by Architect for
each specific location.
J. Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings:

1. Use EMT for raceways.
2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or in
an enclosure.
K. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed
compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound
manufacturer's written instructions.
L. Coat field-cut threads on PVC-coated raceway with a corrosion-preventing conductive compound

prior to assembly.
M. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to

protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.
N. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes or
cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to 1-1/4-inch trade size and insulated throat metal
bushings on 1-1/2-inch trade size and larger conduits terminated with locknuts. Install insulated
throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits.
O. Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install locknuts
hand tight plus 1/4 turn more.
P. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in

the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path.
Q. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2-inch trade size and larger, use roll cutter or
a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length.
R. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less
than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap
underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use.
S. Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with
listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a
blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway
sealing fittings according to NFPA 70.
T. Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or boxes
are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all raceways
at the following points:
1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of cooled data hall
spaces.
2. Where an underground service raceway enters a building or structure.
3. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.
U. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding RNC and fittings.
V. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 72 inches of
flexible conduit for recessed and semi-recessed luminaires, equipment subject to vibration, noise
transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors.
W. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage.
X. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually
indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to center of box
Y. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block
and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces to provide a flat surface for a
raintight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box.
Z. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same
vertical channel.
AA. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes.
BB. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members
or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.
CC. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by
conduits.
DD. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.
EE. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT
A. Direct-Buried Conduit:
1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench
bottom as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for pipe less than 6 inches in
nominal diameter.
2. Install backfill as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."
4. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end of
conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as
temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to
provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches
of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling with
normal compaction as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."
5. Install manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building
entrances through floor unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for stub-up ducts
throughout length of elbow.
6. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at
building entrances through floor.
a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase
coupling with 3 inches of concrete for a minimum of 12 inches on each side of the
coupling.
b. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases and where conduits
penetrate building foundations, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60
inches from edge of foundation or equipment base. Install insulated grounding
bushings on terminations at equipment.
7. Underground Warning Tape: Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section
"Identification for Electrical Systems."
3.4 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND BOXES
A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with
connecting conduits to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances.
B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from
1/2- inch sieve to No. 4 sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.
C. Elevation: In paved areas, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of
other enclosures 1 inch above finished grade.
D. Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable arms, and insulators,
as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated. Select arm
lengths to be long enough to provide spare space for future cables but short enough to preserve
adequate working clearances in enclosure.
3.5 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with
requirements in Division 26 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and
Cabling."
3.6 FIRESTOPPING
A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with
requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.
2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating
recommended by manufacturer.
SECTION 260536 – CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Specifications:
4. Current Revision of Controls Specifications
8. 260526 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Ladder cable trays.
B. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include data indicating dimensions and finishes for each type of cable tray indicated.
C. Shop Drawings: For each type of cable tray.
1. Show fabrication and installation details of cable trays, including plans, elevations, and
sections of components and attachments to other construction elements. Designate
components and accessories, including clamps, brackets, hanger rods, splice-plate
connectors, expansion-joint assemblies, straight lengths, and fittings.
D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For seismic restraints.

1. Seismic-Restraint Details: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer, licensed
in the state where Project is located, who is responsible for their preparation.
2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting seismic restraints.
3. Detail fabrication, including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported cable
trays.
A. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans and sections, drawn to scale, on which the following items
are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:
1. Include scaled cable tray layout and relationships between components and adjacent
structural, electrical, and mechanical elements.
2. Vertical and horizontal offsets and transitions.
3. Clearances for access above and to side of cable trays.
4. Vertical elevation of cable trays above the floor or below bottom of ceiling structure.
B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For cable trays, accessories, and components, from
manufacturer.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and
C. Field quality-control reports.
D. Bidders shall provide a Compliance Review of the Specifications and Drawings. The Compliance
Review shall be a paragraph-by-paragraph review of the specifications with the following
information: “C”, “D”, or “E” marked in the margin of the original Specification and any
subsequent Addenda.
1. “C” Comply with no exceptions.

2. “D” Comply with deviations. For each and every deviation, provide a numbered footnote
with reasons for the proposed deviations and how the intent of the Specification can be
satisfied.
3. “E” Exception taken. For each and every exception, provide a numbered footnote with
reasons and possible alternatives (with costs).
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Seismic Performance: Cable trays and supports shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions
determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
1. The term "withstand" means "cable trays will remain in place without separation of any
parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified."
2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CABLE TRAYS
A. Cable Trays and Accessories: Identified as defined in NFPA 70 and marked for intended location,
application, and grounding.
1. Source Limitations: Obtain cable trays and components from single manufacturer.
B. Sizes and Configurations: See the Cable Tray Schedule on Drawings for specific requirements for
types, materials, sizes, and configurations.
C. Structural Performance: See articles on individual cable tray types for specific values for the
following parameters:
1. Uniform Load Distribution: Capable of supporting a uniformly distributed load on the

indicated support span when supported as a simple span and tested according to NEMA VE
1.
2. Concentrated Load: A load applied at midpoint of span and centerline of tray.
3. Load and Safety Factors: Applicable to both side rails and rung capacities.
2.3 LADDER CABLE TRAYS
1. Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co.

2. Chalfant Manufacturing Company.
3. Cooper B-Line, Inc.
4. Mono-Systems, Inc.
5. MP Husky.
6. Niedax-Kleinhuis USA, Inc.
7. Cablofil Inc.; a Legrand, North and Central America
B. Description:
1. Configuration: Two I-beam side rails with transverse rungs welded to side rails.
2. Rung Spacing: 9 inches o.c.
3. Radius-Fitting Rung Spacing: 9 inches at center of tray's width.
4. Minimum Cable-Bearing Surface for Rungs: 7/8-inch width with radius edges.
5. No portion of the rungs shall protrude below the bottom plane of side rails.
6. Structural Performance of Each Rung: Capable of supporting a maximum cable load, with a
safety factor of 1.5, plus a 200- concentrated load, when tested according to NEMA VE 1.
7. Minimum Usable Load Depth: 5 inches.
8. Straight Section Lengths: 12 feet except where shorter lengths are required to facilitate tray
assembly.
9. Width: 12-inches minimum unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
10. Fitting Minimum Radius: 12 inches
11. Class Designation: Comply with NEMA VE 1, Class 12B.
12. Splicing Assemblies: Bolted type using serrated flange locknuts.
13. Hardware and Fasteners: ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594 stainless steel, Type 316.
14. Splice Plate Capacity: Splices located within support span shall not diminish rated loading
capacity of cable tray.
15. Splicing Assembly Capacity: Splices located within support span shall not diminish rated
loading capacity of cable tray.
16. Hardware and Fasteners: ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594 stainless steel, Type 316.
17. Feeders 100A and larger: Cable Tray.
18. Feeders Less than 100A: Basket Tray.
2.4 MATERIALS AND FINISHES
A. Aluminum:
1. Materials: Alloy 6063-T6 according to ANSI H35.1/H 35.1M for extruded components, and
Alloy 5052-H32 or Alloy 6061-T6 according to ANSI H35.1/H 35.1M for fabricated parts.
2. Hardware: Chromium-zinc-plated steel, ASTM F 1136.
3. Hardware for Aluminum Cable Tray Used Outdoors: Stainless steel, Type 316, ASTM F
593 and ASTM F 594.
B. Tees, crosses, risers, elbows, and other fittings as indicated, of same materials and finishes as
cable tray.
C. Covers: Louvered type made of same materials and with same finishes as cable tray.
D. Barrier Strips: Same materials and finishes as for cable tray.

E. Cable tray supports and connectors, including bonding jumpers, as recommended by cable tray
manufacturer.
2.5 WARNING SIGNS
A. Lettering: 1-1/2-inch high, black letters on yellow background with legend "Warning! Not To Be
Used as Walkway, Ladder, or Support for Ladders or Personnel." Manufacturer’s label is
acceptable. There shall be one warning sign every 15’ of the tray. Add contractor provided labels
if distance exceeds 15’ spacing. Contractor provided labels shall be 3”x12” with 0.75” text on
yellow background.
B. Comply with requirements for fasteners in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical
Systems."
2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: Test and inspect cable trays according to NEMA FG 1.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CABLE TRAY INSTALLATION
A. Install cable trays according to NEMA VE 2.
B. Install cable trays as a complete system, including fasteners, hold-down clips, support systems,
barrier strips, adjustable horizontal and vertical splice plates, elbows, reducers, tees, crosses, cable
dropouts, adapters, covers, and bonding.
C. Install cable trays so that the tray is accessible for cable installation and all splices are accessible
for inspection and adjustment.
D. Remove burrs and sharp edges from cable trays.
E. Join aluminum cable tray with splice plates; use four square-neck carriage bolts and locknuts.
F. Fasten cable tray supports to building structure and install seismic restraints.
G. Design fasteners and supports to carry cable tray, the cables, and a concentrated load of 200 lb.
Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."
Comply with seismic-restraint details according to Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic
Controls for Electrical Systems."
H. Place supports so that spans do not exceed maximum spans on schedules and provide clearances
shown on Drawings. Install intermediate supports when cable weight exceeds the load-carrying
capacity of the tray rungs.
I. Construct supports from channel members, threaded rods, and other appurtenances furnished by
cable tray manufacturer. Arrange supports in trapeze or wall-bracket form as required by
application.
J. Support bus assembly to prevent twisting from eccentric loading.

K. Install center-hung supports for single-rail trays designed for 60 versus 40 percent eccentric
loading condition, with a safety factor of 3.
L. Locate and install supports according to NEMA FG 1. Do not install more than one cable tray
splice between supports.
M. Make connections to equipment with flanged fittings fastened to cable trays and to equipment.
Support cable trays independent of fittings. Do not carry weight of cable trays on equipment
enclosure.
N. Install expansion connectors where cable trays cross building expansion joints and in cable tray
runs that exceed dimensions recommended in NEMA FG 1. Space connectors and set gaps
according to applicable standard.
O. Make changes in direction and elevation using manufacturer's recommended fittings.
P. Make cable tray connections using manufacturer's recommended fittings.
Q. Seal penetrations through fire and smoke barriers. Comply with requirements in Division 07
Section "Penetration Firestopping."
R. Install capped metal sleeves for future cables through firestop-sealed cable tray penetrations of fire
and smoke barriers.
S. Install cable trays with enough workspace to permit access for installing cables.
T. Install barriers to separate cables of different systems, such as power, communications, and data
processing; or of different insulation levels, such as 600, 5000, and 15 000 V.
U. Install permanent covers, if used, after installing cable. Install cover clamps according to NEMA
VE 2.
V. Clamp covers on cable trays installed outdoors with heavy-duty clamps.
W. Install warning signs in visible locations on or near cable trays after cable tray installation.
3.2 CABLE TRAY GROUNDING
A. Ground cable trays according to NFPA 70 unless additional grounding is specified. Comply with
requirements in Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
B. Cable trays with electrical power conductors shall be bonded together with a grounding conductor
run in the tray along with the power conductors and bonded to the tray at 72-inch intervals. The
grounding conductor shall be sized according to NFPA 70, Article 250.122, "Size of Equipment
Grounding Conductors," and Article 392, "Cable Trays."
C. When using epoxy- or powder-coat painted cable trays as a grounding conductor, completely
remove coating at all splice contact points or ground connector attachment. After completing
splice- to-grounding-bolt attachment, repair the coated surfaces with coating materials
recommended by cable tray manufacturer.
D. Bond cable trays to power source for cables contained within with bonding conductors sized
according to NFPA 70, Article 250.122, "Size of Equipment Grounding Conductors."
3.3 CABLE INSTALLATION
A. Install cables only when each cable tray run has been completed and inspected.
B. Fasten cables on horizontal runs with cable clamps or cable ties according to NEMA VE 2.
Tighten clamps only enough to secure the cable, without indenting the cable jacket. Install cable
ties with a tool that includes an automatic pressure-limiting device.
C. Fasten cables on vertical runs to cable trays every 18 inches
D. Fasten and support cables that pass from one cable tray to another or drop from cable trays to
equipment enclosures. Fasten cables to the cable tray at the point of exit and support cables
independent of the enclosure. The cable length between cable trays or between cable tray and
enclosure shall be no more than 72 inches.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Remove paint from all connection points before making connections. Repair paint after the
connections are completed.
B. Connect raceways to cable trays according to requirements in NEMA VE 2.
A. Perform the following tests and inspections:
1. After installing cable trays and after electrical circuitry has been energized, survey for
compliance with requirements.
2. Visually inspect cable insulation for damage. Correct sharp corners, protuberances in cable
trays, vibrations, and thermal expansion and contraction conditions, which may cause or
have caused damage.
3. Verify that the number, size, and voltage of cables in cable trays do not exceed that
permitted by NFPA 70. Verify that communications or data-processing circuits are
separated from power circuits by barriers or are installed in separate cable trays.
4. Verify that there are no intruding items such as pipes, hangers, or other equipment in the
cable tray.
5. Remove dust deposits, industrial process materials, trash of any description, and any
blockage of tray ventilation.
6. Visually inspect each cable tray joint and each ground connection for mechanical
continuity. Check bolted connections between sections for corrosion. Clean and re-torque in
suspect areas.
7. Check for improperly sized or installed bonding jumpers.
8. Check for missing, incorrect, or damaged bolts, bolt heads, or nuts. When found, replace
with specified hardware.
9. Perform visual and mechanical checks for adequacy of cable tray grounding; verify that all
takeoff raceways are bonded to cable trays. Test entire cable tray system for continuity.
Maximum allowable resistance is 1 ohm.
B. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed cable trays and cables.

1. Install temporary protection for cables in open trays to safeguard exposed cables against
falling objects or debris during construction. Temporary protection for cables and cable tray
can be constructed of wood or metal materials and shall remain in place until the risk of
damage is over.
2. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by cable tray
manufacturer.
3. Repair damage to paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by cable tray
manufacturer.
SECTION 260543 – UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Specifications:

1.2 SUMMARY
1. Conduit, ducts, and duct accessories for direct-buried and concrete-encased duct banks, and
in single duct runs.
2. Handholes and pull boxes.
3. Manholes.
B. Duct-Bank Coordination Drawings: Show duct profiles and coordination with other utilities and
underground structures.
1. Include plans and sections, drawn to scale, and show bends and locations of expansion
fittings.
2. Provide duct bank pulling tension and de-rating calculations based upon the duct bank
configuration that will be installed. Provide additional conduits, larger conductor and duct
size as required to meet NEC requirements for underground duct banks.
3. Drawings and calculations shall be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer
and turned over to DCE engineer for review and approval.
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Duct-bank materials, including separators and miscellaneous components.

2. Ducts and conduits and their accessories, including elbows, end bells, bends, fittings, and
solvent cement.
3. Accessories for manholes, handholes, pull boxes, and other utility structures.
4. Warning tape.
B. Shop Drawings for Precast or Factory-Fabricated Underground Utility Structures: Include plans,
elevations, sections, details, attachments to other work, and accessories, including the following:
1. Duct entry provisions, including locations and duct sizes.
2. Reinforcement details.
3. Frame and cover design and manhole frame support rings.
4. Ladder details.
5. Grounding details.
6. Dimensioned locations of cable rack inserts, pulling-in and lifting irons, and sumps.
7. Joint details.
C. Shop Drawings for Factory-Fabricated Handholes and Pull Boxes Other Than Precast Concrete:
Include dimensioned plans, sections, and elevations, and fabrication and installation details,
including the following:
1. Duct entry provisions, including locations and duct sizes.

2. Cover design.
3. Grounding details.
4. Dimensioned locations of cable rack inserts, and pulling-in and lifting irons.
D. Product Certificates: For concrete and steel used in precast concrete manholes, pull boxes and
handholes, comply with ASTM C 858.
E. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer and testing agency.
F. Source quality-control reports.
G. Field quality-control reports.
A. Comply with IEEE C2.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver ducts to Project site with ends capped. Store nonmetallic ducts with supports to prevent
bending, warping, and deforming.
B. Store precast concrete and other factory-fabricated underground utility structures at Project site as
recommended by manufacturer to prevent physical damage. Arrange so identification markings
are visible.
C. Lift and support precast concrete units only at designated lifting or supporting points.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of ducts, manholes, handholes, and pull boxes with final
arrangement of other utilities, site grading, and surface features as determined in the field.
B. Coordinate elevations of ducts and duct-bank entrances into manholes, handholes, and pull boxes
with final locations and profiles of ducts and duct banks as determined by coordination with other
utilities, underground obstructions, and surface features. Revise locations and elevations from
those indicated as required to suit field conditions and to ensure that duct runs drain to manholes
and handholes, and as approved by Architect.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUIT
Un. Rigid Steel Conduit: Galvanized. Comply with ANSI C80.1.
B. RNC: NEMA TC 2, Type EPC-40-PVC, UL 651, with matching fittings by same manufacturer as
the conduit, complying with NEMA TC 3 and UL 514B.
2.2 NONMETALLIC DUCTS AND DUCT ACCESSORIES
Un. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. AFC Cable Systems.
2. ARNCO Corporation.
3. Beck Manufacturing.
4. Cantex, Inc.
5. CertainTeed Corp.
6. Condux International, Inc.
7. DCX-CHOL Enterprises, Inc.; ELECSYS Division.
8. Electri-Flex Company.
9. IPEX Inc.
10. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.
11. Manhattan Wire Products; a Belden company.
B. Duct Accessories:
1. Duct Separators: Factory-fabricated rigid PVC interlocking spacers, sized for type and sizes
of ducts with which used, and retained to provide minimum duct spacings indicated while
supporting ducts during concreting or backfilling.
2. Warning Tape: Underground-line warning tape specified in Division 26 Section
2.3 PRECAST CONCRETE HANDHOLES AND PULL BOXES
1. Christy Concrete Products.

2. Cretex Concrete Products West, Inc.; Riverton Division.
3. Elmhurst-Chicago Stone Co.
4. Oldcastle Precast Group.
5. Oldcastle Precast Inc.; Utility Vault Division.
6. Utility Concrete Products, LLC.
7. Wausau Tile Inc.
B. Comply with ASTM C 858 for design and manufacturing processes.
C. Ferrous metal hardware shall be hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153 (ASTM
A153M) and ASTM A123 (ASTM A123M).
D. Description: Factory-fabricated, reinforced-concrete, monolithically poured walls and bottom

unless open-bottom enclosures are indicated. Frame and cover shall form top of enclosure and
shall have load rating consistent with that of handhole or pull box.
1. Frame and Cover: Weatherproof steel frame, with hinged steel access door assembly with
tamper-resistant, captive, cover-securing stainless-steel bolts.
a. Cover Hinges: Concealed, with hold-open ratchet assembly.

b. Cover Handle: Recessed.
2. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50.
3. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRIC" or as required for each utility.
4. Configuration: Units shall be designed for flush burial and have integral closed bottom
5. Windows: Precast openings in walls, arranged to match dimensions and elevations of
approaching ducts and duct banks plus an additional 12 inches (300 mm) vertically and
horizontally to accommodate alignment variations.
a. Windows shall be located no less than 6 inches (150 mm) from interior surfaces of
walls, floors, or frames and covers of handholes, but close enough to corners to
facilitate racking of cables on walls.
b. Window opening shall have cast-in-place, welded wire fabric reinforcement for
field cutting and bending to tie in to concrete envelopes of duct banks.
c. Window openings shall be framed with at least two additional No. 4 steel reinforcing
bars in concrete around each opening.
6. Duct Entrances in Handhole Walls: Cast end-bell or duct-terminating fitting in wall for each
entering duct.
a. Type and size shall match fittings to duct or conduit to be terminated.

b. Fittings shall align with elevations of approaching ducts and be located near interior
corners of handholes to facilitate racking of cable.
7. Handholes 12 inches wide by 24 inches long (300 mm wide by 600 mm long) and larger
shall have inserts for cable racks and pulling-in irons installed before concrete is poured.
2.4 PRECAST MANHOLES
1. Christy Concrete Products.

2. Cretex Concrete Products West, Inc.; Riverton Division.
3. Elmhurst-Chicago Stone Co.
4. Oldcastle Precast Group.
5. Oldcastle Precast Inc.; Utility Vault Division.
6. Utility Concrete Products, LLC.
7. Wausau Tile Inc.
B. Comply with ASTM C 858 and with interlocking mating sections, complete with accessories,
hardware, and features.
1. Windows: Precast openings in walls, arranged to match dimensions and elevations of

approaching ducts and duct banks plus an additional 12 inches (300 mm) vertically and
horizontally to accommodate alignment variations.
a. Windows shall be located no less than 6 inches (150 mm) from interior surfaces of
walls, floors, or roofs of manholes, but close enough to corners to facilitate racking of
cables on walls.
b. Window opening shall have cast-in-place, welded wire fabric reinforcement for field
cutting and bending to tie in to concrete envelopes of duct banks.
c. Window openings shall be framed with at least two additional No. 4 steel reinforcing
bars in concrete around each opening.
2. Duct Entrances in Manhole Walls: Cast end-bell or duct-terminating fitting in wall for each
entering duct.
a. Type and size shall match fittings to duct or conduit to be terminated.
b. Fittings shall align with elevations of approaching ducts and be located near interior
corners of manholes to facilitate racking of cable.
C. Concrete Knockout Panels: 1-1/2 to 2 inches (38 to 50 mm) thick, for future conduit entrance and
sleeve for ground rod.
D. Joint Sealant: Asphaltic-butyl material with adhesion, cohesion, flexibility, and durability
properties necessary to withstand maximum hydrostatic pressures at the installation location with
the ground-water level at grade.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CORROSION PROTECTION
Un. Aluminum shall not be installed in contact with earth or concrete.
3.2 UNDERGROUND DUCT APPLICATION
Un. Ducts for Electrical Cables over 600 V: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40-PVC, 5” minimum size, in
concrete-encased duct bank unless otherwise indicated.
B. Ducts for Electrical Feeders 600 V and Less: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40-PVC, in concrete-
encased duct bank unless otherwise indicated.
C. Ducts for Electrical Branch Circuits: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40-PVC, in direct-buried duct bank
D. Underground Ducts for Telephone, Communications, or Data Utility Service Cables: RNC,
NEMA Type EPC-40-PVC, in concrete-encased duct bank unless otherwise indicated.
3.3 UNDERGROUND ENCLOSURE APPLICATION
Un. Handholes and Pull Boxes for 600 V and Less, Including Telephone, Communications, and Data
Wiring:
1. Units in Roadways and Other Deliberate Traffic Paths: Precast concrete. AASHTO HB 17,
H-20 structural load rating.
2. Units in Driveway, Parking Lot, and Off-Roadway Locations, Subject to Occasional,
Nondeliberate Loading by Heavy Vehicles: Precast concrete, AASHTO HB 17, H-20
structural load rating.
3. Units in Sidewalk and Similar Applications with a Safety Factor for Nondeliberate Loading
by Vehicles: Polymer concrete units, SCTE 77, Tier 8 structural load rating.
4. Units Subject to Light-Duty Pedestrian Traffic Only: Fiberglass-reinforced polyester resin,
structurally tested according to SCTE 77 with 3000-lbf (13 345-N) "Light-Duty" vertical
loading.
B. Manholes: Precast concrete.

1. Units Located in Roadways and Other Deliberate Traffic Paths by Heavy or Medium
Vehicles: H-20 structural load rating according to AASHTO HB 17.
2. Units Not Located in Deliberate Traffic Paths by Heavy or Medium Vehicles: H-10 load
rating according to AASHTO HB 17.
3.4 EARTHWORK
A. Excavation and Backfill: Comply with Division 31 Section "Earth Moving," but do not use heavy-
duty, hydraulic-operated, compaction equipment.
B. Restore surface features at areas disturbed by excavation and reestablish original grades unless
otherwise indicated. Replace removed sod immediately after backfilling is completed.
C. Restore areas disturbed by trenching, storing of dirt, cable laying, and other work. Restore
vegetation and include necessary topsoiling, fertilizing, liming, seeding, sodding, sprigging, and
mulching. Comply with Division 32 Sections "Turf and Grasses" and "Plants."
D. Cut and patch existing pavement in the path of underground ducts and utility structures according
to Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching."
3.5 DUCT INSTALLATION
A. Slope: Pitch ducts a minimum slope of 1:300 down toward manholes and handholes and away
from buildings and equipment. Slope ducts from a high point in runs between two manholes to
drain in both directions.
B. Curves and Bends: Use 5-degree angle couplings for small changes in direction. Use manufactured
long sweep bends with a minimum radius of 48 inches (1220 mm), both horizontally and
vertically, at other locations unless otherwise indicated.
C. Joints: Use solvent-cemented joints in ducts and fittings and make watertight according to
manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger couplings so those of adjacent ducts do not lie in same
plane.
D. Duct Entrances to Manholes and Concrete and Polymer Concrete Handholes: Use end bells,
spaced approximately 10 inches (250 mm) o.c. for 5-inch (125-mm) ducts, and vary
proportionately for other duct sizes.
1. Begin change from regular spacing to end-bell spacing 10 ft. (3 m) from the end bell
without reducing duct line slope and without forming a trap in the line.
2. Direct-Buried Duct Banks: Install an expansion and deflection fitting in each conduit in the
area of disturbed earth adjacent to manhole or handhole.
3. Grout end bells into structure walls from both sides to provide watertight entrances.
E. Building Wall Penetrations: Make a transition from underground duct to rigid steel conduit at least
10 ft. (3 m) outside the building wall without reducing duct line slope away from the building and
without forming a trap in the line. Use fittings manufactured for duct-to-conduit transition. Install
conduit penetrations of building walls as specified in Division 26 Section "General Requirements
for Electrical Systems."
F. Sealing: Provide temporary closure at terminations of ducts that have cables pulled. Seal spare
ducts at terminations. Use sealing compound and plugs to withstand at least 15-psig (1.03-MPa)
hydrostatic pressure.
G. Pulling Cord: Install 100-lbf- (445-N-) test nylon cord in ducts, including spares.
H. Concrete-Encased Ducts: Support ducts on duct separators.
1. Separator Installation: Space separators close enough to prevent sagging and deforming of
ducts, with not less than 4 spacers per 20 ft. (6 m) of duct. Secure separators to earth and to
ducts to prevent floating during concreting. Stagger separators approximately 6 inches (150
mm) between tiers. Tie entire assembly together using fabric straps; do not use tie wires or
reinforcing steel that may form conductive or magnetic loops around ducts or duct groups.
2. Concreting Sequence: Pour each run of envelope between manholes or other terminations in
one continuous operation.
a. Start at one end and finish at the other, allowing for expansion and contraction of
ducts as their temperature changes during and after the pour. Use expansion fittings
installed according to manufacturer's written recommendations, or use other specific
measures to prevent expansion-contraction damage.
b. If more than one pour is necessary, terminate each pour in a vertical plane and install
3/4-inch (19-mm) reinforcing rod dowels extending 18 inches (450 mm) into concrete
on both sides of joint near corners of envelope.
3. Pouring Concrete: Spade concrete carefully during pours to prevent voids under and
between conduits and at exterior surface of envelope. Do not allow a heavy mass of
concrete to fall directly onto ducts. Use a plank to direct concrete down sides of bank
assembly to trench bottom. Allow concrete to flow to center of bank and rise up in middle,
uniformly filling all open spaces. Do not use power-driven agitating equipment unless
specifically designed for duct-bank application.
4. Reinforcement: Reinforce concrete-encased duct banks where they cross disturbed earth and
where indicated. Arrange reinforcing rods and ties without forming conductive or magnetic
loops around ducts or duct groups.
5. Forms: Use walls of trench to form side walls of duct bank where soil is self-supporting and
concrete envelope can be poured without soil inclusions; otherwise, use forms.
6. Minimum Space between Ducts: 3 inches (75 mm) between ducts and exterior envelope
wall, 2 inches (50 mm) between ducts for like services, and 4 inches (100 mm) between
power and signal ducts.
7. Provide duct bank de-rating calculations based upon the duct bank configuration that will be
installed. Provide additional conduits, larger conductor and duct size as required to meet
NEC requirements for underground duct banks.
8. Depth: Install top of duct bank at least 24 inches (600 mm) below finished grade in areas
not subject to deliberate traffic, and at least 30 inches (750 mm) below finished grade in
deliberate traffic paths for vehicles unless otherwise indicated.
9. Stub-Ups: Use manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment
and at building entrances through the floor.
a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase
coupling with 3 inches (75 mm) of concrete.
b. Stub-Ups to Equipment: For equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases, extend
steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches (1500 mm) from edge of base.
Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.
10. Warning Tape: Bury warning tape approximately 12 inches (300 mm) above all concrete-
encased ducts and duct banks. Align tape parallel to and within 3 inches (75 mm) of the
centerline of duct bank. Provide an additional warning tape for each 12-inch (300-mm)
increment of duct bank width over a nominal 18 inches (450 mm). Space additional tapes 12
inches (300 mm) apart, horizontally.
I. Ducts for Medium Voltage Cables:
1. MV Cables shall not be installed inside buildings unless the following conditions are met:
a. MV cables shall be installed in galvanized rigid steel conduit.
b. Conduits shall be incased in a minimum of 4” of concrete on all sides.
c. Concrete encasement shall be painted red and labeled at minimum of 4’ linear
intervals with: “Danger High Voltage 12,000 Volts”.
2. MV Cables from separate power buses shall not be installed in common manholes,
handholes, pullboxes, junction boxes or cable vaults. Each power bus shall have a separate,
isolated installation so that a failure of one cable shall not affect any other bus.
J. Direct-Buried Conduit (600V and less only):
1. Single conduit runs, smaller than 1.5” diameter for site lighting, general use outdoor
receptacles and security.
2. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for duct bank. Prepare trench
bottoms as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for pipes less than 6 inches
(150 mm) in nominal diameter.
3. Install backfill as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."
4. Depth: Install top of duct bank at least 36 inches (900 mm) below finished grade unless
5. Warning Tape: Bury warning tape approximately 12 inches (300 mm) above all
underground conduits. Align tape parallel to and within 3 inches (75 mm) of the centerline
of conduit.
3.6 INSTALLATION OF CONCRETE MANHOLES, HANDHOLES, AND PULL BOXES
A. Precast Concrete Handhole and Manhole Installation:
1. Comply with ASTM C 891 unless otherwise indicated.

2. Install units level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting
ducts to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances.
3. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded
from 1-inch (25-mm) sieve to No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve and compacted to same density as
adjacent undisturbed earth.
B. Elevations:
1. Manhole Roof: Install with rooftop at least 15 inches (380 mm) below finished grade.
2. Manhole Frame: In paved areas and trafficways, set frames flush with finished grade. Set
other manhole frames 1 inch (25 mm) above finished grade.
3. Handhole Covers: In paved areas and trafficways, set surface flush with finished grade. Set
covers of other handholes 1 inch (25 mm) above finished grade.
4. Where indicated, cast handhole cover frame integrally with handhole structure.
C. Drainage: Install drains in bottom of manholes where indicated. Coordinate with drainage
provisions indicated.
D. Hardware: Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, and cable arms,
and insulators, as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated.
E. Fixed Manhole Ladders: Arrange to provide for safe entry with maximum clearance from cables
and other items in manholes.
F. Field-Installed Bolting Anchors in Manholes and Concrete Handholes: Do not drill deeper than 3-
7/8 inches (98 mm) for manholes and 2 inches (50 mm) for handholes, for anchor bolts installed in
the field. Use a minimum of two anchors for each cable stanchion.
G. Warning Sign: Install "Confined Space Hazard" warning sign on the inside surface of each
manhole cover.
3.7 GROUNDING
A. Ground underground ducts and utility structures according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and
Bonding for Electrical Systems."
1. Demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements on completion of installation of

underground ducts and utility structures.
2. Pull aluminum or wood test mandrel through duct to prove joint integrity and test for out-
of- round duct. Provide mandrel equal to 80 percent fill of duct. If obstructions are
indicated, remove obstructions and retest.
3. Test manhole and handhole grounding to ensure electrical continuity of grounding and
bonding connections. Measure and report ground resistance as specified in Division 26
Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
B. Correct deficiencies and retest as specified above to demonstrate compliance.
C. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.9 CLEANING
A. Pull leather-washer-type duct cleaner, with graduated washer sizes, through full length of ducts.
Follow with rubber duct swab for final cleaning and to assist in spreading lubricant throughout
ducts.
B. Clean internal surfaces of manholes, including sump. Remove foreign material.

SECTION 260544 – SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND
CABLING PART 1 - GENERAL
Un. Specifications:

1.2 SUMMARY
1. Sleeves for raceway and cable penetration of non-fire-rated construction walls and floors.
2. Sleeve-seal systems.
3. Sleeve-seal fittings.
4. Grout.
5. Silicone sealants.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SLEEVES
A. Wall Sleeves:
1. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated, plain
ends.
2. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure
pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.
B. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: Galvanized-steel

sheet; 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal
joint, with tabs for screw-fastening the sleeve to the board.
C. PVC-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.

D. Molded-PVC Sleeves: With nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
E. Molded-PE or -PP Sleeves: Removable, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth outer surface with
nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
F. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings:
1. Material: Galvanized sheet steel.

2. Minimum Metal Thickness:
a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches (1270 mm) and with
no side larger than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.052 inch (1.3 mm).
b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter 50 inches (1270 mm) or more and one or
more sides larger than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.138 inch (3.5 mm).
2.2 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS
A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between
sleeve and raceway or cable.

following:
a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.

b. CALPICO, Inc.
c. Metraflex Company (The).
d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
e. Proco Products, Inc.
2. Sealing Elements: EPDM rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include
type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
3. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel.
4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating, of length
required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.
2.3 SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS
A. Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made for embedding in

concrete slab or wall. Unit shall have plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center opening to
match piping OD.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:
a. Presealed Systems.
2.4 GROUT
A. Description: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior sealing openings in non-fire-rated
walls or floors.
B. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry,

hydraulic- cement grout.
C. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.

D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
2.5 SILICONE SEALANTS
A. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of grade

indicated below.
1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal
surfaces that are not fire rated.
B. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and
cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR NON-FIRE-RATED ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A. Comply with NECA 1.
B. Comply with NEMA VE 2 for cable tray and cable penetrations.
C. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Above-Grade Non-Fire-Rated Concrete and Masonry-Unit

Floors and Walls:
1. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors:
a. Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant
appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in
Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
b. Seal space outside of sleeves with mortar or grout. Pack sealing material solidly
between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect
material while curing.
2. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.
3. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or
cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed or unless seismic criteria require different
clearance.
4. Install sleeves for wall penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used.
Install sleeves during erection of walls. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both
surfaces of walls. Deburr after cutting.
5. Install sleeves for floor penetrations. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above
finished floor level. Install sleeves during erection of floors.
D. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies:
1. Use circular metal sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved
opening.
2. Seal space outside of sleeves with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies.
E. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boot-
type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.
F. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and
mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space
between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
G. Underground, Exterior-Wall and Floor Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to
allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing
sleeve-seal system.
3.2 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at raceway entries
into building.
B. Install type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable
material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals
and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure
plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION
A. Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed.
B. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and walls.
Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.
C. Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms.
D. Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.
SECTION 260548 – VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Specifications:

B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
Un. This Section includes the following:
1. Isolation pads.
2. Spring isolators.
3. Restrained spring isolators.
4. Channel support systems.
5. Restraint cables.
6. Hanger rod stiffeners.
7. Anchorage bushings and washers.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
Un. The IBC: International Building Code.
B. ICC-ES: ICC-Evaluation Service.
Un. Seismic Design:
1. Coordinate with structural engineer and local codes.

2. Occupancy Category.
3. Short Period Response Acceleration (SDS).
4. Mapped Spectral Response Acceleration for Short Periods (SS).
5. Seismic Design Category.
6. Importance Factor: I =.
7. Component Importance Factor (Ip) of per 13.1.3 of ASCE 7-05.
A. Provide line item C/D/E Compliance Statement with each requirement listed in this
specification and the related specifications outlined in 1.1 A above, in accordance with
specification 260001. Reasoning behind Deviations and Exceptions shall be described.
B. Product Data: For the following:
1. Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration
isolation device.
2. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each
type and size of seismic-restraint component used.
a. Tabulate types and sizes of seismic restraints, complete with report numbers and
rated strength in tension and shear as evaluated by an evaluation service member
of ICC-ES, or an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
b. Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and compliance
with requirements.
3. Restrained-Isolation Devices: Include ratings for horizontal, vertical, and combined loads.
C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For seismic-restraint details indicated to comply with performance
requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified
professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1. Design Calculations: Calculate static and dynamic loading due to equipment weight and
operation, seismic forces required to select vibration isolators and seismic restraints.
2. Indicate materials and dimensions and identify hardware, including attachment
and anchorage devices.
3. Field-fabricated supports.
4. Seismic-Restraint Details:
a. Design Analysis: To support selection and arrangement of seismic restraints.

Include calculations of combined tensile and shear loads.
b. Details: Indicate fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachments of restraints to the
restrained items and to the structure. Show attachment locations, methods, and
spacings. Identify components, list their strengths, and indicate directions and values
of forces transmitted to the structure during seismic events.
c. Preapproval and Evaluation Documentation: By an evaluation service member of
ICC-ES, or an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing
maximum ratings of restraint items and the basis for approval (tests or
calculations).
A. Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of seismic bracing for electrical components with
other systems and equipment in the vicinity, including other supports and seismic restraints.
B. Qualification Data: For professional engineer and testing agency.
C. Welding certificates.
D. Field quality-control test reports.
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to
conduct the testing indicated, that is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as
defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the IBC unless requirements in this Section
are more stringent.
C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding
Code - Steel."
D. Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis and shall
bear anchorage preapproval OPA number, preapproval by ICC-ES, or preapproval by another
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum seismic-restraint ratings.
Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based on calculations. If
preapproved ratings are not available, submittals based on independent testing are preferred.
Calculations (including combining shear and tensile loads) to support seismic-restraint designs
must be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.
E. Comply with NFPA 70.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:
1. Amber/Booth Company, Inc.

2. California Dynamics Corporation.
3. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
4. Hilti Inc.
5. Loos & Co.; Seismic Earthquake Division.
6. Mason Industries.
7. TOLCO Incorporated; a brand of NIBCO INC.
8. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd.
B. General Requirements for Restraint Components: Rated strengths, features, and application
requirements shall be as defined in reports by an evaluation service member of ICC-ES, or an
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Structural Safety Factor: Allowable strength in tension, shear, and pullout force of
components shall be at least four times the maximum seismic forces to which they will
be subjected.
C. Channel Support System: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated support assembly made of slotted
steel channels with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building
structure at the other end and other matching components and with corrosion-resistant coating;
and rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces.
D. Restraint Cables: ASTM A 603 galvanized-steel cables with end connections made of steel
assemblies with thimbles, brackets, swivels, and bolts designed for restraining cable service;
and with a minimum of two clamping bolts for cable engagement.
E. Hanger Rod Stiffener: Steel tube or steel slotted-support-system sleeve with internally bolted
connections to hanger rod. Do not weld stiffeners to rods.
F. Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchor: Neoprene bushings designed for rigid
equipment mountings and matched to type and size of anchors and studs.
G. Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene elements

and steel sleeves designed for rigid equipment mountings and matched to type and size of
attachment devices.
H. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One-piece, molded, oil- and water-resistant neoprene,
with a flat washer face.
I. Mechanical Anchor: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type in zinc-coated steel for
interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchors with strength
required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488. Minimum length of eight times
diameter.
J. Adhesive Anchor: Drilled-in and capsule anchor system containing polyvinyl or urethane
methacrylate-based resin and accelerator, or injected polymer or hybrid mortar adhesive. Provide
anchor bolts and hardware with zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for
exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according
to ASTM E 488.
2.2 FACTORY FINISHES
A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested equipment before
shipping.
1. Powder coating on springs and housings.

2. All hardware shall be galvanized. Hot-dip galvanize metal components for exterior use.
3. Baked enamel or powder coat for metal components on isolators for interior use.
4. Color-code or otherwise mark vibration isolation and seismic-control devices to
indicate capacity range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and equipment to receive seismic-control devices for compliance

with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance.
B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations before
installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 APPLICATIONS
A. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Secure raceways and cables to trapeze member with clamps
approved for application by an evaluation service member of ICC-ES, or an agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Hanger Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger rod stiffeners where indicated or scheduled on Drawings to
receive them and where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods due to seismic forces.
C. Strength of Support and Seismic-Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of
components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads
within specified loading limits.
3.3 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION
A. Equipment and Hanger Restraints:
1. Install restrained isolators on electrical equipment if required by manufacturer.

2. Install resilient, bolt-isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance
between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inch (3.2 mm).
3. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an evaluation service
member of ICC-ES, or an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction providing
required submittals for component.
B. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to
provide resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached to wall.
C. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at

flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.
D. Drilled-in Anchors:
1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for
anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling.
Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are
encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and
telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.
2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved
full design strength.
3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-duty
sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to
which anchor is to be fastened.
4. Adhesive Anchors: Clean holes to remove loose material and drilling dust prior to
installation of adhesive. Place adhesive in holes proceeding from the bottom of the hole and
progressing toward the surface in such a manner as to avoid introduction of air pockets in
the adhesive.
5. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench.
6. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless-steel anchors for
exterior applications.
3.4 ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION
A. Install flexible connections in runs of raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways
where they cross seismic joints, where adjacent sections or branches are supported by different
structural elements, and where they terminate with connection to equipment that is anchored to a
different structural element from the one supporting them as they approach equipment.
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare
test reports.
B. Perform tests and inspections.
C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Schedule test with Structural Engineer, before connecting anchorage device to restrained
component (unless post connection testing has been approved), and with at least seven
days advance notice.
3. Obtain Structural Engineer’s approval before transmitting test loads to structure. Provide
temporary load-spreading members.
4. Test at least four of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners selected
by Architect.
5. Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device.
6. If a device fails test, modify all installations of same type and retest until satisfactory
results are achieved.
D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation.
SECTION 260553 – IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Specifications:
Conditions, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Identification for raceways.

2. Identification of power and control cables.
3. Identification for conductors.
4. Underground-line warning tape.
5. Warning labels and signs.
6. Instruction signs.
7. Equipment identification labels.
8. Miscellaneous identification products.
A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.
B. Identification Schedule: An index of nomenclature of electrical equipment and system components

used in identification signs and labels.
A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 and IEEE C2.
C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.
D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.
E. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used
by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.
F. Comply with NOM-001-SEDE-2012
COORDINATION
G. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in
other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's
wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual; and with those required by codes,
standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project.
H. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces
where devices are to be applied.
I. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.
J. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 POWER RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters, for legend, and for minimum length of
color field for each raceway size.
B. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less:
1. Black letters on an orange field.

2. Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type.
C. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at More Than 600 V:

2. Legend: "DANGER CONCEALED HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING" with 3-inch high letters
on 20-inch centers.
D. Snap-Around Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Slit, pretensioned, flexible,
preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it
identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.
E. Tape and Stencil for Raceways Carrying Circuits More Than 600 V: 4-inch- wide black stripes on
10-inch centers diagonally over orange background that extends full length of raceway or duct and
is 12 inches wide. Stop stripes at legends.
F. Metal Tags: Brass or aluminum, 2 by 2 by 0.05 inch, with stamped legend, punched for use with
self-locking cable tie fastener.
2.2 METAL-CLAD CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color
field for each raceway and cable size.
B. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V and Less:

2. Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type.
C. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and
chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend
label.
2.3 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1 to
2 inches wide.
B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and
chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend
label.
C. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification
legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.
2.4 FLOOR MARKING TAPE
A. 2-inch wide, 5-mil pressure-sensitive vinyl tape, with black and white stripes and clear vinyl overlay.
2.5 UNDERGROUND-LINE WARNING TAPE
A. Tape:
1. Recommended by manufacturer for the method of installation and suitable to identify and
locate underground electrical and communications utility lines.
2. Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by burial operations.
3. Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert, and not subject to degrading when exposed
to acids, alkalis, and other destructive substances commonly found in soils.
B. Color and Printing:
1. Comply with ANSI Z535.1 through ANSI Z535.5.

2. Inscriptions for Red-Colored Tapes: ELECTRIC LINE, HIGH VOLTAGE.
3. Inscriptions for Orange-Colored Tapes: TELEPHONE CABLE, CATV CABLE,
COMMUNICATIONS CABLE, OPTICAL FIBER CABLE.
C. Tag: Type ID:
1. Detectable three-layer laminate, consisting of a printed pigmented polyolefin film, a solid

aluminum-foil core, and a clear protective film that allows inspection of the continuity of
the conductive core, bright-colored, continuous-printed on one side with the inscription of
the utility, compounded for direct-burial service.
2. Overall Thickness: 5 mils.
3. Foil Core Thickness: 0.35 mil.
4. Weight: 28 lb/1000 sq. ft.
5. 3-Inch Tensile According to ASTM D 882: 70 lbf, and 4600 psi.
2.6 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS
A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.
B. Baked-Enamel Warning Signs:
1. Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size
required for application.
2. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting.
3. Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches.
C. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:
1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD -

EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."
2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT
OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES."
3. Arc Flash Warning: Arc Flash Warning signs as required by NFPA 70E.
4. Other Warning Signs: As indicated on drawings and required by Code.
2.7 INSTRUCTION SIGNS
A. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch thick for signs up to 20 sq.
inches and 1/8 inch thick for larger sizes.
1. Engraved legend with black letters on white face.

2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners.
3. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable equipment.
2.8 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS (Factory Installed)
A. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting. White
letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.
2.9 CABLE TIES
A. General-Purpose Cable Ties: Fungus inert, self-extinguishing, one-piece, self-locking, Type 6/6
nylon.
1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch.

2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F, According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi.
3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F.
4. Color: Black except where used for color-coding.
B. UV-Stabilized Cable Ties: Fungus inert, designed for continuous exposure to exterior sunlight,
self- extinguishing, one-piece, self-locking, Type 6/6 nylon.

2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F, According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi.
4. Color: Black.
C. Plenum-Rated Cable Ties: Self-extinguishing, UV stabilized, one piece, self-locking.

2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F, According to ASTM D 638: 7000 psi.
3. UL 94 Flame Rating: 94V-0.
5. Color: Black.
2.10 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A. Paint: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for paint materials and
application requirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior
or interior).
B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine
screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.
1. Abbreviations Standards.
a. Electrical (Equipment):
1) ATS Automatic Transfer Switch.

2) BAT Battery.
3) BIB Bypass Input Breaker.
4) BYP Bypass.
5) CAM Camlok Enclosure.
6) CATCH Catcher.
7) CIS Catcher Isolation Switch.
8) COP Catcher Output Panel.
9) DB Distribution Board.
10) DISC Disconnect.
11) GEN Generator.
12) HRG High Resistance Ground.
13) INP Input.
14) MAIN Main (Service) Disconnect.
15) MBP Maintenance Bypass.
16) MIB Modular Input Breaker.
17) MIS Mechanical Isolation Switch.
18) MOB Modular Output Breaker.
19) MSB Mechanical Switchboard.
20) PDU Power Distribution Unit.
21) rPDU Rack Power Distribution Unit.
22) SUB Substation.
23) SWBD Switchboard.
24) SWGR Switchgear.
25) TVSS Transient Voltage Surge Suppression.
26) UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply.
27) USB Utility Switchboard.
28) VFD Variable Frequency Drive.
29) XFMR Transformer.
b. Electrical (Equipment Labeling):
1) MV Utility Switchgear (12,470V+ Utilization).

2) USB Utility Switchboard (480/277V Utilization).
3) MSDBMechanical Services Distribution Board (480V Utilization).
4) HSDB House Services Distribution Board (480V Utilization).
5) CDB Critical Switchboard Board (480V Utilization).
6) PDP Critical Distribution Panelboard (415/240V Utilization).
7) DLP Distribution Lighting Panelboard (480/277V Utilization).
8) DPP Distribution Power Panelboard (208/120V Utilization).
9) LP Lighting Branch Panelboard (480/277V Utilization).
10) MP Mechanical Panelboard (480V Utilization).
11) PP Power Branch Panelboard (208/120V Utilization).
12) PDU Power Distribution Unit.
13) PNL Network Panel (415/240V Utilization).
14) H* House Power Preface.
15) HU* House UPS Power Preface.
16) G* Generator Preface.
c. Electrical (General):
1) AC Alternating Current.
2) AL Aluminum.
3) AFCI Arc Fault Circuit Interrupter.
4) BKR Breaker.
5) BYP Bypass.
6) C Conduit.
7) CB Circuit Breaker.
8) CKT Circuit.
9) DC Direct Current.
10) FC Foot-Candles.
11) FSD Fused.
12) GRD Ground.
13) GFCI Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter.
14) HP Horsepower.
15) IMC Intermediate Metal Conduit.
16) kW Kilowatts.
17) kVA Kilovolt-Amperes.
18) LTG Lighting.
19) MCA Minimum Circuit Ampacity.
20) MCB Main Circuit Breaker.
21) MET Meter.
22) MLO Main Lug Only.
23) MTR Motor.
24) NC Normally Closed.
25) NO Normally Open.
26) NF Non-Fused.
27) PB Pushbutton.
28) PNL Panel.
29) PUE Power Utilization Efficiency.
30) PWR Power.
31) V Volts.
32) VA Volts-Amperes.
33) W Watts.
34) WP Weatherproof.
d. Electrical (Conduit):
1) ARC Aluminum Rigid Conduit.

2) EMT Electrical Metallic Tubing.
3) FMC Flexible Metallic Conduit.
4) GRC Galvanized Rigid Conduit.
5) MC Metal Clad Cable.
6) PVC PVC Conduit.
B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing
without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.
C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.
D. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners
appropriate to the location and substrate.
E. Cable Ties: For attaching tags. Use general-purpose type, except as listed below:
1. Outdoors: UV-stabilized nylon.

2. In Spaces Handling Environmental Air: Plenum rated.
F. Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous underground-

line warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. Use multiple tapes
where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope exceeds 16
inches overall.
G. Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for surface
preparation and paint application.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE
A. Concealed Raceways, Duct Banks, More Than 600 V, within Buildings: Tape and stencil 4-inch
wide black stripes on 10-inch centers over orange background that extends full length of raceway
or duct and is 12 inches wide. Stencil legend "DANGER CONCEALED HIGH VOLTAGE
WIRING" with 3-inch high black letters on 20-inch centers. Stop stripes at legends. Apply to the
following finished surfaces:
1. Floor surface directly above conduits running beneath and within 12 inches of a floor that is
in contact with earth or is framed above unexcavated space.
2. Wall surfaces directly external to raceways concealed within wall.
3. Accessible surfaces of concrete envelope around raceways in vertical shafts, exposed in the
building, or concealed above suspended ceilings.
B. Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch
Circuits More Than 30 A, and 120 V to ground: Identify with self-adhesive vinyl label. Install
labels at 30-foot (10-m) maximum intervals.
C. Accessible Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction and pull
box of the following systems with self-adhesive vinyl labels with the wiring system legend and
system voltage. System legends shall be as follows:
1. Emergency Power.
2. Power.
3. UPS.
D. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction
boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase.
1. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed
below for ungrounded feeder and branch-circuit conductors.
a. Color shall be factory applied or field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG.
b. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:
1) Phase A: Black.
2) Phase B: Red.
3) Phase C: Blue.
c. Colors for 415/240-V Circuits (IEC Standard):

1) Phase A: Brown.
2) Phase B: Black.
3) Phase C: Blue.
d. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits:
1) Phase A: Brown.
2) Phase B: Orange.
3) Phase C: Yellow.
2. Neutral conductors: White for 208/120-V circuits and Gray for both 415/240-V and
480/277- V circuits.
3. Grounded conductors: Green
4. Isolated ground conductors: Green with yellow stripe.
5. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum
distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made.
Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to
avoid obscuring factory cable markings.
E. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, More than 600 V: For conductors in vaults, pull and
junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use nonmetallic plastic tag holder with adhesive-backed
phase tags, and a separate tag with the circuit designation.
F. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach write-on tags to conductors and list source.
G. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, and
signal connections.
1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull
points. Identify by system and circuit designation.
2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by
manufacturer for factory-installed connections.
3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the
Operation and Maintenance Manual.
H. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for power, lighting,
communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable.
1. Limit use of underground-line warning tape to direct-buried cables.

2. Install underground-line warning tape for both direct-buried cables and cables in raceway.
I. Workspace Indication: Install floor marking tape to show working clearances in the direction of
access to live parts. Workspace shall be as required by NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1926.403 unless
otherwise indicated. Do not install at flush-mounted panelboards and similar equipment in finished
spaces.
J. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Baked-
enamel warning signs.
2. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145.
1. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background.
2. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access.
3. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of equipment
including, but not limited to, the following:
a. Power transfer switches.
b. Controls with external control power connections.
K. Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenance
of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with approved
legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation.
L. Emergency Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs with white legend on a red
background with minimum 3/8-inch high letters for emergency instructions at equipment used for
power transfer.
M. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that
is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply
labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels,
control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting,
control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with
its own identification.
1. Labeling Instructions:
a. Indoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless otherwise

indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- high letters on 1-1/2-inch- high
label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high.
b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label.
c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for
viewing from the floor.
d. Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with
appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of
the enclosure.
2. Equipment to Be Labeled:
a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by panelboard

manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be engraved, laminated acrylic or
melamine label.
b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets.
c. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items.
d. Switchgear: Additionally, label rear of multi-section (rear-accessible) equipment with
section identifier at 60-66” height (e.g. SECTION 1).
e. Switchboards: Additionally, label rear of multi-section (rear-accessible) equipment
with section identifier at 60-66” height (e.g. SECTION 1).
f. Transformers: Label that includes tag designation shown on Drawings for the
transformer, feeder, and panelboards or equipment supplied by the secondary.
g. Substations.
h. Emergency system boxes and enclosures.
i. Enclosed switches.
j. Enclosed circuit breakers.
k. Enclosed controllers.
l. Variable-speed controllers.
m. Push-button stations.
n. Power transfer equipment.
o. Contactors.
p. Remote-controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices.
q. Battery-inverter units.
r. Power-generating units.
s. Monitoring and control equipment.
t. UPS equipment.
3.3 AMAZON STANDARD IDENTIFICATION
A. Standard Abbreviations.
B. Equipment Identification.
1. All equipment, at all levels, shall have a means of identification, using the standardized
labeling format.
2. Mechanical and Electrical Equipment Identification.
3. All fundamental equipment shall be identified in the following format:
4. <CLUSTER><SITE>-<EQUIPMENT ID> <LOCATION><ELECTRICAL BUS>-<SUB-
IDENTIFIER><INTERNAL IDENTIFIER><SEQUENTIAL IDENTIFIER>.
a. <CLUSTER> is the Site Location Code.
1) IAD – Virginia.
2) SFO – San Francisco.
3) DUB – Dublin.
4) PDX – Oregon.
5) SEA – Seattle.
b. <SITE> is the regional site number.

c. <EQUIPMENT ID> is the standard equipment abbreviation (See list
of Abbreviations).
d. <LOCATION> is the Location within the building (POD<#>, Network Room <N>).
e. <ELECTRICAL BUS> is the Electrical Bus serving the Equipment (A, B, C).
f. <SUB-IDENTIFIER> is the sequential equipment numbering.
g. <INTERNAL IDENTIFIER> is the identification of any internal equipment requiring
identification.
h. <SEQUENTIAL IDENTIFIER> is the sequential identification of internal equipment
when more than one device is present in a single piece of equipment.
i. ** <CLUSTER> and <SITE> identifiers shall only be used for offsite reference (i.e.
plans, controls, alarms, etc.), all references to equipment within the building or POD
identification (i.e. equipment labels) shall exclude the use of <CLUSTER> and
<SITE> from the label.
j. ** <EQUIPMENT ID> Transformers shall be indicated at the <INTERNAL
IDENTIFIER> rather than at the <EQUIPMENT ID> level.
k. ** <LOCATION> identifier shall only be used for LOCATION specific equipment.
Equipment installed to support multiple PODs or buildings (i.e. pumps, chillers) shall
exclude the use of <LOCATION> from the label.
l. ** <ELECTRICAL BUS> identifier shall be used on electrical equipment (i.e.
Switchboards, Transformers, UPS, etc.), mechanical equipment (i.e. pumps, chillers,
towers, CRAHs, etc.) shall exclude the use of <ELECTRICAL BUS> from the label.
m. ** <SUB-IDENTIFIER> identifier shall be the sequential numbering of all
equipment that has a common preceding label (i.e. UPS 2A-1, UPS 2A-2 or CH 1,
CH 2), where multiple pieces of equipment are not present, the <SUB-IDENTIFIER>
shall be omitted (i.e. USB 2A, USB 2B).
n. ** <INTERNAL IDENTIFIER> identifier shall be used to identify internal
components on equipment (valves, breakers, etc.). Transformers shall be considered
an internal identifier component, and shall utilize the upstream device as the
<EQUIPMENT IDENTIFIER>.
o. ** <SEQUENTIAL IDENTIFIER> identifier shall be used where more than one
common <INTERNAL IDENTIFER> is present in a single piece of equipment.
Where only one device is present, the use of the <SEQUENTIAL IDENTIFIER>
shall be omitted.
p. ** Where more granularity is required, the <INTERNAL IDENTIFIER> and
<SEQUENTIAL IDENTIFER> shall be repeated to obtain the necessary labeling.
q. ** Where spaces in labeling cannot be achieved (i.e. alarming), an underscore “_”
shall be used in lieu of the space.
5. Examples:
a. IAD6-CH 1 Virginia Site #6, Chiller #1. This identification would only be for offsite
reference; onsite equipment designation would be CH 1.
b. PDX4-UPS 2B-1 Oregon Site #4, POD #2, UPS #1 on the B Bus. This identification
would only be for offsite reference; onsite equipment designation would be UPS 2B-
1.
c. SFO9-USB 1A-TVSS1 San Francisco Site #9, POD #1, Utility Switchboard #1, on
the A Bus, TVSS Unit #1. This identification would only be for offsite reference,
onsite equipment designation would be USB 1A-TVSS1. The presence of the final
‘1’ indicates there is more than (1) TVSS in USB 1A.
6. Equipment Labeling:
a. To facilitate the easy identification, troubleshooting, repair, and maintenance, all

installed equipment shall have a label installed. The label shall be sized to be easily
located, read, and interpreted. Where practical and feasible, labels shall be installed at
eye level and in an obvious place on the equipment being identified.
b. Information: All primary equipment identification shall be formatted as follows:
1) Line 1: FED FROM: <Electrical Source feeding equipment> (3/8” High Font).
2) Line 2: <Onsite Equipment Designation> (1” High Bold Font).
3) Line 3: FEEDS: <Load being served by equipment> (3/8” High Font).
4) ** All mechanical equipment shall only contain Lines 1 & 2.
5) ** All Switchboards, panelboards, PDU, etc. shall contain Lines 1 & 2.
6) ** All breakers 100A or larger shall contain only Line #3 in Normal Font, but
5/8” high.
7) ** All disconnect switches, transformers, and standalone switches shall
contain Lines 1, 2 & 3.
c. Type: All Equipment labeling shall be self-adhesive engraved Phenolic/Lamecoid
type labels (1/16” 2-ply Gravoply 1 by Gravograph
http://www.gravograph.us/engraving- products/Gravoply_1.php or equivalent).
d. Background Color: Color of labels shall be as follows:
1) BLUE = RESERVED FOR ALL BMS IDENTIFICATION.

2) (Gravoply #17353).
3) RED = RESERVED FOR ALL FIRE ALARM IDENTIFICATION.
4) (Gravoply #17506).
5) ORANGE = A Bus (Gravoply #17047).
6) GREEN = B Bus (Gravoply #17442).
7) PINK = CATCHER / C Bus (Gravoply #32725).
8) GRAY = Non-Pod Specific (Gravoply #29584).
9) BLACK = Global / Room Designation specific (Gravoply #17319).
e. Text Color: All Text shall be White.

f. Size: Label shall be of size adequate to fit all necessary information in the font size
indicated with no less than a ¼” perimeter of free space.
g. Examples:

SECTION 260573 – OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Specifications:

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes computer-based, electrical system studies including fault-current,

overcurrent protective device coordination and arc flash hazard analysis studies for HV, MV, LV
and DC power systems. Protective devices shall be set based on results of the protective device
coordination study. All electrical apparatus shall be labeled based upon the arc flash hazard
analysis study.
B. Product Data: For computer software program to be used for studies.
C. Other Action Submittals: The following submittals shall be made after the approval process for
system protective devices has been completed. Submittals shall be written form with a copy of the
database used in the analysis submitted in digital form.
1. Coordination-study input data, including completed computer program input data sheets.
2. Study and Equipment Evaluation Reports.
3. Coordination-Study Report.
4. Arc Flash Hazard Analysis Report
5. Software database/calculation files in digital form.
6. Breaker Settings Table in Excel format. See Section 3.4H for additional information.
A. Qualification Data: For coordination-study specialist.
B. Product Certificates: For coordination-study and fault-current-study computer software programs,

certifying compliance with IEEE 399.
A. Studies shall use the latest versions of ETAP or SKM computer programs.
1. Electrical System-Study Specialist Qualifications: An entity experienced in the application

of computer software used for studies, having performed successful studies of similar
magnitude on electrical distribution systems using similar devices.
2. The electrical systems study specialist shall be a Registered Professional Electrical
Engineer, licensed in the state where Project is located and shall be responsible for the
study. All elements of the study shall be performed under the direct supervision and control
of this engineer.
3. The Registered Professional Electrical Engineer shall have a minimum of five (5) years of
experience in performing AC and DC power system studies.
4. The Registered Professional Electrical Engineer shall demonstrate experience with AC and
DC Arc Flash Hazard Analysis by submitting names of at least ten actual arc flash hazard
analysis it has performed in the past year.
5. Section 3.5.D indicates additional requirements for DC arc flash analysis.
B. Comply with IEEE 141 (Red Book) for electrical equipment ratings.
C. Comply with IEEE 242 (Buff Book) for Protection and coordination.
D. Comply with IEEE 399 (Brown Book) for general study procedures.
E. Comply with IEEE 551 (Violet Book) for Short Circuit Calculations.
F. Comply with IEEE 946 for DC short circuit and protection.
G. Comply with NFPA 70E – Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace for AC and DC arc
flash hazard analysis.
H. Comply with IEEE 1584 (2018) – Guide for Performing Arc-Flash Hazard Calculations for arc
flash hazard analysis (for AC systems < 15kV).
I. Comply with EPRI ArcFault Method for AC systems >= 15kV. The methodology is per EPRI
2011 Technical Report on Arc Flash.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 COMPUTER SOFTWARE DEVELOPERS
Un. Computer Software Developers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
following:
1. SKM Systems Analysis, Inc.

2. ETAP.
2.2 COMPUTER SOFTWARE PROGRAM REQUIREMENTS
Un. Comply with IEEE 399.

B. Analytical features of fault-current-study computer software program shall include "mandatory,"
"very desirable," and "desirable" features as listed in IEEE 399.
C. Computer software program shall be capable of plotting and diagramming time-current-

characteristic curves as part of its output. Computer software program shall report device settings
and ratings of all overcurrent protective devices and shall demonstrate selective coordination by
computer-generated, time-current coordination plots.
1. Additional Features:
a. Arcing faults.
b. Simultaneous faults.
c. Explicit negative sequence.
d. Mutual coupling in zero sequence.
D. Component naming convention.
1. Added components should be named per their identifiers on the single line drawings. They
should not be left with the default automatically generated names.
a. Cable naming should identify the downstream device. Example: CBL HSDB 4B2;
CBL HLP 4B1 XFMR; CBL HLP 4B1.
b. Node Buses should be named with an identifier NDE and description of location.
1) Use (N) Normal, (E) Emergency, (L) Load, (P) Primary, and (S) Secondary.
2) Transformer Example: NDE P HLP 4B1 XFMR; NDE S HLP 4B1 XFMR;
3) ATS Example: NDE E ATS 4B1; NDE N ATS 4B1; NDE L ATS 4B1.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine Project overcurrent protective device submittals for compliance with electrical
distribution system coordination requirements and other conditions affecting performance.
Devices to be coordinated are indicated on Drawings.
1. Proceed with coordination study only after relevant equipment submittals have been
assembled. Overcurrent protective devices that have not been submitted and approved prior
to coordination study may not be used in study.
3.2 POWER SYSTEM DATA
A. Gather and tabulate the following input data to support coordination study:
1. Product Data for overcurrent protective devices specified in other Division 26 Sections and
involved in overcurrent protective device coordination studies. Use equipment designation
tags that are consistent with electrical distribution system diagrams, overcurrent protective
device submittals, input and output data, and recommended device settings.
2. Impedance of utility service entrance.
3. Electrical Distribution System Diagram: In hard-copy and electronic-copy formats, showing
the following:
a. Circuit-breaker and fuse-current ratings and types.

b. Relays and associated power and current transformer ratings and ratios.
c. Transformer kilovolt amperes, primary and secondary voltages, connection type,
impedance, and X/R ratios.
d. Generator kilovolt amperes, size, voltage, and source impedance.
e. Cables: Indicate conduit material, sizes of conductors, conductor material, insulation,
and length.
f. Busway ampacity and impedance.
g. Motor horsepower and code letter designation according to NEMA MG 1.
4. Data sheets to supplement electrical distribution system diagram, cross-referenced with tag
numbers on diagram, showing the following:
a. Special load considerations, including starting inrush currents and frequent starting
and stopping.
b. Transformer characteristics, including primary protective device, magnetic inrush
current, and overload capability.
c. Motor full-load current, locked rotor current, service factor, starting time, type of
start, and thermal-damage curve.
d. Generator thermal-damage curve.
e. Ratings, types, and settings of utility company's overcurrent protective devices.
f. Special overcurrent protective device settings or types stipulated by utility company.
g. Time-current-characteristic curves of devices indicated to be coordinated.
h. Manufacturer, frame size, interrupting rating in amperes RMS symmetrical, ampere
or current sensor rating, long-time adjustment range, short-time adjustment range,
and instantaneous adjustment range for circuit breakers.
i. Manufacturer and type, ampere-tap adjustment range, time-delay adjustment range,
instantaneous attachment adjustment range, and current transformer ratio for
overcurrent relays.
j. Medium voltage switchgear, switchboards, panelboards ampacity, and interrupting
rating in amperes RMS symmetrical.
B. Scope and Scenarios
1. Scope of the study is inclusive of the following:

a. Medium voltage system: 34.5kV system or other utility distribution voltage.
1. Owner designed substation (if included in project scope), MV cables, Owner
MV switchgear and MV/LV service transformer and disconnects.
2. Time-current-coordination curves shall be obtained from the supplying utility
for Utility substation or Utility switches, and shall be included as part of the
MV system evaluation.
3. If project scope includes, owner designed substation, then study scope will
also include this project substation and all downstream MV system
(including coordination with upstream utility substation).
b. Projects which employ the FloRes MV automation system the contractor shall use the
FloRes Backup Protection Settings provided by the owner. If the Backup Protection
Settings conflict with the Study findings contact the Owner. Low voltage system
from service transformer and generator down through cold aisle busway, tap boxes,
ATSC, PDC, and all disconnects, enclosed circuit breakers and VFD’s for all
electrical and mechanical equipment including but not limited to: AHU, DAHU, Data
Hall EF, DOAS, Fire Pump.
c. DC system: Batteries, DC breakers, fuses, panelboards, cables and other equipment.
2. All plausible AC LV scenarios shall be included to determine worst-case conditions (Short

Circuit, Selective Coordination, Arc Flash) per design. In the case of AMER OPTDC, (8)
scenarios are expected to account for distribution pathways to load (Note: Study Author
may include additional scenarios as required):
a. PDC via Lineup 1.1A USB XFMR
b. PDC via Lineup 1.1A USB GEN
c. PDC via Lineup 1.1A USB via Catcher 1 XFMR
d. PDC via Lineup 1.1A USB via Catcher 1 GEN
e. PDC via Lineup 1.1A COP via Catcher 1 XFMR
f. PDC via Lineup 1.1A COP via Catcher 1 GEN
g. PDC via Lineup 1.1A COP via Catcher 2 XFMR
h. PDC via Lineup 1.1A COP via Catcher 2 GEN
3.3 FAULT-CURRENT STUDY
A. Calculate the maximum available short-circuit current in amperes RMS symmetrical at circuit-
breaker positions of the electrical power distribution system. The calculation shall be for a current
immediately after initiation and for a three-phase bolted short circuit at each of the following:
1. Utility Service.
2. Owner designed substations (if included in project scope).
3. Secondary Unit Substations.
4. Medium Voltage Transformers.
5. Low Voltage Switchboards.
6. Low Voltage Transformers.
7. UPS Input and Output.
8. Low Voltage Critical Distribution Switchboards.
9. Distribution panelboards.
10. Branch circuit panelboards.
11. Overhead Busway and Tap Boxes.
12. Power Distribution Units (PDU).
13. Power Distribution Cabinets (PDC).
14. Automatic Transfer Switches (ATS).
15. Automatic Transfer Switch Cabinets (ATSC).
16. Fused disconnects, enclosed circuit breakers, and VFD’s (for electrical and mechanical
equipment, including but not limited to: AHU, DAHU, Data Hall EF, DOAS, Fire Pump).
17. DC equipment.
B. Study electrical distribution system from normal and alternate power sources throughout electrical
distribution system for Project. Include studies of system-switching configurations and alternate
operations that could result in maximum fault conditions.
C. Calculate momentary and interrupting duties on the basis of maximum available fault current.
D. Calculations to verify interrupting ratings of overcurrent protective devices shall comply with
IEEE 141 and IEEE 242.
1. Transformers:
a. ANSI C57.12.22.
b. IEEE C57.12.00.
c. IEEE C57.96.
2. Low-Voltage Circuit Breakers: IEEE 1015 and IEEE C37.20.1.

3. Low-Voltage & Medium-Voltage Fuses: IEEE C37.27 and IEEE C37.46.
E. Study Report:
1. Show calculated X/R ratios and equipment interrupting rating (1/2-cycle) fault currents on
electrical distribution system diagram.
2. Show interrupting (5-cycle) and time-delayed currents (6 cycles and above) on medium-
voltage breakers as needed to set relays and assess the sensitivity of overcurrent relays.
F. Equipment Evaluation Report:
1. For 600-V overcurrent protective devices, ensure that interrupting ratings are equal to or
higher than calculated 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current.
2. For devices and equipment rated for asymmetrical fault current, apply multiplication factors
listed in the standards to 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current.
3. Verify adequacy of phase conductors at maximum three-phase bolted fault currents; verify
adequacy of equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductors at
maximum ground-fault currents. Ensure that short-circuit withstand ratings are equal to or
higher than calculated 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current.
3.4 COORDINATION STUDY
A. Perform coordination study using approved computer software program. The report shall comply
with the recommendations in the standards listed in Section 1.5.
Prepare a written report using results of fault-current study.
1. Calculate the maximum and minimum 1/2-cycle short-circuit currents.

2. Calculate the maximum and minimum interrupting duty (5 cycles to 2 seconds) short-circuit
currents.
3. Calculate the maximum and minimum ground-fault currents.
B. Transformer Primary Overcurrent Protective Devices:
1. Device shall not operate in response to the following:
a. Inrush current when first energized.

b. Self-cooled, full-load current or forced-air-cooled, full-load current, whichever is
specified for that transformer.
c. Permissible transformer overloads according to IEEE C57.96 if required by unusual
loading or emergency conditions.
2. Device settings shall protect transformers according to IEEE C57.12.00, for fault currents.
MV/LV transformers in systems employing the FloRes automation system are protected by
the FloRes system operation or the FloRes Backup Protection Settings provided by the
owner.
C. UPS Inverter modeling: In the case of parallel UPS design only, the coordination study shall
consider and include both UPS inverter and static switch overload characteristics. Input circuit
breakers feeding the UPS shall be coordinated to ensure that the full UPS overload capability can
be utilized without the UPS input circuit breaker tripping.
D. PDC Breaker Settings: PDC Circuit breaker settings shall be obtained and modeled as per the
settings specified in PDC Specification (Appendix 10.7 PDC L1 FWT Script). Specification is
provided by the owner.
E. Conductor Protection: Protect cables against damage from fault currents according to ICEA P-32-
382, ICEA P-45-482, and conductor melting curves in IEEE 242. Demonstrate that equipment
withstands the maximum short-circuit current for a time equivalent to the tripping time of the
primary relay protection or total clearing time of the fuse. To determine temperatures that damage
insulation, use curves from cable manufacturers or from listed standards indicating conductor size
and short-circuit current.
F. Coordination-Study Report: Prepare a written report indicating the following results of
coordination study:
1. Tabular Format of Settings Selected for Overcurrent Protective Devices:
a. Device tag.
b. Relay-current transformer ratios; and tap, time-dial, and instantaneous-pickup values.
c. Circuit-breaker sensor rating; and long-time, short-time, and instantaneous settings.
d. Fuse-current rating and type.
c. Ground-fault relay-pickup and time-delay settings. For every trip unit equipped with
ground fault function, the study engineer either assign ground fault settings or
indicate ground fault settings is OFF.
d. Trip unit name and type (i.e. PR332 LSIG, 1150 LSI )
1. Coordination Curves: Prepared to determine settings of overcurrent protective devices to

achieve selective coordination. Graphically illustrate that adequate time separation exists
between devices installed in series, including power utility company's upstream devices.
Prepare separate sets of curves for the switching schemes and for emergency periods where
the power source is local generation. Show the following information:
a. Device tag.
b. Voltage and current ratio for curves.
c. Three-phase and single-phase damage points for each transformer.
d. No damage, melting, and clearing curves for fuses.
e. Cable damage curves.
f. Transformer inrush points.
g. Maximum fault-current cutoff point.
B. Completed data sheets for setting of overcurrent protective devices shall be provided in electronic
format for configuration and in pdf format for record.
C. In addition to normal operation coordination settings, settings shall be provided for all devices
equipped with arc flash reduction function (such as EATON ARMS, GE RELT, etc.). Where a
maintenance/arc flash reduction function does not exist, temporary instantaneous settings shall be
developed for maintenance activities and issued with the coordination study.
1. The goal of the additional “maintenance” settings is to temporarily adjust the breaker
settings to lower the incident energy to the lowest possible level. This will provide the
safest condition should the worker be required to work on energized gear. Understanding
that there will be some mis-coordination while the breaker is in “maintenance mode”, the
maintenance settings should be such that the lowest possible incident energy is achieved
and the best possible level of coordination is considered.
2. A table shall be provided that shows the normal operation instantaneous setting with the
normal operation incident energy and the maintenance instantaneous setting with the
maintenance incident energy.
3. Arc flash labels provided for the study will only show the normal operation incident energy.
D. Completed Excel format document of Breaker Settings Table: Upon DE review and approval of
submitted SCCS study, all LV settings generated by ETAP/SKM for circuit breakers shall be
transposed into AWS Breaker Settings Table (Excel format) included in Appendix A and turned
over for H2C for that phase. The Consultant shall work with Construction to ensure the completed
Excel format document incorporates any setting changes made during Commissioning, and any
formatting nuances required by AWS ingestion teams ahead of PFHO.
3.5 ARC FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS
A. The arc flash hazard analysis shall be performed as indicated below:
1. Comply with IEEE 1584 (2018) – Guide for Performing Arc-Flash Hazard Calculations for
arc flash hazard analysis (for AC systems < 15kV).
2. Comply with NFPA 70E (including Annex D) – Standard for Electrical Safety in the
Workplace. Use this standard for DC arc flash hazard analysis (See item 3.5 D for
additional requirements). Use this standard for general guidance on AC arc flash analysis
(including labeling). The AC arc flash analysis will be per IEEE 1584-2018.
3. Comply with EPRI ArcFault Method for AC systems >= 15kV (e.g., including MV
switchgear and Owner Substation). This method is available in ETAP (as ETAP ArcFault
Method 2) and SKM modules (as 15kV-800kV Arc Fault Analysis, EPRI Report 2011). The
methodology is per EPRI 2011 Technical Report on Arc Flash.
B. The flash protection boundary and the incident energy shall be calculated at all significant
locations in the electrical distribution system (switchboards, switchgear, motor-control centers,
panelboards, busway and splitters) where work could be performed on energized parts, including
all medium voltage equipment.
C. The Arc-Flash Hazard Analysis shall include all significant locations in 240 volt and 208 volt
systems fed from transformers where work could be performed on energized parts.
D. DC Arc-Flash Hazard Analysis shall be performed in accordance with the following:
1. Qualification: DC Arc-Flash shall only be performed by an AWS qualified vendor. If the

vendor has not been formally approved by AWS InfraOps or FE in calculation
methodology, they are not approved to perform DC calculations and this scope shall be
omitted from study delivered.
2. Methodology: the “Maximum Power Method” shall be used for the DC calculation.
a. The configuration factor at the working distance (incident energy multiplier for “arc
in a box”) to be used shall be 2.0.
b. Actual protective device fault clearing time shall be used in lieu of the default 2.0
second fault clearing time.
E. Safe working distances shall be based upon the calculated arc flash boundary considering incident
energy of 1.2 cal/cm2.
F. When appropriate, the short circuit calculations and the clearing times of the phase overcurrent
devices will be retrieved from the short-circuit and coordination study model. Ground overcurrent
relays should not be taken into consideration when determining the clearing time when performing
incident energy calculations.
G. The short-circuit calculations and the corresponding incident energy calculations for multiple
system scenarios must be compared and the greatest incident energy must be uniquely reported for
each equipment location. Calculations must be performed to represent the maximum and
minimum contributions of fault current magnitude for all normal and emergency operating
conditions. The minimum calculation will assume that the utility contribution is at a minimum and
will assume a minimum motor contribution (all motors off). Conversely, the maximum calculation
will assume a maximum contribution from the utility and will assume the maximum amount of
motors to be operating. Calculations shall take into consideration the parallel operation of
synchronous generators with the electric utility, where applicable.
H. The incident energy calculations must consider the accumulation of energy over time when
performing arc flash calculations on buses with multiple sources. Iterative calculations must take
into account the changing current contributions, as the sources are interrupted or decremented with
time. Fault contribution from motors and generators should be decremented as follows:
1. Fault contribution from induction motors should not be considered beyond 3-5 cycles.
2. Fault contribution from synchronous motors and generators should be decayed to match the
actual decrement of each as closely as possible (e.g. contributions from permanent magnet
generators will typically decay from 10 per unit to 3 per unit after 10 cycles).
I. For each equipment location with a separately enclosed main device (where there is adequate
separation between the line side terminals of the main protective device and the work location),
calculations for incident energy and flash protection boundary shall include both the line and load
side of the main breaker.
J. When performing incident energy calculations on the line side of a main breaker (as required per
above), the line side and load side contributions must be included in the fault calculation.
K. Mis-coordination should be checked amongst all devices within the branch containing the
immediate protective device upstream of the calculation location and the calculation should utilize
the fastest device to compute the incident energy for the corresponding location.
K. Arc Flash calculations shall be based on actual overcurrent protective device clearing time.
Maximum clearing time will be capped at 2 seconds based on IEEE 1584. Where it is not
physically possible to move outside of the flash protection boundary in less than 2 seconds during
an arc flash event, a maximum clearing time based on the specific location shall be utilized.
L. Consideration shall be given to the use of arc flash mitigation systems including special relaying
provisions, optional setting groups and zone interlocking.
M. Arc Flash Study Report.
1. Incident energy and flash protection boundary calculations.

2. Arcing fault magnitude.
3. Protective device clearing time.
4. Duration of arc.
5. Arc flash boundary.
6. Working distance.
7. Incident energy.
8. Hazard Risk Category.
9. Recommendations for arc flash energy reduction.
N. Arc Flash Warning Labels.
1. The contractor of the Arc Flash Hazard Analysis shall provide a 3.5 in. x 5 in. thermal
transfer type label of high adhesion polyester for each work location analyzed.
a. Label Template:
2. All labels will be based on recommended overcurrent device settings and will be provided
after the results of the analysis have been presented to the owner and after any system
changes, upgrades or modifications have been incorporated in the system.
3. The label shall include the following information, at a minimum:
a. Location designation.
b. Nominal voltage.
c. Flash protection boundary.
d. Hazard risk category.
e. Incident energy.
f. Working distance.
g. Engineering report number, revision number and issue date.
4. Labels shall be machine printed, with no field markings.

5. Arc flash labels shall be provided in the following manner and all labels shall be based on
recommended overcurrent device settings.
a. For each 480 volt and applicable 208 volt panelboard, one arc flash label shall be
provided.
b. For each low voltage switchboard, one arc flash label shall be provided.
c. For each UPS system, one arc flash label shall be provided.
d. For each diesel/generator, one arc flash label shall be provided.
e. For each static transfer switch, one arc flash label shall be provided.
f. For each automatic transfer switch, one arc flash label shall be provided.
g. For each automatic transfer switch cabinet, one arc flash label shall be provided.
h. For each MV Transformer, two arc flash labels shall be provided (Primary and
Secondary)
i. For each LV Transformer, one arc flash label shall be provided (Secondary)
j. For each fused disconnect, enclosed circuit breaker, or VFD, for all electrical and
mechanical equipment, one arc flash label shall be provided.
k. For each DC battery cabinet and disconnects (if applicable).
6. Labels shall be field installed by the engineering service division of the equipment
manufacturer under the Startup and Acceptance Testing contract portion.
O. Arc Flash Training: The supplier of the Arc Flash Hazard Analysis shall train the owner’s
qualified electrical personnel of the potential arc flash hazards associated with working on
energized equipment (minimum of 4 hours). The training shall be certified for continuing
education units (CEUs) by the International Association for Continuing Education Training
(IACET) or equivalent.

SECTION 260801 – GENERAL ACCEPTANCE TESTING REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICALPART
1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi-
tions.
B. Division 01 Specification Sections.
C. Specifications Division 26 are directly applicable to this Section, and this Section is directly ap-
plicable to them.
D. ANSI/NETA ATS Standard for Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equip-
ment and Systems
E. ANSI/NETA ECS Standard for Electrical Commissioning Specifications for Electrical Power
Equipment and Systems
F. NECA 407 Installing and Maintaining Panelboards
G. NOM-001-SEDE-2012
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section defines responsibilities of the General Contractor and Electrical Testing Agent re-
garding Acceptance tests and Pre-functional (installation) Checklists Level 2 Commissioning
process and addresses validation of proper and thorough installation of electrical systems.
B. The Acceptance Testing of electrical systems equipment and components is performed to assess
the suitability for initial energization of electrical power equipment and systems, to ensure these
systems and equipment perform in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications, minimizing
downtime and maximizing life expectancy.
C. Pre-Functional Checklist are inspections performed by the installing contractor to assure instal-
lation per contractual documents and industry standards for all contractor installed equipment.
LLE equipment will require pre-startup inspection to be completed by the manufacturer as well.
D. LLE manufacturer, General Contractor and Electrical Testing Agent shall completely install, ac-
ceptance test, verify installation thoroughly, start-up, pre-test, adjust and integrate electrical sys-
tems and equipment.
1.3 Electrical Testing Agency (ETA).
A. Qualifications: An agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated,
and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Engaged by the GC as a qualified agent to perform electrical testing and adjusting, prior to ener-
gization.
C. Tests and sets all electrical protective devices in accordance with the approved final electrical
coordination study.
D. Attend commissioning scoping meeting, controls integration meeting and additional meetings,
as necessary.
E. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person qualified to supervise on-site testing

specified,knowl- edgeable of NETA standard requirements, acceptance test practice and test
results validation. Field supervisor shall be certified in testing or commissioning practice or
licensed Professional Engineer.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. The forms and checklists required to be used in AWS projects are owned by ACx team and will
be included in construction documentation.
B. General Contractor shall execute the acceptance tests and pre-functional/installation verification
steps and document the results for all contractor installed equipment.
C. The acceptance test report shall include the following:
1. Summary of project;
2. Technical characteristics of the equipment under test;
3. Test results;
4. Indication of “as-found” and “as-left” settings.
5. Test equipment serial numbers and calibration dates;
6. Identification of the testing organization and testing technician.
7. Notification of any test result, electrical function, material, or workmanship which is
found deficient, outside required tolerances, on the basis of tests.
8. Analysis and recommendations.
D. All Checklists and tests must be reviewed by a qualified engineer for proper test method, test
results conformance with the requirements.
E. A soft copy of the complete test report shall be uploaded in Workdocs; within 48 hours of test
completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. All materials shall meet or exceed all applicable referenced standards, federal, state and local
requirements, and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction.
2.2 TEST EQUIPMENT
A. Electrical Testing Agency to provide all specialized tools, test equipment and instruments re-
quired to execute site testing of sufficient quality and accuracy to test or measure system perfor-
mance within specified tolerances.
B. Test Equipment Calibration: A testing laboratory must have calibrated test equipment within the
previous twelve (12) months. Calibration shall be NIST traceable. Contractor must calibrate test
equipment and instruments according to manufacturer’s recommended intervals and whenever
the test equipment is dropped or damaged. Dated calibration labels shall be visible on all test
equipment. Certificates of calibration shall be uploaded in Workdocs and be readily available. A
hard copy of the Calibration Certificates shall be handed to ACx representative.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 ACCEPTANCE TEST
A. All the electrical systems equipment and components are subject to site acceptance test and in-
stallation verification as defined by the documents referenced in section 1.1 above.
1. MV Switchgear, Load Interrupters, Switches and associated components (Breakers, CT,

VT, Meters, surge arresters, etc.).
2. LV Switchgear / Switchboards and associated components (CT, VT, Meters, etc.).
3. Automatic and Manual Transfer Switches.
4. LV/MV Cabling and wiring devices.
5. Busway / Bus Duct / Cable Bus.
6. Liquid filled and Dry type Transformers.
7. Protection Equipment, Circuit Breakers, Protection Relays and Disconnects.
8. Distribution and Branch Circuit Panelboards.
9. Lightning Protection Equipment and Lightning Protection Systems.
10. Motor Control Centers.
11. Motors.
12. Grounding/Earthing Equipment, HRG Systems and Building Grounding/Earthing System.
13. Emergency Generators and Distribution System.
14. Power Factor Correction devices.
3.2 ACCEPTANCE TEST PROCEDURES
A. Test all electrical equipment and components in accordance with NETA ATS requirements.
Tests marked as optional in NETA ATS are not required.
3.3 ACCEPTANCE TEST CLARIFICATIONS FOR SELECTIVE EQUIPMENT
A. MV Cable Test
1. Perform Visual and Mechanical Inspections specified by NETA. Perform Electrical tests
specified by NETA section 7.3.3.B (1), (2), (3). Perform Dielectric Withstand Test by
Very Low Frequency (VLF) method listed as 7.3.3.5.1(2). The test shall be conducted in
accordance with IEEE Std 400.2-2013, IEEE Guide for Field Testing of Shielded Power
Cable Systems Using Very Low Frequency (VLF) (less than 1 Hz). The withstand test
shalluse sinusoidal waveform, 0.1Hz. VLF withstand test voltages shall be applied in
accordance to Table 3. The recommended test time for each conductor is 30 minutes.
B. Current Transformers
1. In addition to the test specified in NETA standard, test line differential 87L protection
CT’s for proper polarity by the use of metering function of the relay while the protected
line is under maximum load conditions. Provide screen shoots or test reports with local,
remote, vector sum and Alpha plane values.
C. LV Breaker
1. Primary Injection Testing of LV breakers is required for all draw out type breakers. Fixed
mount breakers equipped with smart trip unit shall be tested by Secondary Injection
method. All breakers will be tested at the settings specified in approved Coordination
Study. Testing agency will be responsible to set all breakers per coordination study
settings for the entire site. This includes all thermal magnetic breakers instantaneous
settings, busway plug in breakers.
D. Panelboards
1. Test each power panelboard per NECA 407-2009 Installing and Maintaining
Panelboards. Section 6, Cleaning, Testing and Commissioning. Set main breaker per
coordination study settings.
2. Perform insulation resistance test using 1000Vdc. Test phase to phase and phase to
ground with all circuit breakers in open and closed positions, with all instrumentation and
control fuses removed and with no loads connected to the panelboard. Ground all phases
not being tested. Measure the insulation resistance at one minute following the
application of the test voltage.
E. Protective Relays
1. Perform manufacturers’ recommended tests and comply with the manufacturer’s testing
requirements. Secondary and Primary Injection Tests shall be conducted at the final pro-
tection settings per the coordination study. After the Electrical Tests are completed
thefinal settings shall be verified and written down on the test documentation. The
protectiondevice will be sealed or set with a password to prevent accidental tamper with
the settingshave been verified and tested.
F. Grounding/Earthing Systems
1. Test by three-point fall-of-potential test or equivalent per IEEE Standard 81 on the main
grounding/Earthing electrode or system at each test well. Resistance shall be no greater
than 1 ohms.
2. Perform point to point test per IEEE Standard 81 to determine the ground resistance be-
tween the main ground system and all major electrical equipment frames.
3. Grounding/Earthing system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and in-
spections.
4. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Ar-
chitect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.
G. High Resistance Ground (HRG)

1. HRG system shall be tested by manufacturer. Manufacturer to provide the requiredtech-
nical services of a factory-trained representative for installation and start-up service ofthe
equipment.
H. Battery Systems
1. Test battery systems in accordance to manufacturer’s recommendations. In the absence of
manufacturer’s recommendations, test per NETA ATS standard.
I. TVSS
1. Test and Inspect TVSS in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. In theab-
sence of manufacturer’s recommendations, test per NETA ATS standard.
J. Medium Voltage Oil Filled Switches

1. Dielectric Fluid Test is required. The test will yield information required to establish a
baseline reference for observing trends in the dielectric fluid’s moisture level.
K. Metal Enclosed Busway; busducts and in row busways

1. Busway supplier to be contracted for site installation verification to include:
a. Layout design, which identifies and labels each bus element supplied with
each run
b. Visual Inspection of each Joint,
c. Photographic evidence,
d. Torque witness,
e. Bus resistance test (end to end milli-ohms). Investigate resistance deviations
of more than 15% of lowest value.
f. Megger Test at 1000Vdc for 1 minute
g. Issue the final Test report with signatures
2. Electrical Contractor to be contracted for installation and QC
a. Install busduct to manufacturer’s recommendations
b. P-touch label all joints and flanges per layout design
c. Carry-out connections torque of joints with LLE vendor in attendance
d. Torque seal each nut using torque seal/tamper proof tube
e. Apply torque label at each joint with Name, date and signature
3. Commissioning Team
f. Verify test report for compliance and accuracy
g. Execute IR for the entire bus run under full load conditions
h. Release IR report with photographic evidence of joints inspected.
3.4 INSTALLATION VERIFICATION
A. The pre-functional installation checklists performed in Level 2, pre-startup, shall verify the data
center equipment and accessories are properly installed per construction documents and manu-
facturer’s instructions, free from damage, NETA acceptance tested and are ready for Level3
startup verification.
B. The general contractor is responsible for 100% construction checks, tests and verifications, in-
cluding electrical testing agency work and will assure each installing contractor performed re-
quired QA/QC inspections of the installation of all the equipment under contracted scope of
work.
C. ACx and CxA vendor shall verify the quality of work by witnessing and participating in site
tests executed on mechanical and electrical equipment i.e. NETA Acceptance test, flushing,
balancing, etc.
D. Verify the following pre-energization tasks are complete before equipment energization:
1. Verify nameplate and equipment ratings are documented and correct in accordance with
the most current drawings.
2. Review drawings, logic diagrams, protective device settings, engineering studies, and other
pertinent information to verify accuracy and completeness.
3. Visually inspect equipment.
4. Verify equipment is clearly labeled with unique designations and match designations on
all drawings, documentation, programming, and communication protocols.
5. Verify equipment, doors, and fences are labeled with appropriate safety labeling and
have the correct information in accordance with applicable regulations.
6. Verify equipment and circuits are correctly bonded and grounded in accordance with
applicable regulations.
7. Confirm isolation points have provisions for a lock and/or tag.
8. Confirm that correct electrical equipment clearances have been met.
9. Confirm clear working space around electrical equipment in accordance with applicable
regulations.
10. Verify correct operation of mechanical, electrical, key, and safety interlocks on electrical
power equipment. Verify duplicate interlock keys are destroyed or retained by authorized
personnel in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
11. Verify correct operation of applicable limit switches.
12. Verify wiring interconnection points such as shipping splits, field-connected devices, and
SCADA interface.
13. Verify current transformer circuits are complete and do not have an open-circuit.
Shorting devices should be in the intended position.
14. Verify instrument transformer tap connections are correct and match documentation,
drawings, and protective device settings.
15. Verify protective device settings are correct and match documentation, drawings, and
engineering studies.
16. Verify arc-flash hazard warning labels in accordance with applicable regulations.
17. Verify intelligent electronic devices, communication protocol, and SCADA systemsdis-
play the correct date and time.
18. Verify applicable communication points to end device(s).
19. Verify panel boards have accurate panel schedules.
20. Verify prime, emergency, and standby power systems are operational and ready for
energization.
21. Verify correct operation of GFCI receptacles.
22. Verify correct settings of lighting controls for electrical rooms and substations.
23. Verify correct operation of emergency shutdown systems.
24. Verify current and voltage sensors were tested in accordance with manufacturer’spub-
lished data.
25. Verify applicable transformer insulating fluid analysis was completed and results are
acceptable.
26. Verify correct liquid levels and/or gas pressures in transformers.
27. Verify gas and liquid alarm levels.
28. Verify valves on equipment are in the correct position for energization.
29. Verify transformers are in the correct tap position(s) for energization.
30. Verify start-up procedures on all UPS and battery system components have been
performed and documented.
31. Confirm the initializing charge has been completed for battery systems in accordance
with manufacturer’s requirements.
32. Verify that indications and records are cleared for faults, alarms, and meters.
33. Confirm metes, relays and trip units have the memory cleared of min/max values and
events.
34. Create as-left setting files.
35. Create a written energization plan.
3.5 ENERGIZATION
A. Restrict access to electrical equipment during energization and commissioning activities.
B. Verify emergency exits are correctly secured to prevent the entrance of an unauthorized person
from outside, while allowing free escape from inside.
C. Verify removal of temporary protective grounding/earthing equipment.
D. Verify correct position of switches, circuit breakers, and transfer switches for control circuits,
instrument transformer circuits, and power circuits. Verify test switches and terminal block dis-
connects/switches are in the correct position in accordance with the energization plan.
E. Follow and document the steps of the energization plan.
F. Verify correct current and voltage values to protective devices and metering.
G. Verify correct current and voltage values to protective devices and metering.
H. Verify correct operate and restraint values to differential protection.
I. Verify correct system phase angle and sequence.
J. Verify equipment phasing.
K. Verify correct motor rotation.
L. Verify transformer load tap changer and automatic voltage regulator operation.
M. Verify correct motor rotation.
N. Verify battery and UPS systems are free of alarms and are in the specified operating mode.
O. Verify no alarms or fault indications are present.

AWS DATA CENTER DESIGN ENGINEERING REVISION
(DCDE) AEROTECH060 SPECIFICATION 1.7
3.6 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
A. Acceptance criteria for the tests results are indicated in NETA standard and manufac-
turer’srecommendations.
B. All checklists and tests must be reviewed by a qualified engineer for proper test method and
testresults conformance with the requirements prior to submission.
SWITCHBOARDS-AUTO TRANSFER CONTROL SCHEME 262413.1-1

Amazon Proprietary and
SECTION 260923 – LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
Un. Specifications:

7. 262726 Wiring Devices.
8. 260519 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Time switches.
2. Outdoor and indoor photoelectric switches.
3. Indoor occupancy sensors.
4. Outdoor motion sensors.
5. Lighting contactors.
6. Emergency shunt relays.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 TIME SWITCHES

following:
1. Cooper Industries, Inc.

2. Intermatic, Inc.
3. Invensys Controls.
4. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc.
5. NSi Industries LLC; TORK Products.
6. Tyco Electronics; ALR Brand.
B. Electronic Time Switches: Solid state, programmable, with alphanumeric display; complying
with UL 917.

1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for
intended location and application.
2. Contact Configuration: SPST, DPST, DPDT.
3. Contact Rating: 20-A ballast load, 120-/240-V ac.
4. Programs: Eight on-off set points on a 24-hour schedule and an annual holiday schedule
that overrides the weekly operation on holidays.
5. Programs: Two on-off set points on a 24-hour schedule, allowing different set points for
each day of the week[ and an annual holiday schedule that overrides the weekly operation
on holidays].
6. Programs: 8 channels; each channel is individually programmable with eight on-off set
points on a 24-hour schedule.
7. Programs: 16 channels; each channel is individually programmable with two on-off set
points on a 24-hour schedule with a skip-a-day weekly schedule.
8. Programs: 32 channels; each channel is individually programmable with two on-off set
points on a 24-hour schedule, allowing different set points for each day of the week.
9. Programs: channels; each channel is individually programmable with 40 on-off
operations per week and an annual holiday schedule that overrides the weekly operation
on holidays.
10. Programs: channels; each channel is individually programmable with 40 on-off
operations per week, plus four seasonal schedules that modify the basic program, and an
annual holiday schedule that overrides the weekly operation on holidays.
11. Programs: and an annual holiday schedule that overrides the weekly operation on holidays.
12. Circuitry: Allow connection of a photoelectric relay as substitute for on-off function of a
program on selected channels.
13. Astronomic Time: Selected channels.
14. Automatic daylight savings time changeover.
15. Battery Backup: Not less than seven days reserve, to maintain schedules and time clock.
C. Electromechanical-Dial Time Switches: Comply with UL 917.
2. Contact Configuration: SPST, DPST, SPDT, DPDT.
3. Contact Rating: 20-A ballast load, 120-/240-V ac.
4. Circuitry: Allows connection of a photoelectric relay as a substitute for the on-off
function of a program.
5. Astronomic time dial.
6. Eight-Day Program: Uniquely programmable for each weekday and holidays.
7. Skip-a-day mode.
8. Wound-spring reserve carryover mechanism to keep time during power failures,
minimum of 16 hours.
2.2 OUTDOOR PHOTOELECTRIC SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated

on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:


2. Intermatic, Inc.
4. Tyco Electronics; ALR Brand.
C. Description: Solid state, with SPST, DPSTdry contacts rated for 1800-VA tungsten or 1000-VA
inductive, to operate connected relay, contactor coils, or microprocessor input; complying with
UL 773A.
2. Light-Level Monitoring Range: 1.5 to 10 fc with an adjustment for turn-on and turn-off
levels within that range, and a directional lens in front of the photocell to prevent fixed
light sources from causing turn-off.
3. Time Delay: Fifteen second minimum, to prevent false operation.
4. Surge Protection: Metal-oxide varistor.
5. Mounting: Twist lock complies with NEMA C136.10, with base-and-stem mounting or
stem-and-swivel mounting accessories as required to direct sensor to the north sky
exposure.
D. Description: Solid state, with SPST, DPST dry contacts rated for 1800 VA, to operate
connected load, complying with UL 773.
2. Light-Level Monitoring Range: 1.5 to 10 fc with an adjustment for turn-on and turn-off
levels within that range.
3. Time Delay: Thirty-second minimum, to prevent false operation.
4. Lightning Arrester: Air-gap type.
5. Mounting: Twist lock complying with NEMA C136.10, with base.
2.3 INDOOR OCCUPANCY SENSORS


1. Bryant Electric; a Hubbell company.

3. Hubbell Building Automation, Inc.
5. Lightolier Controls.
6. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc.
7. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc.
9. RAB Lighting.
10. Sensor Switch, Inc.

12. Watt Stopper.

13. Leviton
C. General Requirements for Sensors: Wall- or ceiling-mounted, solid-state indoor occupancy

sensors with a separate power pack.
2. Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, turn lights on when coverage area is occupied,
and turn them off when unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights off, adjustable
over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes.
3. Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the connected relay, complying with UL 773A.
Sensor is powered from the power pack.
4. Power Pack: Dry contacts rated for 20-A ballast load at 120- and 277-V ac, for 13-A
tungsten at 120-V ac, and for 1 hp at 120-V ac. Sensor has 24-V dc, 150-mA, Class 2
power source, as defined by NFPA 70.
5. Mounting:
a. Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outlet box.

b. Relay: Externally mounted through a 1/2-inch (13-mm) knockout in a standard
electrical enclosure.
c. Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind hinged
door.
6. Indicator: Digital display, to show when motion is detected during testing and normal
operation of sensor.
7. Bypass Switch: Override the "on" function in case of sensor failure.
8. Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 2 to 200 fc; turn lights off when selected
lighting level is present.
D. PIR Type: Ceiling mounted; detect occupants in coverage area by their heat and movement.
1. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch- minimum movement of any portion of

a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in.
2. Detection Coverage (Room): Detect occupancy anywhere in a circular area of 1000 sq. ft.
(93 sq. m) when mounted on a 96-inch- high ceiling.
3. Detection Coverage (Corridor): Detect occupancy within 90 feet when mounted on a 10-
foot- high ceiling.
E. Ultrasonic Type: Ceiling mounted; detect occupants in coverage area through pattern changes
of reflected ultrasonic energy.
1. Detector Sensitivity: Detect a person of average size and weight moving not less than 12
inches in either a horizontal or a vertical manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches/s
2. Detection Coverage (Small Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of
600 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch- high ceiling.
3. Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area
of 1000 sq. ft when mounted on a 96-inch- high ceiling.
4. Detection Coverage (Large Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of
2000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch- high ceiling.

5. Detection Coverage (Corridor): Detect occupancy anywhere within 90 feet when

mounted on a 10-foot- high ceiling in a corridor not wider than 14 feet.
F. Dual-Technology Type: Ceiling mounted; detect occupants in coverage area using PIR and
ultrasonic detection methods. The particular technology or combination of technologies that
control on-off functions is selectable in the field by operating controls on unit.
1. Sensitivity Adjustment: Separate for each sensing technology.

2. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch- minimum movement of any portion of
a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in. and detect a person of
average size and weight moving not less than 12 inches in either a horizontal or a vertical
manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches/s.
3. Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area
of 1000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch- high ceiling.
2.4 SWITCHBOX-MOUNTED OCCUPANCY SENSORS

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [product indicated

4. Lightolier Controls.
6. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc.
8. RAB Lighting.
11. Watt Stopper.
C. General Requirements for Sensors: Automatic-wall-switch occupancy sensor, suitable for

mounting in a single gang switchbox.
intended location and application, and shall comply with California Title 24.
2. Operating Ambient Conditions: Dry interior conditions, 32 to 120 deg F.
3. Switch Rating: Not less than 800-VA fluorescent at 120 V, 1200-VA fluorescent at 277
V, and 800-W incandescent.
D. Wall-Switch Sensor Tag WS1:
1. Standard Range: 180-degree field of view, field adjustable from 180 to 40 degrees; with a
minimum coverage area of 900 sq. ft.
2. Sensing Technology: PIR, Dual technology - PIR and ultrasonic.

3. Switch Type: SP, SP, dual circuit., SP, manual "on," automatic "off.", SP, field selectable
automatic "on," or manual "on" automatic "off."
4. Voltage: Match the circuit voltage.
5. Ambient-Light Override: Concealed, field-adjustable, light-level sensor from 10 to 150 fc
.The switch prevents the lights from turning on when the light level is higher than the set
point of the sensor.
6. Concealed, field-adjustable, "off" time-delay selector at up to 30 minutes.
7. Concealed "off" time-delay selector at 30 seconds, and 5, 10, and 20 minutes.
8. Adaptive Technology: Self-adjusting circuitry detects and memorizes usage patterns of
the space and helps eliminate false "off" switching.
E. Wall-Switch Sensor Tag WS2:
1. Standard Range: 210-degree field of view, with a minimum coverage area of 900 sq. ft.
2. Sensing Technology: PIR.
3. Switch Type: SP, SP, dual circuit, SP, manual "on," automatic "off.", SP, field selectable
automatic "on," or manual "on" automatic "off."
5. Ambient-Light Override: Concealed, field-adjustable, light-level sensor from 10 to 150
fc. The switch prevents the lights from turning on when the light level is higher than the
set point of the sensor.
the space and helps eliminate false "off" switching.
2.5 HIGH-BAY OCCUPANCY SENSORS


C. General Description: Solid-state unit. The unit is designed to operate with the lamp and ballasts
indicated.
2. Operation: Turn lights on when coverage area is occupied, and to half-power when
unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights to half-power that is adjustable over a
minimum range of 1 to 16 minutes.
3. Continuous Lamp Monitoring: When lamps are dimmed continuously for 24 hours,
automatically turn lamps on to full power for 15 minutes for every 24 hours of
continuous dimming.
4. Operating Ambient Conditions: 32 to 149 deg F (0 to 65 deg C).
5. Mounting: Threaded pipe.

6. Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind hinged door.
7. Detector Technology: PIR.
D. Detector Coverage: User selectable by interchangeable PIR lenses, suitable for mounting
heights from 12 to 50 feet.
E. Accessories: Obtain manufacturer's installation and maintenance kit with laser alignment tool
for sensor positioning and power port connectors.
2.6 OUTDOOR MOTION SENSORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements available manufacturers offering



7. RAB Lighting.
9. Watt Stopper.
C. General Requirements for Sensors: Solid-state outdoor motion sensors.
intended location and application, and shall comply with California Title 24.
2. PIR, Dual-technology (PIR and infrared) type, weatherproof. Detect occurrences of 6-
inch- minimum movement of any portion of a human body that presents a target of not
less than 36 sq. in.. Comply with UL 773A.
3. Switch Rating:
a. Lighting-Fixture-Mounted Sensor: 1000-W incandescent, 500-VA fluorescent.

b. Separately Mounted Sensor: Dry contacts rated for 20-A ballast load at 120- and
277-V ac, for 13-A tungsten at 120-V ac, and for 1 hp at 120-V ac. Sensor has 24-
V dc, 150-mA, Class 2 power source, as defined by NFPA 70.
4. Switch Type: SP., SP, dual circuit., SP, manual "on," automatic "off.", SP, field
selectable automatic "on," or manual "on" automatic "off.", With bypass switch to
override the "on" function in case of sensor failure.
6. Detector Coverage:
a. Standard Range: 210-degree field of view, with a minimum coverage area of 900
sq. ft.
b. Long Range: 180-degree field of view and 110-foot detection range.

7. Ambient-Light Override: Concealed, field-adjustable, light-level sensor from 10 to 150

fc. The switch prevents the lights from turning on when the light level is higher than the
set point of the sensor.
the space and help eliminate false "off" switching.
11. Operating Ambient Conditions: Suitable for operation in ambient temperatures ranging
from minus 40 to plus 130 deg F, rated as "raintight" according to UL 773A.
2.7 LIGHTING CONTACTORS


1. Allen-Bradley/Rockwell Automation.
2. ASCO Power Technologies, LP; a division of Emerson Electric Co.
3. Eaton Corporation.
4. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution; Total
Lighting Control.
C. Description: Electrically operated and mechanically, electrically held, combination-type lighting

contactors with fusible switch, nonfused disconnect, complying with NEMA ICS 2 and UL 508.
1. Current Rating for Switching: Listing or rating consistent with type of load served,
including tungsten filament, inductive, and high-inrush ballast (ballast with 15 percent or
less total harmonic distortion of normal load current).
2. Fault Current Withstand Rating: Equal to or exceeding the available fault current at the
point of installation.
3. Enclosure: Comply with NEMA 250.
4. Provide with control and pilot devices as indicated on Drawings, scheduled, matching the
NEMA type specified for the enclosure.
D. BAS Interface: Provide hardware interface to enable the BAS to monitor and control lighting
contactors.
1. Monitoring: On-off status.

2. Control: On-off operation.
2.8 EMERGENCY SHUNT RELAY



1. Lighting Control and Design; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc.

2. Watt Stopper.
3. Bodine.
C. Description: Normally closed, electrically held relay, arranged for wiring in parallel with
manual or automatic switching contacts; complying with UL 924.
1. Coil Rating: 120, 277 V.
2.9 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Power Wiring to Supply Side of Remote-Control Power Sources: Not smaller than No. 12
AWG. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power
Conductors and Cables."
B. Classes 2 and 3 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not
smaller than No. 24 AWG. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage
Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
C. Class 1 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than
No. 18 AWG. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical
Power Conductors and Cables."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SENSOR INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling-mounted devices with other construction that
penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, smoke
detectors, fire-suppression systems, and partition assemblies.
B. Install and aim sensors in locations to achieve not less than 90 percent coverage of areas
indicated. Do not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written instructions.
3.2 CONTACTOR INSTALLATION
A. Mount electrically held lighting contactors with elastomeric isolator pads to eliminate structure-
borne vibration, unless contactors are installed in an enclosure with factory-installed vibration
isolators.
SWITCHBOARDS-AUTO TRANSFER CONTROL SCHEME 262413.1-

3.3 WIRING INSTALLATION
A. Wiring Method: Comply with Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors
and Cables." Minimum conduit size is 1/2 inch.
B. Wiring within Enclosures: Comply with NECA 1. Separate power-limited and nonpower-
limited conductors according to conductor manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions unless
D. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in
junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.
3.4 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Division 26 Section
1. Identify controlled circuits in lighting contactors.

2. Identify circuits or luminaires controlled by photoelectric and occupancy sensors at each
sensor.
B. Label time switches and contactors with a unique designation.
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate lighting control devices and
perform tests and inspections.
B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and

inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
C. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service
representative:
1. Operational Test: After installing time switches and sensors, and after electrical circuitry
has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation.
2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
D. Lighting control devices will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months from date of Substantial

Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting sensors to suit actual occupied conditions.
Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.
1. For occupancy and motion sensors, verify operation at outer limits of detector range. Set
time delay to suit Owner's operations.
2. For daylighting controls, adjust set points and deadband controls to suit Owner's
operations.
3. Align high-bay occupancy sensors using manufacturer's laser aiming tool.
3.7 DEMONSTRATION
A. Coordinate demonstration of products specified in this Section with demonstration requirements

for low-voltage, programmable lighting control systems specified in design documents.
B. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to

adjust, operate, and maintain lighting control devices.
SECTION 261200 – MEDIUM-VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS

PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Specifications:

7. 260526 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This specification covers the electrical and mechanical characteristics of 45-10,000 kVA Three-
Phase Step-Down Pad-Mounted or Substation Distribution Transformers with dual-switch
vacuum fault interrupter distribution. KVA ratings for transformers with secondary voltages not
exceeding 700V are 45-3,750 kVA, while kVA ratings for transformers with secondary voltages
greater than 700V are 1,000-10,000 kVA.
B. To consider that QRO project is going to be located at an altitude of 6,000 feet
1.3 APPLICABLE STANDARDS
A. All characteristics, definitions, and terminology, except as specifically covered in this

specification, shall be in accordance with the latest revision of the following ANSI ®, IEEE®,
NEMA®, and Department of Energy standards.
1. IEEE Std C57.12.00™-2010 standard – Standard for Standard General Requirements for
Liquid-Immersed Distribution, Power, and Regulating Transformers.
2. IEEE Std C57.12.28™-2005 standard – Pad-Mounted Equipment - Enclosure Integrity.
3. IEEE Std C57.12.34™-2009 standard – Standard Requirements for Pad-Mounted,
Compartmental-Type, Self-Cooled, Three-Phase Distribution Transformers (2500 kVA
and Smaller) - High Voltage: 34500GrdY/19920 Volts and Below; Low-Voltage: 480
Volt 2500 kVA and Smaller (issued in March 2005 - combines IEEE Std C57.12.22 and
IEEE Std C57.12.26 standards).
4. IEEE Std C57.12.90™-2010 standard – Standard Test Code for Liquid-Immersed
Distribution, Power, and Regulating Transformers and IEEE Guide for Short-Circuit
Testing of Distribution and Power Transformers.
5. IEEE Std C57.12.91™-2011 standard – Guide for Loading Mineral-Oil-Immersed
Transformers.
6. NEMA TR 1-1993 (R2000) – Transformers, Regulators and Reactors, Table 0-2 Audible
Sound Levels for Liquid-Immersed Power Transformers.

7. NEMA 260-1996 (2004) – Safety Labels for Pad-Mounted Switchgear and Transformers
Sited in Public Areas.
8. 10 CFR Part 431 – Department of Energy – Energy Conservation Program for
Commercial Equipment: Distribution Transformers Energy Conservation Standards;
Final Rule.
B. Provide the factory acceptance test and startup report templates, to include firmware versions
for owner approval.
C. Submittal cover page shall indicate whether equipment identically matches equipment from
prior phase(s) where applicable.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. As specified in MPA.
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.
1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RATINGS
A. The transformer shall be designed in accordance with this specification and the kVA rating shall
be as specified on drawings.
B. The primary voltage, configuration, and the basic lightning impulse insulation level (BIL) shall
be 150kV.
C. The secondary voltage, configuration, and the basic insulation level (BIL) of the secondary
voltage shall be 30kV.
Table 1
Ratings for Three-Phase
Transformers (Single Ratio)
Primary Voltage BIL (kV) Secondary Voltage BIL (kV)
2400 Delta 60 208Y/120 All 30 kV

4160 Delta 60 480Y/277

4800 Delta 60 575Y/332
7200 Delta 75 600Y/347
12000 Delta 95 690Y/398
12470 Delta 95 240 Delta
13200 Delta 95 480 Delta
13800 Delta 95 240 Delta with 120 Mid-Tap
14400 Delta 95 480 Delta with 240 Mid-Tap
16430 Delta 125
34500 Delta 150 See left column for voltages
43800 Delta 250 over 700 V
4160GrdY/2400 60
8320GrdY/4800 75
12470GrdY/7200 95
13200GrdY/7620 95
13800GrdY/7970 95
22860GrdY/13200 125
23900GrdY/13800 125
24940GrdY/14400 125
34500GrdY/19920 150
43800GrdY/25300 250
1. For complete connector rating, see IEEE Std 386™-2006 standard.

2. Transformers are suitable for connectors with phase-to-ground or phase-to-ground/phase-
to-phase high-voltage ratings as listed.
3. Arrester coordination may require higher BIL on multiple connections than indicated to
achieve a minimum protection level of 20%.
D. The transformer may be furnished with full capacity high-voltage taps. The tap changer shall be
clearly labeled to reflect that the transformer must be de-energized before operating the tap
changer as required in Section 4.3 of IEEE Std C57.12.34™-2009 standard. The tap changer
shall be operable on the higher voltage only for transformers with dual voltage primaries. The
unit shall have one of the following tap configurations.
E. Two – 2 ½% taps above and below rated voltage (split taps).
F. Four – 2 ½% taps below rated voltage (four below).
G. The average winding temperature rise above ambient temperature, at the base transformer
rating, shall not exceed 65 C, and when tested at 122% of the base rating, shall not exceed 75
C.
H. The percent impedance voltage, as measured on the rated voltage connection, shall be per Table
2. For target impedances, the tolerance on the impedance shall be +/- 7.5% of nominal value for
impedance values greater than 2.5%. The tolerance on the impedance shall be +/- 10.0% for
impedance values less than or equal to 2.5%.
Table 2
Percent Impedance Voltage
KVA Rating (Low voltage < 700 V) Impedance

75 1.10 - 5.75
112.5-300 1.40 - 5.75
500 1.70 - 5.75
750-3750 5.75 nominal
KVA Rating Low voltage > 700 V (all nominal values)

150 kV BIL 200 kV 250 kV BIL
BIL
1000 - 5000 5.75 7.00 7.50
7500 - 10000 6.50 7.00 7.50
2.2 CONSTRUCTION
A. The core and coil shall be vacuum processed to ensure maximum penetration of insulating fluid
into the coil insulation system. While under vacuum, the windings will be energized to heat the
coils and drive out moisture, and the transformer will be filled with preheated filtered degassed
insulating fluid. The core shall be manufactured from burr-free, grain-oriented silicon steel and
shall be precisely stacked to eliminate gaps in the corner joints. The coil shall be insulated with
B-stage, epoxy coated, diamond pattern, insulating paper, which shall be thermally cured under
pressure to ensure proper bonding of conductor and paper. Coils shall be either aluminum or
copper.
B. The dielectric coolant shall be listed less-flammable fluid meeting the requirements of National
Electrical Code Section 450-23 and the requirements of the National Electrical Safety Code
(IEEE Std C2™-2002 standard), Section 15. The dielectric coolant shall be non-toxic*, non-
bioaccumulating and be readily and completely biodegradable per EPA OPPTS 835.3100. The
base fluid shall be 100% derived from edible seed oils and food grade performance enhancing
additives. The fluid shall be certified to comply with the US EPA Environmental Technology
Verification (ETV) requirements, and tested for compatibility with transformer components.
The fluid shall be Factory Mutual Approved ®, UL® Classified Dielectric Medium (UL-EOUV)
and UL® Classified Transformer Fluid (UL-EOVK).

C. Tank and Cabinet Enclosure.
1. The high-voltage and low-voltage compartments, separated by a metal barrier,

2. The compartment depth shall be in accordance with IEEE Std C57.12.34™-2009
standard, unless additional depth is specified.
3. The tank base must be designed to allow skidding or rolling in any direction. Lifting
provisions shall consist of four lifting lugs welded to the tank.
4. The tank shall be constructed to withstand 7 psi without permanent deformation, and 15
psi without rupture. The tank shall include a 15 psig pressure relief valve with a flow rate
of minimum 35 SCFM.
5. The exterior of the unit shall be painted Munsell 7GY3.29/1.5 green (STD), ANSI ® 70
gray, or ANSI® 61 gray in color. If a special paint color is specified, a federal spec
number or paint chip must be provided at the time of order. The cabinet interior and front
plate shall be painted gray for ease of viewing the inside compartment.
6. The tank shall be complete with an anodized aluminum laser engraved nameplate. This
nameplate shall meet Nameplate B per IEEE Std C57.12.00™-2010 standard.
D. High Voltage Bushings and Terminals.
1. High voltage bushings will be installed in the high voltage termination compartment
located on the front left of the transformer and requiring access via the low voltage
termination compartment on the front right.
2. Bushing Style:
a. ☐ 15/25 KV DEADFRONT, CURRENTS BELOW 200 AMPS: The high voltage
bushings shall be 15/25 kV 200A bushing wells with bushing well inserts
installed. The bushings shall be externally removable and be supplied with a
removable stud (Re: Eaton’s Cooper Power Systems catalog sections 800-32, 500-
12, and 500-26).
b. ☐ 35 KV DEADFRONT, CURRENTS BELOW 200 AMPS: The high voltage
bushing shall be a one-piece, 150 kV, 200-amp large interface load-break bushing
(Re: Eaton’s Cooper Power Systems catalog section 800-39).
c. ☒ 15/25/35 KV DEADFRONT, CURRENTS ABOVE 200 AMPS: The high voltage
bushing shall be a 600A dead-break primary one-piece bushing externally removable,
3Ø rated, integral design.

d. ☒ 36 KV TO 46 kV (250 KV BIL) DEADFRONT APPLICATIONS: The high volt-

age bushing shall be a CONNEX® Plug-in Cable Termination System, size 3S. The
male and female portions of the bushing shall be supplied with the transformer.
Available in radial feed only.
e. ☐ 15/25/35 KV LIVEFRONT, 200 KV BIL MAX: The high voltage bushing
shall be a porcelain bushing with a two, four, or six-hole spade or an eyebolt
connector.
3. Bushing Configuration:
a. ☐ 15/25 KV RADIAL FEED DEADFRONT: The transformer shall be provided
with three (3) high voltage bushings in accordance with Figure 1 dimensions
(Figure 4a dimensions may be specified when a larger termination compartment for
greater working space is desired) from IEEE Std C57.12.34™-2009 standard for
radial feed configurations. The bushing heights shall be in accordance with Figure 3
dimensions (Figure 6 dimensions may be specified for greater bushing height) of
IEEE Std C57.12.34™-2009 standard.
b. ☐ 15/25 KV LOOP FEED DEADFRONT: The transformer shall be provided with
six (6) high voltage bushings in accordance Figure 2 dimensions (Figure 5a dimen-
sions may be specified when a larger termination compartment for greater working
space is desired) of IEEE Std C57.12.34™-2009 standard for loop feed configura-
tions. The bushing heights shall be in accordance with Figure 3 minimum
dimensions (Figure 6 dimensions may be specified for greater bushing height) of
IEEE Std C57.12.34™-2009 standard.
c. ☐ 35 KV RADIAL FEED DEADFRONT: The transformer shall be provided with
three (3) high voltage bushings in accordance with Figure 4b dimensions of IEEE
Std C57.12.34™-2009 standard for radial feed configurations. The bushing heights
shall be in accordance with Figure 6 dimensions of IEEE Std C57.12.34™-2009
standard.
d. ☒ 35 KV LOOP FEED DEADFRONT: The transformer shall be provided with six
(6) high voltage bushings in accordance with Figure 5c dimensions of IEEE Std
C57.12.34™-2009 standard for loop feed configurations. The bushing heights shall
be in accordance with Figure 6 dimensions of IEEE Std C57.12.34™-2009 standard.
e. ☐ 46 KV / 250 KV BIL DEADFRONT: The transformer shall be provided with
three (3) bushings mounted 45° down from the horizontal, 60” from the ground,
and 12” apart from each other.
f. ☐ 15/25/35 KV LIVEFRONT, 150 KV BIL MAX: The transformer shall be pro-
vided with three (3) bushings in accordance with Figure 9 of IEEE Std C57.12.34™-
2009 standard for radial feed configurations. The bushing heights shall be in accord-
ance with Figure 10 of IEEE Std C57.12.34™-2009 standard.
g. ☐ 200 KV BIL LIVEFRONT: The transformer shall be provided with three (3)
bushings with phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground clearances adequate for 200 kV
BIL.
E. Low Voltage Bushings and Terminals.
1. Bushing Style.
a. Voltages less than 700 Volts: The transformer shall be provided with tin-plated
spade-type bushings for vertical takeoff. The spacing of the connection holes shall
be

1.75” on center, per IEEE Std C57.12.34™-2009 standard Figure 13a. The quantity
of connection holes shall be 4, 6, 8, 12, 16, or 20 holes.
b. Transformers 300 kVA and below, and 500 kVA with 480Y/277 secondary will
have two-piece low voltage bushings with studs and screw on spades. Transformers
500 kVA with 208Y/120 secondary and all transformers above 500 kVA will have
one- piece bushings.
Table 3
Standard / Maximum Bushing Hole Quantities
KVA 208Y/120 480Y/277 and higher
45-300 4 standard, 16 maximum 4 standard, 16 maximum
500 6 standard, 12 maximum 4 standard, 16 maximum
750-1500 12 standard, 20 maximum 6 standard, 12 maximum
2000-3750 N/A 12 standard, 20 maximum
c. Bushing supports shall be provided for transformers requiring 10 or more

connection holes. Bushing supports shall be affixed to the cabinet sidewalls; tank-
mounted supports mountings are not acceptable.
2. Bushing Configuration.
a. The transformer shall be provided with bushings in a staggered arrangement in
accordance with Figure 11a dimensions of IEEE Std C57.12.34™-2009 standard.
3. Switching:
1) Dual VFI with auxiliary contacts. Primary loop over current protection with
remote high-side cable isolation.

2) ☒ External Visible Loadbreak On/Off/Ground switch: The external visible

loadbreak switch allows customers to visibly confirm that the transformer is
de-energized without having to expose themselves to dangerous arc flash in the
transformer compartment. This feature also allows the end user to ground the
transformer using the load break switch.
F. Overcurrent Protection:
1. ☒ Cartridge fusing, >23kV: Under-oil cartridge fusing shall be utilized (available up to

208 amps of full-load transformer current, up to 34.5kV delta). The high-voltage
overcurrent protection scheme provided with the transformer shall be under-oil cartridge
fusing. Cartridge fuses shall be in series with ELSP under-oil partial-range current-
limiting back-up fuses with an interrupting rating of 50,000 A.
2. ☒ INTEGRAL VACCUUM, FAULT INTERRUPTER (VFI): (available from 13 amps
up to 900 amps of full-load transformer current, up to 34.5 kV, grounded wye or delta,
maximum 150 KV BIL) The high-voltage loop protection provided with the transformer
shall be integral Vacuum Fault Interrupters (VFI). The VFI shall have a maximum
interrupting rating of 12,000A RMS symmetrical with resettable fault protection up through
35 kV. VFIs shall include dual motor operator automation control with dual source A/B
feed interlocks. The VFI loop protection scheme shall include a Schweitzer SEL787 relay
with current transformers, potential transformers, monitoring, and control power to execute
open loop protection and automation.
a. ☐ Optional ELSP Accessory: VFI shall be in series with ELSP under-oil partial-
range current-limiting back-up fuses with an interrupting rating of 50,000 A.
b. ☐ Optional VFI Accessories: SCADA board; Ground fault detection; Motor
operator assembly; Visible break window.
G. Overvoltage Protection.
1. The overvoltage protection scheme provided with the transformer shall protect the high-
voltage or low voltage winding:
a. ☐ DEAD-FRONT BUSHINGS: (maximum 150 kV BIL, for voltages up to 18 kV
delta and 35 kV grounded wye). Externally mounted, Distribution Class M.O.V.E.
Dead-front elbow arresters shall be supplied. (Re: Eaton’s Cooper Power Systems
catalog section 235-65.) M.O.V.E. arresters are for installation on 200 A rated dead-
front bushing interfaces only. If transformer bushings are rated 600 A or 900 A, BT-
TAP elbow connectors, T-OP II elbow connectors, or 600 A bushing adapters, each
with a load-reducing tap plug for arrester connection, are required (Re: Eaton’s
Cooper Power Systems catalog sections 235-99 and 235-102).
b. ☒ UNDER OIL: (for voltages up to 27 kV delta and 35 KV grounded wye).
Inter- nally mounted, Distribution Class MOV under-oil surge arresters shall be
supplied (Re: Eaton’s Cooper Power Systems Catalog Section 235-95).
c. ☐ Optional Accessory: Three (3) disconnect switches shall be included to
disconnect the under-oil arresters from ground for transformer testing

2.3 LABELING
Un. Label equipment as specified in Section 260553, Identification for Electrical Systems.
2.4 FINISH PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Un. The tank coating shall meet all requirements in IEEE Std C57.12.28™-2005 standard including:
1. Salt Spray.
2. Crosshatch adhesion.
3. Humidity.
4. Impact.
5. Oil resistance.
6. Ultraviolet accelerated weathering.
7. Abrasion resistance – taber abraser.
B. The enclosure integrity of the tank and cabinet shall meet the requirements for tamper resistance
set forth in IEEE Std C57.12.28™-2005 standard including but not limited to the pry test, pull
test, and wire probe test.
2.5 RELIABILITY REQUIREMENTS
Un. Reliability and Quality Metrics definition

Mean Time between Failure (MTBF) is the predicted elapsed time between inherent failures of a mechan-
ical or electronic system, during normal system operation. MTBF can be calculated as the arithmetic
mean (average) time between failures of a system. The term is used for repairable systems, while mean
time to failure (MTTF) denotes the expected time to failure for a non-repairable system
Mean Time to Repair (MTTR) is a maintenance metric that measures the average time required to
trouble- shoot and repair failed equipment. Expressed mathematically, it is the total unplanned
maintenance time spent on an asset divided by the total number of failures that asset experienced over a
specific period.
MTBF and MTTR are commonly used metrics to measure reliability and availability performance of re-
pairable equipment in mission critical application such as Data Center Infrastructure facilities. MTTR is
also getting tracked but is not currently used for comparison purposes. MTBF in this context is more
related to the availability of repairable equipment and it is not an indication of the expected End of Life
(EOL) of the equipment.
Defect per Unit (DPU) is a common metric to track the non-conformances within specific model of equip-
ment. While MTBF calculation is based on number of failure events that disturb the regular operation of
the system, DPU calculation refers to non-conformance issues caused by poor manufacturing, assembling
or transportation issues.
B. Reliability and Quality requirements

MTBF Requirement: minimum MTBF requirement for MV/LV transformers in AWS Data Center
Appli- cation under normal operating conditions is more than 1000 years over its useful life. This refers to
a 0.1% Annual Failure Rate (AFR).
The main failure modes for MV/LV transformers at AWS application for MTBF calculation are :

1. Fail to operate
2. Overheating
MTTR Requirement: MTTR requirement for MV/LV transformers in AWS Data Center Application is
25 hours
DPU Requirement: DPU requirement is to be no more than 0.1% for the defective or non-conformance
part that has already or potentially can impact the operation of the transformer (even intermittently).
2.6 PRODUCTION TESTING
A. All units shall be tested for the following:
1. No-Load (85 C or 20 C) losses at rated current.

2. Total (85 C) losses at rated current.
3. Percent Impedance (85 C) at rated current.
4. Excitation current (100% voltage) test.
5. Winding resistance measurement tests.
6. Ratio tests using all tap settings.
7. Polarity and phase relation tests.
8. Induced potential tests.
9. Full wave and reduced wave impulse test.
10. Leak test with pressure for 8h @30kPa over the normal pressure
B. Minimally, transformers shall conform to efficiency levels for liquid immersed distribution
transformers, as specified in Table I.1 of the Department of Energy ruling. “10 CFR Part 431
Energy Conservation Program for Commercial Equipment: Distribution Transformers Energy
Conservation Standards; Final Rule; October 12, 2007.” Manufacturer shall comply with the
intent of all regulations set forth in noted ruling. This efficiency standard does not apply to step-
up transformers.
C. In addition, the manufacturer shall provide certification upon request for all design and other
tests listed in IEEE Std C57.12.00™-2010 standard, including verification that the design has
passed short circuit criteria per IEEE Std C57.12.00™-2010 standard and IEEE Std
C57.12.90™-2010 standard.
D. In the event of proposal bid evaluated with guaranteed losses due to a loss evaluation (see
section 10.0), manufacturer shall conform to guaranteed average losses as specified in IEEE Std
C57.12.00™-2010 standard. The no-load losses of a transformer shall not exceed the specified
no-load losses by more than 10%, and the total losses of a transformer shall not exceed the
specified total losses by more than 6%.
E. Suppliers shall conduct the following tests based on IEEE Std C57.12.00 standards on the
transformers and the accessories. In addition to the routine tests, as referred to in standard, the
following “special tests” shall be performed in a “first of a kind” equipment. This aims to
demonstrate the reliability of the manufactured equipment and the quality control process in
place:
 Temperature rise test or IEEE 1538
 Insulation resistance : IEEE C57.12.90

 Partial Discharge Testing IEEE C57.113 for Oil-immersed transformers

o
2.7 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
Un. Eaton’s Cooper Power Systems—Waukesha WI.
B. ABB.
C. SquareD (Schneider).
2.8 ACCESSORIES
Un. The following accessories and options shall be provided:
1. ☒ Bolted main tank cover (1000 kVA & below)

2. ☒ Welded main tank cover with bolted handhole (1500 kVA & above)
3. ☐ 1.0” upper fill plug
4. ☐ 1.0” drain plug in LV compartment (500 kVA & below)
5. ☒ 1.0” drain valve w/ sampling device external drain valve with sampler in padlockable
box
6. ☒ Automatic pressure relief valve
7. ☐ Metal drip shield (when bayonets specified)
8. ☐ 20” deep cabinet (2500 kVA & below)
9. ☐ 24” deep cabinet (3000 kVA & above)
10. ☒ Ground provisions per IEEE Std C57.12.34™-2009 standard section 9.11.
11. ☒ Meet NEMA® TR-1 sound levels
12. ☐ 1.0” drain valve w/ sampling device in (LV or HV) compartment (500 kVA & below)
13. ☒ Upper fill valve
14. ☒ Pressure vacuum bleeder
15. ☐ 24” deep cabinet
16. ☒ 30” deep cabinet
19. ☐ Spare bayonet fuse links
20. ☐ Fault indicator provisions
21. ☒ Ground connectors
22. ☐ Mr. Ouch warning & danger signs
23. ☒ Danger high voltage warning signs
24. ☐ Miscellaneous stenciling
25. ☒ Non-PCB decal
26. ☐ Touch-up paint
27. ☐ Interphase barriers (for live front primary units only)
28. ☐ Seismic zone 3 and 4 tank anchoring

29. ☐ Complete 304L stainless steel tank and cabinet

30. ☐ 304L stainless steel tank base and cabinet sides & sill (partial)
31. ☒ Liquid level gauge with auxiliary contacts
32. ☒ Dial-type thermometer gauge with auxiliary contacts
33. ☒ Pressure vacuum gauge with auxiliary contacts
34. ☐ Current or potential transformers
35. ☐ Rapid rise relay with seal-in panel
36. ☒ Winding temperature indicator
37. ☒ Watt-hour meter package – includes GE kV2c Encompass™ Electronic Meter. Factory
supplied wiring shall be internal to the cabinet, not in conduit. Communication
connection shall be the OPTOCOM port.
38. ☐ Harmonic resistant K-factor design, K=4, 9, 13, or 20
39. ☐ Forced air ONAF (mineral oil) or KNAF (Envirotemp™ FR3™ fluid) rating. Forced
air rating requires documentation from Eaton’s Cooper Power Systems customer that
they are aware this transformer is no longer tamper resistant and is no longer in
compliance with ANSI® standards.
40. ☐ Future forced air rating
41. ☐ Forced Air Fan Control Package
42. ☒FM Global® (FM) Approved transformer (to comply with NEC® 450-23 listing
restrictions for installations on, near, or inside of buildings)
43. ☐ Combination UL® Listed & Classified transformer (to comply with NEC® 450-23
listing restrictions for installations on, near, or inside of buildings) per UL XPLH
44. ☐ UL® Listed transformer (certifying compliance with ANSI® standards only) per UL®
XPLH
45. ☒ External visible break with gauges: Gauges include liquid level, dial-type
thermometer gauge, pressure/vacuum, pressure relief valve, and a 1.0” oil sampler valve,
and fill plug.
2.9 SHIPPING
A. Transformers, 1000 kVA and below, shall be palletized. Transformers, 1500 kVA and larger,
shall be loaded and unloaded with overhead cranes, so a pallet is not to be provided for these
transformers.
B. Packaging shall include tilt and shock sensor to detect any damage during shipping.

3.9 DATA WITH PROPOSAL
A. The following data shall be submitted with the proposal:
1. Core losses (when requested per Section 7.4.

2. Winding losses (when requested per Section 7.4.
3. Percent Impedance.
4. Typical bid drawing.
5. Approval drawing – drawings shall show final dimensions and features. When requested,
approval drawings shall be provided per quoted lead time.
6. Record Drawing – drawings shall show final dimensions and features. When requested,
record drawings shall be provided.
2.11 SERVICE
A. The manufacturer of the transformer shall have regional service centers located within two (2)
hours flight time of all contiguous 48 states. Service personnel shall be factory trained in
commissioning and routine service of quoted transformers.
2.12 FACTORY WITNESS TEST
A. Manufacturer to include allowance for FWT as follows: Equipment manufactured for Phase 1,
first of a kind equipment (Design Changes, Component Changes, Firmware Changes) and
whenever the owner deems necessary.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect,

test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
Report results in writing. Execute startup and commissioning services in accordance with
specification 019113 General Commissioning Requirements section inclusive of levels 1, 2, 3
and other testing.
B. Execute site tests in accordance to specification 260801 Acceptance Testing Requirements

section.
3.2 ONSITE TRAINING
A. Manufacturer to engage with the Owner’s representative to coordinate training for personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain the transformers. Provide a minimum of 4 hours onsite training per
building, to be coordinated by Operations.

SECTION 261300 – MEDIUM-VOLTAGE
GENERAL
A. Specifications:

4. Current Revision of Controls Specification
7. 260513 Medium Voltage Cables.
11. 260573 Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes metal-clad, circuit-breaker switchgear with the following optional
components, features, and accessories:
1. Copper, silver-plated bus.

2. Communication modules.
3. Relays.
4. Surge arresters.
5. Provisions for future devices.
6. Mimic bus.
for owner approval.
C. Product Data: For each type of switchgear and related equipment, include the following:
1. Rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories for

individual circuit breakers.
2. Catalog information, basic and optional features list and time-current characteristic
curves for overcurrent protective devices, including circuit-breaker relay trip devices.

3. Submittal cover page shall indicate whether equipment identically matches equipment
from prior phase(s) where applicable.
D. Shop Drawings: For each type of switchgear and related equipment, include the following:
1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required clearances and
service space around equipment. Show method of field assembly and location and size of
each field connection. Include the following:
a. Tabulation of installed devices with features and ratings.

b. Outline and general arrangement drawing showing dimensions, shipping sections,
and weights of each assembled section.
c. Drawing of cable termination compartments showing preferred locations for
conduits and indicating space available for cable terminations.
d. Floor plan drawing showing locations for anchor bolts and leveling channels.
e. Dimensioned elevations of control and relay panels.
f. Current ratings of buses.
g. Short-time and short-circuit ratings of switchgear assembly.
h. Nameplate legends.
i. Mimic-bus diagram.
j. Utility company's metering provisions with indication of approval by utility
company.
2. Design Calculations: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Calculate

requirements for selecting seismic restraints.
3. Wiring Diagrams: For each type of switchgear and related equipment, include the
following:
a. Power, signal, and control wiring.

b. Three-line diagrams of current and future secondary circuits showing device
terminal numbers and internal diagrams.
c. Schematic control diagrams.
d. Diagrams showing connections of component devices and equipment.
e. Schematic diagrams showing connections to remote devices including SCADA
remote terminal unit.
E. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans showing dimensioned layout, required working clearances,
and required area above and around switchgear where piping and ducts are prohibited. Show
switchgear layout and relationships between components and adjacent structural and mechanical
elements. Show support locations, type of support, and weight on each support. Identify field
measurements.
F. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification (for regions where appropriate): Submit

certification that switchgear assembly and components will withstand seismic forces defined in
the Structural Drawings and Specifications." Include the following:

a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of
any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the
unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based
and their installation requirements.
G. Qualification Data: For professional engineer and testing agency.
H. Source quality-control test reports.
I. Field quality-control test reports.
J. Operation and Maintenance Data: For switchgear and switchgear components to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01
Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices.
2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective
device.
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the
testing indicated, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person qualified to supervise on-site testing specified
in Part 3.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of switchgear and associated components through one
source from a single manufacturer.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
D. Comply with IEEE C2.
A. Deliver in sections of lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery path as indicated.
B. Store switchgear indoors in clean dry space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation.
Protect switchgear from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive substances, and physical
damage.

C. If stored in areas subjected to weather, cover switchgear to provide protection from weather,
dirt, dust, corrosive substances, and physical damage. Remove loose packing and flammable
materials from inside switchgear; install electric heating (250 W per section) to prevent
condensation.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Installation Pathway: Remove and replace building components and structures to provide
pathway for moving switchgear into place.
B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for
switchgear, including clearances between switchgear and adjacent surfaces and other items.
Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of switchgear and components with other construction
including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required clearances for
workspace and equipment access doors and panels.
B. EPMS Coordination Meeting: Switchgear supplier shall participate in a 4-hour coordination

meeting at the project site to coordinate all setpoints, device settings, time delays and other
relevant programming with the GC, Engineer, Electrical Contractor, EPMS vendor, and other
equipment suppliers. The purpose is to develop a fully coordinated electrical control and
monitoring system for the Owner. Final settings shall be documented in the O&M manuals
supplied under this Division.
1.8 WARRANTY
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Fuses: Six of each type and rating used. Include spares for future transformers, control
power circuits, and fusible devices.
2. Indicating Lights: Six of each type installed.
PRODUCTS
1.10 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:


manufacturers specified.
1.11 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Description: Factory assembled and tested, and complying with IEEE C37.20.1.
B. Ratings: Suitable for application in 3-phase, 60-Hz, solidly grounded-neutral system.
C. System Voltage: 34.5kV nominal or as indicated on drawings.
1.12 METAL-CLAD, CIRCUIT-BREAKER SWITCHGEAR
A. Manufacturers:
1. Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products.

2. Square D; Schneider Electric.
3. Industrial Electric Manufacturing, Inc.
4. Meyers Power Products, Inc.
5. Powercon Corporation.
B. Comply with IEEE C37.20.2
C. Nominal Interrupting-Capacity Class: 500 MVA (or as shown on drawings).
D. Ratings: Comply with IEEE C37.04.
1. Main-Bus Rating: As shown on drawings, 1200A or 2000A, continuous.
E. Circuit Breakers: Three-pole, single-throw, electrically operated, drawout-mounting units using

three individual, vacuum-sealed interrupter modules and including the following features:
1. Designed to operate at rated voltage to interrupt fault current within its rating within three
cycles of trip initiation. For systems with X/R ratio of 17 or less, transient voltage during
interruption shall not exceed twice the rated line-to-ground voltage of the system.
2. Contact-Wear Indicator: Readily accessible to field maintenance personnel.
3. Minimum of twelve Type A and twelve Type B spare contacts.
4. Interchangeability: Circuit breakers are interchangeable with vacuum circuit breakers of
same current and interrupting ratings.
a. Current Rating of Main Circuit Breaker: 2000 A or as shown on drawings.

b. Continuous Current Rating of Tie Circuit Breaker: 2000 A or as shown on drawings.
c. Continuous Current Rating of Feeder Circuit Breaker: 1200 A or as shown on
drawings.
5. Operating Mechanism: Electrically charged, mechanically and electrically trip-free,

stored-energy operated.

a. Closing speed of moving contacts to be independent of both control and operator.

b. Design mechanism to permit manual charging and slow closing of contacts for
inspection or adjustment.
1) Control Power: 125-V DC for closing and tripping.
c. Provide shunt trip capability independent of overcurrent trip where indicated on

drawings.
d. Each breaker compartment shall have a breaker rackout device. Using rackout
device, a breaker will be self-aligning and will be held rigidly in the operating
position. In the disconnect position, breaker shall be easily removable from
compartment. Breaker racking shall be accomplished with door closed and latched.
Insert handle through a hole in front door to operate rackout device or use remote
racking device.
e. Interlocks shall prevent moving breaker to or from operating position unless main
contacts are open. Operating springs shall be discharged automatically when
breaker is rolled fully into connected or disconnected position. Rackout device
shall have provisions to padlock in connected or disconnected position. When
locked in disconnected position, breaker shall be removable from compartment
using portable lifting device. Padlock shall not interfere with breaker operation.
f. Automatic shutters shall cover primary disconnect stabs when breaker is
withdrawn to test/disconnect position. Shutters shall be positively driven by
linkages connected to racking mechanism. A stationary barrier shall be located in
front of the shutters for additional safety.
F. Protective Relays:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Schweitzer Engineering Laboratories, Inc.

b. Pre-approved equal.
2. Basis of design products. The following products have been chosen as the basis of
design. Provide these products in the base pricing. Alternate products furnished by other
manufacturers may be proposed, but they shall meet or exceed the relevant specifications
and features of these products:
a. Main, Tie and Feeder Protection Relay: SEL 751.

b. Data Concentrator: SEL 3555.
c. Line Current Differential Relay: SEL 387L.
3. Comply with IEEE C37.90, integrated digital type with test blocks and plugs.
4. Provide test switches on protective relays to permit trip blocking, relay isolation and
testing.
5. Main, Tie and Feeder Protective Relay: Each circuit breaker relay shall have one or more
of the protective features listed below, as specified by design documents:
a. 50 – Overcurrent Trip: Phase, Ground and Negative Sequence.

b. 51 – Time Overcurrent Trip: Phase, Ground and Negative Sequence.
c. 27 – Undervoltage Trip.

d. 59 – Overvoltage Trip: Phase, Ground and Negative Sequence.

e. 32 – Reverse Power.
f. 87 – Differential Protection (for Main Breakers only).
6. Each Relay should be provided with the monitoring and control functions specified below:
a. Breaker Wear Monitor.

b. Time-coordinated Sequential Event Reporting (SER) – Minimum One Per Footprint.
c. Modbus RTU and TCP Communications.
d. Ethernet Fiber and Copper Communications.
e. Provide remote breaker operation for life safety.
f. In addition to the above, main breaker relays shall also provide Station Battery
Monitor.
7. Provide arc flash mitigation system. The system shall be designed to reduce arc flash
hazards to protect operators and equipment, and to reduce mean time to repair. Arc flash
system shall be incorporated into individual main, tie and feeder protective relays.
a. Furnish and install arc flash detection system that will reduce arc flash incident
energy with fast detection and tripping. The system will combine light sensing
technology with fast overcurrent protection to provide high speed operation
without false tripping.
b. System shall have a programmed algorithm that will rapidly and accurately sense
and determine the presence of an arc flash and directly activate the breaker trip
mechanism. Circuit breaker trip shall be initiated in fewer than 4 milliseconds.
c. Provide arc flash light sensors in each circuit breaker cubical with fiber optic
connection to relay associated with the cubical.
d. Provide bare fiber arc flash sensor over the entire switchgear bus and connect to
the main circuit breaker relay.
e. Vendor to provide graphical details of proposed protection scheme.
8. Other Protective Relays and Associated Devices:
a. Setting Groups: Provide capability to reduce protective settings to a “Safe Mode”

that minimizes arc flash potential for use by maintenance personnel when working
around energized equipment. Safe Mode setting groups shall be selectable from a
front panel key operated switch. Selecting Safe Mode will also activate a blue
flashing light on the front of the switchgear and initiate an alarm in the PLC.
b. Data Concentrator: Each switchgear lineup shall include a data concentrator to
aggregate communications from all protective devices in the switchgear and to
communicate with data concentrators in other switchgear lineups. SEL - 3555 or
approved equal
1) Data concentrator shall have remote access capability for engineering use.
2) Microprocessor: Minimum 533 MHz processor speed, minimum 512 MB
RAM, minimum 2 GB storage.
3) Communications Ports: 3 RJ-45, 17 EIA-485 Modbus.
4) Time Sync: Concentrator shall distribute IRIG-B time signal to relays in the
switchgear.

G. Grounding and Testing Device: Suitable for phasing out, testing, and grounding switchgear bus
or feeder if device is installed in place of circuit breaker. Include the following:
1. Portable Grounding and Testing Device: Provide one interchangeable device for all
switchgears located in the same building, with drawout-mounting, medium-voltage
circuit breakers to provide interlocked electrical access to either bus or feeder;
electrically operated.
2. System control cabinet permanently mounted near switchgear.
3. Portable Remote-Control Station: For grounding and testing device.
4. Control-Cabinet Coupler Cable: Of adequate length to connect device inserted in any
switchgear cubicle and control cabinet.
5. Remote-Control Coupler Cable: 50 feet long to connect control cabinet and portable
remote-control station.
6. Permanent Control Power Wiring: From control cabinet to power source.
7. Protective Cover: Fabricated of heavy-duty plastic and fitted to device.
8. Approval of Grounding and Testing Device System: Obtain approval of final system
design from utility company and agency designated by Owner to handle future
maintenance of medium-voltage switchgear.
1.13 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY
A. Medium Voltage Switch Gear provider shall engage a Registered Professional Electrical
Engineer competent in substation protection, who shall perform computer-based, fault-current,
overcurrent protective device coordination, and arc flash analysis studies as specified in
Division 26 Section "Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study." Protective devices
shall be set based on results of the protective device coordination study.
B. Supplier shall provide electronic setting files for each relay and data concentrator using relay
manufacturer’s configuration setting software (e.g. SEL-3555 acSELerator QuickSet *.RDB
file) for each relay. Supplier shall also provide hard copy setting sheets to Engineer.
1.14 FABRICATION
A. Indoor Enclosure: Steel.

A. Outdoor Enclosure: The switchgear described in these specifications shall be weath-
erproof, sheltered-aisle construction for outdoor service. Each shipping group shall
be mounted upon an integral base frame with a weatherproof enclosure assembly in
the field into a complete metal enclosed switchgear assembly. The enclosure shall
be extended on the breaker drawout side to form an operating and/or maintenance
aisle large enough to permit interchange of circuit breakers. A weatherproof door
with an inside quick release latch mechanism shall be located at each end of the in-
side even when locked on the outside. Interior lights, light switches and duplex
ground fault receptacles shall be furnished in the aisle.
B. Galvanized steel, weatherproof construction; integral structural-steel base frame with factory-
applied asphaltic undercoating.

1. Each compartment shall have the following features:
a. Structural design and anchorage adequate to resist loads imposed by 125-mph wind.
b. Space heater operating at one-half or less of rated voltage, sized to prevent
condensation.
c. Louvers equipped with insect and rodent screen and filter, and arranged to permit
air circulation while excluding rodents and exterior dust.
d. Hinged front door with locking provisions.
e. Interior light with switch.
f. Weatherproof GFCI duplex receptacle.
g. Power for heaters, lights, and receptacles to be provided by control power
transformer.
C. Finish: Manufacturer's standard gray finish over rust-inhibiting primer on phosphatizing-treated

metal surfaces. Adequacy of paint finish to inhibit the buildup of rust on ferrous metal materials
shall be tested and evaluated per paragraphs 5.2.8.1-7 of ANSI C37.20.2-1987. Salt spray
withstand tests in accordance with ASTM #D-1654 and #B-117 shall be performed on a
periodic basis to provide conformance with the corrosion resistance standard of at least 2500
hours.
D. Bus Transition Unit: Arranged to suit bus and adjacent units.
E. Incoming-Line Unit: Arranged to suit incoming line.
F. Outgoing Feeder Units: Arranged to suit distribution feeders.
G. Auxiliary Compartments: Arranged to suit house meters, relays, controls, and auxiliary
equipment; isolated from medium-voltage components.
H. Key Interlocks: Arranged to effect interlocking schemes indicated.
I. Provisions for Future Key Interlocks: Mountings and hardware required for future installation
of locks, where indicated.
1.15 COMPONENTS
A. Main Bus: Copper, silver plated; full length of switchgear.
B. Ground Bus: Copper, silver or tin plated; minimum size 1/4 by 2 inches; full length of switchgear.
C. Bus Insulation: Covered with flame-retardant insulation
D. Termination Insulation: Flame-retardant insulated termination covers
E. Instrument Transformers: Comply with IEEE C57.13.
1. Potential Transformers: Potential transformers are drawout mounted with primary

current- limiting fuses and shall have ratio as indicated. The transformers shall have
mechanical rating equal to the momentary rating of the circuit breakers and shall have
metering accuracy per ANSI/IEEE Standards. Secondary voltage rating of 120 V and
NEMA accuracy class of 0.3 with burdens of W, X, and Y.
2. Current Transformers: Each breaker compartment shall have provision for front-
accessible mounting of up to four current transformers per phase (ANSI standard
protective relay accuracy), two on bus side and two on cable side of circuit breaker. The
current transformer assembly shall be insulated for the full voltage rating of the
switchgear. The current transformers wiring shall be Type SIS #12 AWG. Relaying and
metering accuracy shall conform to ANSI/IEEE Standards.
3. Protection engineer shall perform CT accuracy study to insure CT’s selected perform
properly with the protective relays selected.
F. Multifunction Digital Circuit Monitor (PQM): Microprocessor-based unit suitable for three- or
four-wire systems listed and labeled by an NRTL. Unit shall be Square D PowerLogic model
CM4000T/ECC21 or approved equal, and with the following features:
1. Comply with IEEE 1159 and IEC EN50160 Standards.

2. Inputs from sensors or 5-A current-transformer secondaries, and potential terminals rated
to 600 V.
3. Detect and record transients by sampling the waveform every 200 ns for all seven
categories of electromagnetic disturbance as defined by IEEE. Disturbance categories
are:
a. Impulse: High, medium, low and oscillatory.

b. Short Duration: Sags, swells and interruptions.
c. Long Duration: Undervoltages, overvoltages and interruptions.
d. Voltage: Steady state unbalanced loads.
e. Harmonic Distortion.
f. Intermittent Voltage.
g. Frequency Deviation.
4. Switch-selectable digital display with the following minimum features:
a. Phase Currents, Each Phase and 3 Phase Average.

b. Phase-to-Phase and Phase to Neutral Voltages, Each Phase and Three Phase
Average.
c. Three-Phase Real Power, Demand and Demand Peak.
d. Reactive Power kVAR & kVA, Three Phase Total.
e. Power Factor per Phase and Three Phase Total.
f. Frequency.
g. Integrated Demand Power Real/Reactive and Apparent.
h. Accumulated energy, in megawatt hours, values unaffected by power outages for
up to 72 hours.
5. Communications module suitable for remote monitoring of meter quantities and

functions. Provide IEEE-485 Modbus and TCP-IP interfaces. Interface communication
and metering requirements according to the Current Revision of the Controls
Specifications.
6. IRIG-C clock synchronization.
7. Event recording with 32 MB memory.
8. ITIC envelope monitoring.
9. Mounting: Display and control unit that is flush or semi flush mounted in instrument
compartment door.

G. Surge Arresters: Intermediate class, metal-oxide-varistor type. Comply with NEMA LA 1.

1. Provide intermediate class arresters in cable termination compartments in each phase of

circuit for main and feeders.
2. Arresters shall be gapless metal-oxide type with a sufficient rating as dictated by the
nominal voltage of the gear, and approved by the project engineer.
3. The arrester shall be enclosed in a polymer housing.
4. Arresters shall be designed and manufactured in accordance with the latest revision of
ANSI/IEEE C62.11.
H. Control Power Supply: 125VDC battery system for relays, breakers, logic and alarming only
will be fed from control power as described in section 2.8(E). Auxiliary power for lighting,
receptacles and heaters shall be external 208V source.
I. Control Wiring: Factory installed, complete with bundling, lacing, and protection; and
complying with the following:
1. Flexible conductors for No. 8 AWG and smaller, for conductors across hinges, and for
conductors for interconnections between shipping units.
2. Conductors sized according to NFPA 70 for duty required.
J. Accessories
1. Lift truck (1 furnished per building).

2. Manual racking handle (1 furnished per lineup).
3. Provide remote racking device with push-button, motor operator, and 25 feet of cable.
4. Provide infrared arc resistant view windows installed in the electrical equipment by
manufacturer in location to allow unobstructed and safe IR scanning of feeder
termination points as well as other main bus connection points that may develop hot spots
over time.
1.16 CONTROL BATTERY SYSTEM
A. System Requirements: Each switchgear lineup shall have a dedicated battery system. Battery
shall have number of cells and ampere-hour capacity based on an initial specific gravity of
1.210 at 25 deg C with electrolyte at normal level and minimum ambient temperature of 13 deg
C. Cycle battery before shipment to guarantee rated capacity on installation. Arrange battery to
operate ungrounded. System capacity to supply both switchgear lineups and VFI transformers
as indicated on the drawings. Distribution to include circuit breakers for circuits indicated on
the drawings. Redundant source selection devices shall be provided to assure continuous
125VDC control power to all equipment in the system.
B. Battery: Lead-calcium type in sealed, clear plastic or glass containers, complete with electrolyte,
fully charged and arranged for shipment with electrolyte in cells. Limit weight of each container
to not more than 70 lb and cells per container to not more than 3. System batteries shall be
suitable for service at an ambient temperature ranging from minus 18 to 25 deg C. Limit
variation of current output to 0.8 percent for each degree below 25 deg C down to minus 8 deg
C.
C. Rack: Two-step rack with electrical connections between battery cells and between rows of
cells; include two flexible connectors with bolted-type terminals for output leads. Rate battery
rack, cell supports, and anchorage for seismic requirements.

D. Accessories:

1. Thermometers with specific-gravity correction scales.

2. Hydrometer syringes.
3. Wall-mounting, nonmetallic storage rack fitted to store above items.
4. Set of cell numerals.
E. Charger: Provide two redundant chargers fed from separate AC circuits and diode bridged on
the output. Static-type silicon rectifier equipped with automatic regulation and provision for
manual and automatic adjustment of charging rate. Unit shall automatically maintain output
voltage within 0.5 percent from no load to rated charger output current, with ac input-voltage
variation of plus or minus 10 percent and input-frequency variation of plus or minus 3 Hz.
Other features of charger include the following:
1. DC ammeter.
2. DC Voltmeter: Maximum error of 5 percent at full-charge voltage; operates with toggle
switch to select between battery and charger voltages.
3. Ground Indication: Two appropriately labeled lights to indicate circuit ground, connected
in series between negative and positive terminals, with midpoint junction connected to
ground by normally open push-button contact.
4. Capacity: Sufficient to supply steady load, float-charge battery between 2.20 and 2.25 V
per cell and equalizing charge at 2.33 V per cell.
5. Charging-Rate Switch: Manually operated switch provides for transferring to higher
charging rate. Charger operates automatically after switch operation until manually reset.
6. AC power supply is 480 V, 60 Hz, subject to plus or minus 10 percent variation in
voltage and plus or minus 3-Hz variation in frequency. After loss of ac power supply for
any interval, charger automatically resumes charging battery. Charger regulates rate of
charge to prevent damage due to overload and to prevent fuses or circuit breakers from
opening.
7. Protective Feature: Current-limiting device or circuit, which limits output current to
rating of charger but does not disconnect charger from either battery or ac supply; to
protect charger from damage due to overload, including short circuit on output terminals.
8. Electrical Filtering: Reduces charger's audible noise to less than 26 dB.
9. Alarm Contacts: Provide two sets of 1-NO and 1-NC dry relay contacts to provide the
following alarms:
a. Low battery voltage.

b. Loss of AC power.
c. Charger failure.
d. DC ground.
e. DC circuits output
1.17 IDENTIFICATION
A. Materials: Refer to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." Identify units,
devices, controls, and wiring.
B. Mimic Bus: Continuous mimic bus applied to front of switchgear, arranged in single-line
diagram format, using symbols and lettered designations consistent with approved final mimic-
bus diagram.

1. Mimic-bus segments coordinated with devices in switchgear sections to which applied, to

produce a concise visual presentation of principal switchgear components and
connections.
2. Medium: Color coded plastic laminate applied with stainless steel screws.
3. Color: Contrasting with factory-finish background; approved by Engineer.
C. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning

signs complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section
D. Switchboard Nameplates: Label each switchboard compartment with a nameplate complying

with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for
Electrical Systems."
E. Device Nameplates: Label each disconnecting and overcurrent protective device and each meter
and control device mounted in compartment doors with a nameplate complying with
requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical
Systems."
A. Before shipment of equipment, perform the following tests and prepare test reports:
1. Production tests on circuit breakers according to ANSI C37.09.

2. Production tests on completed switchgear assembly according to IEEE C37.20.2.
B. Assemble switchgear and equipment in manufacturer's plant and perform the following:
1. Functional tests of all relays, instruments, meters, and control devices by application of
secondary three-phase voltage to voltage circuits and injection of current in current
transformer secondary circuits.
2. Functional test of all control and trip circuits. Connect test devices into circuits to
simulate operation of controlled remote equipment such as circuit-breaker trip coils, close
coils, and auxiliary contacts. Test proper operation of relay targets.
B. Prepare equipment for shipment.
1. Provide suitable crating, blocking, and supports so equipment will withstand expected
domestic shipping and handling shocks and vibration.
2. Weatherproof equipment for shipment. Close connection openings to prevent entrance of
foreign material during shipment and storage.

EXECUTION
1.20 EXAMINATION (By Contractor).
A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive switchgear for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances, required clearances, and other conditions affecting performance.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1.21 INSTALLATION (By Contractor).
A. Anchor switchgear assembly to 4-inch, channel-iron sill embedded in concrete base and attach
by bolting.
1. Sills: Select to suit switchgear; level and grout flush into concrete base.
2. Design each fastener and support to carry load indicated by seismic requirements and
according to seismic-restraint details. See Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic
Controls for Electrical Systems" for seismic-restraint requirements.
3. Concrete Bases: 4 inches high, reinforced, with chamfered edges. Extend base no less
than 3 inches in all directions beyond the maximum dimensions of switchgear, unless
otherwise indicated or unless required for seismic anchor support. Construct concrete
bases according to Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."
B. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and
temporary blocking of moving parts from switchgear units and components.
1.22 IDENTIFICATION (By Contractor)
A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning

signs as specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B. Diagram and Instructions:
1. Frame under clear acrylic plastic on front of switchgear.
a. Operating Instructions: Printed basic instructions for switchgear, including control

and key-interlock sequences and emergency procedures.
b. System Power Riser Diagrams: Depict power sources, feeders, distribution
components, and major loads.
2. Storage for Maintenance: Include a rack or holder, near the operating instructions, for a
copy of maintenance manual.
1.23 CONNECTIONS (By Contractor)
A. Cable terminations at switchgear are specified in Division 26 Section "Medium-Voltage Cables."

B. Tighten bus joints, electrical connectors, and terminals according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values.
C. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
D. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Sections "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors

and Cables" and "Medium-Voltage Cables."
E. The following locations shall use ring terminals for wiring termination: All wiring from CTs,
through test switches, through current meters, to overcurrent protective relays.

A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test,

and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. Report
results in writing. Execute startup and commissioning services in accordance with specification
019113 General Commissioning Requirements section inclusive of levels 1, 2, 3 and other
testing.

section.
1.25 ADJUSTING:
A. Set field-adjustable, protective-relay trip parameters according to results in Division 26 Section

260573 "Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study."
1.26 CLEANING (By Contractor)
A. On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of switchgear. Vacuum dirt and
debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning. Repair damaged finishes.
1.27 PROTECTION (By Contractor)
A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to switchgear, according to manufacturer's written

instructions, throughout periods when switchgear environment is not controlled for temperature
and humidity within manufacturers stipulated service conditions.
1.28 ONSITE TRAINING
adjust, operate, and maintain the Medium Voltage Switchgear. (Provide a minimum of 4 hours
onsite training per building, to be coordinated by Operations)

SECTION 262200 – LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Specifications:

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following types of dry-type transformers rated 600 V and less, with
capacities up to 1500 kVA:
1. Distribution transformers.
B. Product Data: Include rated nameplate data, capacities, weights, dimensions, minimum
clearances, installed devices and features, and performance for each type and size of
transformer indicated.
C. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
A. Comply with IEEE C57.12.91, "Test Code for Dry-Type Distribution and Power Transformers."
B. Energy-Efficient Transformers Rated 15 kVA and Larger: Marked as compliant with DOE 2016
efficiency levels by an NRTL.

A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat according to manufacturer's written instructions

within the enclosure of each ventilated-type unit, throughout periods during which equipment is
not energized and when transformer is not in a space that is continuously under normal control
of temperature and humidity.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with actual transformer provided. Cast anchor-
bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in
Division 03.
B. Coordinate installation of wall-mounting and structure-hanging supports with actual transformer

provided.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

following:
1. ACME Electric Corporation; Power Distribution Products Division.

2. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Products.
3. ABB
4. General Electric Company.
5. Magnetek Power Electronics Group.
6. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
2.2 GENERAL TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS
A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, air-cooled units for 60-Hz service.
B. Cores: Grain-oriented, non-aging silicon steel.
C. Coils: Continuous windings without splices except for taps.
1. Internal Coil Connections: Brazed or pressure type.

2. Coil Material: Copper or Aluminum.
2.3 DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS
A. Comply with NEMA ST 20, and list and label as complying with UL 1561.

B. Provide transformers that are constructed to withstand seismic forces specified in Division 26
Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
C. Cores: One leg per phase.
D. Enclosure: Ventilated, NEMA 250, Type 1 or Type 2.
1. Core and coil shall be encapsulated within resin compound, sealing out moisture and air.
E. Transformer Enclosure Finish: Comply with NEMA 250.
1. Finish Color: Gray.
F. Taps for Transformers 25 kVA and Larger: Two 2.5 percent taps above and two 2.5 percent taps
below normal full capacity.
G. Insulation Class: 220 deg C, UL-component-recognized insulation system with a maximum of

150 deg C rise above 40 deg C ambient temperature.
H. Energy Efficiency for Transformers Rated 15 kVA and Larger:
1. Marked as compliant with DOE 2016 efficiency levels by an NRTL.
I. K-Factor Rating: Transformers indicated to be K-factor rated shall comply with UL 1561
requirements for nonsinusoidal load current-handling capability to the degree defined by
designated K-factor.
1. Unit shall not overheat when carrying full-load current with harmonic distortion
corresponding to designated K-factor.
2. Indicate value of K-factor on transformer nameplate.
J. Wall Brackets: Where indicated on drawings, manufacturer's standard brackets with anchorage
meeting seismic requirements.
K. Low-Sound-Level Requirements: Minimum of 3 dBA less than NEMA ST 20 standard sound

levels when factory tested according to IEEE C57.12.91.
2.4 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
A. Nameplates: Engraved, laminated-plastic or metal nameplate for each distribution transformer,

mounted with corrosion-resistant screws. Nameplates and label products are specified in
Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
A. Test and inspect transformers according to IEEE C57.12.91.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions for compliance with enclosure- and ambient-temperature requirements for
each transformer.
B. Verify that field measurements are as needed to maintain working clearances required by NFPA
70 and manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and concrete bases for suitable mounting conditions where
transformers will be installed.
D. Verify that ground connections are in place and requirements in Division 26 Section
"Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems" have been met. Maximum ground resistance
shall be 5 ohms at location of transformer.
E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install wall-mounting transformers level and plumb with wall brackets fabricated by
transformer manufacturer.
1. Brace wall-mounting transformers as specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration and

Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
B. Construct concrete bases and anchor floor-mounting transformers according to manufacturer's

written instructions, seismic codes applicable to Project, and requirements in Division 26
Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
B. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors

and Cables."
A. Testing Agency and Testing Agency Supervisor in accordance with specification 019113
requirements.

3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Record transformer secondary voltage at each unit for at least 48 hours of typical occupancy
period. Adjust transformer taps to provide optimum voltage conditions at secondary terminals.
Optimum is defined as not exceeding nameplate voltage plus 10 percent and not being lower
than nameplate voltage minus 3 percent at maximum load conditions. Submit recording and tap
settings as test results.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning.

SECTION 262413 – SWITCHBOARDS (3PHASE, 4WIRE, WYE SYSTEM)
PART 1 - General
E. Specifications:

8. 262413.1 Switchboards – Auto Transfer Control Scheme
9. 262413.2 Switchboards – Form 3b & 4 Description.
F. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Service and distribution switchboards rated 480V.
2. Special fabrication to provide forms of separation: Form 4b and 3b.
3. Disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices.
4. Instrumentation.
5. Control power.
6. Communication capability.
7. Touch screen.
8. Accessory components and features.
9. Identification.
10. Mimic bus.
11. Transient voltage suppression devices.

1.3 SPECIAL FABRICATION
A. Summary of the intent for special fabrication requirements: This switchboard specification is
based from the UL891 Switchboard specification, but aims to incorporate some of the safety and
reliability features from UL1558, as well as IP20 and IEC60349-1. Most of these additional re-
quirements are listed under section 2.1 SPECIAL FABRICATION REQUIREMENTS. Refer to
section 262413.2, Switchboards: Form 4 Description for forms of separation description.

A. Seismic Performance: Switchboards shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions deter-
mined accordingly to the locally adopted building code and the requirements set out in
ASCE/SEI7. Coordinate with owners’ and project regional requirements.
1. The term “withstand” means “the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts
from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified.
2. Compliance with ASCE/SEI 7 may be qualified with submission of any of the following:
a. Analysis per ASCE 7 CHP.13 accompanied by a signature and seal of a professional engineer.
b. Testing based upon a nationally recognized testing standard procedure, such as ICC-ES AC
156, acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction (AHJ). Provided the substantiated seismic
capacities equal or exceed the seismic demands documented in the project requirements.
1) OSHPD certificates may be accepted if acceptable to AHJ.
c. Experience data based upon nationally recognized procedures acceptable to the authority hav-
ing jurisdiction, provided the substantiated seismic capacities equal or exceed the seismic de-
mands documented in the project requirements.

specification and the related specifications outlined in 1.1 A above, in accordance with
B. Provide the factory acceptance test and startup report templates, to include firmware ver-
sions for owner approval.
C. Product Data: For each type of switchboard, overcurrent protective device, surge protection
device, ground-fault protector, protective relays, PLCs, multifunction digital meters, accessory,
and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features,
performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes.
D. Submittals: For each switchboard and related equipment.
1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required clearances and
service space around equipment. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and
ratings.
2. Detail enclosure types for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.
3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.
4. Detail short-circuit current rating of switchboards and overcurrent protective devices.
5. Detail utility company's metering provisions with indication of approval by utility company.
(If required).
6. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent
protective devices and auxiliary components.
7. Include diagram and details of proposed mimic bus.
8. Include schematic and wiring diagrams for power, signal, control, and monitoring wiring.
9. Provide automatic transfer system sequence of operation and operating instructions.
10. Indicate maximum quantity of conductor sets per phase that can be terminated for each feeder
termination.
11. Factory acceptance test script for review, comment and approval.
12. Submittal cover page shall indicate whether equipment identically matches equipment
from prior phase(s) where applicable.
E. Samples: Representative portion of mimic bus with specified material and finish, for
color selection.
F. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that transformer
assembly and components will withstand seismic forces defined in the Structural Drawings
and Specifications. Include the following:
assembled components or on calculation.
a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from
the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational
after the seismic event."
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and
describe mounting and anchorage provisions.


G. Field Quality-Control Reports.
3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with
requirements.
H. Operation and Maintenance Data: For switchboards and components to include in emer-
gency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Include the following:
1. Routine maintenance requirements for switchboards and all installed components.
3. Time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device in-
cluded in switchboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft paper; include selectable ranges
for each type of overcurrent protective device.
4. Approved sequence of operation and the operations manual for the automatic transfer system.
5. Certified factory acceptance test report.
I. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Potential Transformer Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and
type, but no fewer than two of each size and type.
2. Control-Power Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but
no fewer than two of each size and type.
3. Indicating Lights: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no
fewer than one of each size and type.

A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers qualified as defined in NEMA PB 2.1

and trained in electrical safety as required by NFPA 70E.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability
to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical
Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by
OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational Electrical
Test- ing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies
to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.4.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain switchboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and
accessories from single source from single manufacturer.
D. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for switch-
boards including clearances between switchboards and adjacent surfaces and other items. Com-
ply with indicated maximum dimensions.
E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA
70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
F. Comply with NEMA PB 2.
G. Comply with NFPA 70.
H. Comply with UL 891.
A. Deliver switchboards in sections or lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery
path. Prior to shipping coordinate requirement with the installing contractor.
B. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside switchboards and take care pre-
vent condensation.
C. Handle and prepare switchboards for installation according to NEMA PB 2.1.

A. Environmental Limitations:
1. Do not deliver or install switchboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in
spaces is complete and dry, work above switchboards is complete, and temporary HVAC
system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at
occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
2. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise
indicated:
a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 104 deg F.

b. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.
B. Service Conditions: NEMA PB 2, usual service conditions, as follows:
1. Ambient temperatures within limits specified.
2. Altitude not exceeding 6600 feet.
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate required quantity and size of conductor terminations with approved engineer’s
drawings specific to each project. Underground feeders may require de-rating of conductors
and NEC ampacity table may not apply.
B. Coordinate layout and installation of switchboards and components with other construction
that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment,
raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces.
Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and
panels.
C. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast an-
chor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified
in Division 03.
1.10 WARRANTY
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SPECIAL FABRICATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Section barriers between main and tie circuit-breaker compartments shall be extended to
rear of section.
B. Bus isolation barriers shall be arranged to isolate line bus from load bus at each main and tie
circuit breaker.
C. Bus bars connect between vertical sections and between compartments. Cable connections
are not permitted.
1. Main Phase Bus: Uniform capacity the entire length of assembly.
2. Neutral Bus: 100 percent of phase-bus ampacity, except as indicated. Equipped bus with pres-
sure-connector terminations for outgoing circuit neutral conductors. Include braces for
neutral- bus extensions for busway feeders.
3. Use silver-plated copper or tin-plated aluminum for connecting circuit-breaker line to
aluminum bus.
4. Use copper for connecting circuit-breaker line to copper bus.
5. Contact Surfaces of Buses: Silver plated.
6. Feeder Circuit-Breaker Load Terminals: Silver-plated copper bus extensions equipped with
pressure connectors for outgoing circuit conductors.
7. Supports and Bracing for Buses: Adequate strength for indicated short-circuit currents.
8. Neutral Disconnect Link: Bolted, uninsulated, 1/4-by-2-inch (6-by-50-mm) copper bus,
arranged to connect neutral bus to ground bus.
9. Provide for future extensions from either end of main phase, neutral, and ground bus by
means of predrilled bolt-holes and connecting links.

D. Main Incoming Circuit Breakers to comply with IEC 61439-2 Form 4 Type 6 internal
separation as outlined below:
1. Separation of busbars from the functional units.
2. Separation of all functional units from each other.
3. Terminals for external conductors from other terminals and from the busbars.
4. Busbar separation is by metallic or non-metallic rigid barriers.
5. Main incoming units are mounted in separate sections
6. Diagram block of this requirement:

E. Circuit Breakers from frame sizes 800A and above to comply with IEC 61439-2 Form 3b
Type 2 internal separation as outlined below:
1. Separation of busbars from the functional units.
2. Separation of all functional units from each other.
3. Separation of the terminals for external conductors from the functional units, but not from
each other
4. Terminals for external conductors separated from busbars
5. All separation is by metallic or non-metallic rigid barriers.
6. Cables are glanded elsewhere in a common cabling chamber.
7. Diagram block of this requirement:
F. Comply with IP20 "Finger Safe" - Defined as protection against ingress of solid foreign
objects greater than 12.5 mm in Diameter.
G. Trip units on circuit breakers shall be factory set in the state wherein they are read-only.
Write capabilities that permit remote operation or modification shall be disabled. Where remote
capability cannot be disabled, trip units shall not be networked. Contact state reporting for
open/close/tripped shall remain enabled.
H. Split-bus switchgear: when design employs use of Trenwa cable trench, switchgear shall be
split into separate main and distribution sections. The main section shall have the main (Utility)
breaker and the generator breaker, and auxiliary devices. The distribution section shall have the
feeder breakers and auxiliary devices.
I. Form 3b and 4 requirements identified above and throughout are applicable to OptDC builds;
JITWMW builds shall utilize traditional Form 4 switchgear as previously supplied.
2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS


following.
1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
3. Industrial Equipment Manufacturing, Inc.
4. E&I Engineering Corp.
B. Switchboard Configuration.
1. Low Voltage Section of Utility Switchboard (USB’s).
a. Front- and Rear-Accessible Switchboards.

b. Main Devices: Insulated case circuit breakers, drawout mounted, compartmentalized, four pole,
100 percent rated for all feeder breakers with the exception of the 800A ATS feeder breakers.
Circuit breakers rated or otherwise adjustable to 1200 amps and larger shall have an arc energy
reducing maintenance switch with electronic trip and status indication to reduce clearing time
per NEC 240.87.
c. Branch Devices: Insulated case circuit breakers, drawout mounted. compartmentalized, 100
percent rated (800 amps and below).
2. Switchboards (COP’s).
a. Front- and Rear-Accessible Switchboards.

b. Main Devices: Insulated case circuit breakers, drawout mounted, four pole, 100% rated (above
600 amps). Circuit breakers rated or otherwise adjustable to 1200 amps and larger shall have an
arc energy reducing maintenance switch with electronic trip and status indication to reduce
clearing time per NEC 240.87.
c. Branch Devices: Molded case circuit breakers, fixed, panel mounted (600 amps and below).
d. Sections front and rear aligned.
3. Switchboards (CAMLOCK): Refer to Camlock switchboard in generator specification

for detail.
a. Front- and Rear - Accessible Switchboards.

b. Main Devices: Insulated case circuit breakers, fixe mounted, three pole, 100% rated. Circuit
breakers rated or otherwise adjustable to 1200 amps and larger shall have an arc energy reduc-
ing maintenance switch with electronic trip and status indication to reduce clearing time per
NEC 240.87.
c. Sections front and rear aligned.

C. Nominal System Voltage: 480Y/277V.

D. Main-Bus Continuous: As indicated on the single line diagrams.
E. System Short Circuit Withstand and Interruption Rating: 65kA symmetrical meeting
UL891 requirements or as shown on single line diagrams.
F. Indoor Enclosures: Steel, NEMA 250, Type 1.
G. Enclosure Finish for Indoor Units: Factory-applied finish in manufacturer's standard
finish over a rust-inhibiting primer on treated metal surface.
H. Barriers:
1. Barriers between adjacent switchboard sections.
2. Barriers between individual devices on MSB’s.
3. Internal indoor vertical section for separation between line bus and load bus.
4. Lexan rear door barrier for each section.
5. rear barriers between bus and cable compartment.
6. bus compartment side barriers.
7. cable compartment side barriers.
I. All sections top and bottom entry.
J. Cable supports.
K. Bus Transition and Incoming Pull Sections: Matched and aligned with basic switchboard.
L. Removable, Locking, Hinged Rear Doors and Compartment Covers: For access to rear
interior of switchboard.
M. Tool-operated latch on all doors for rear access equipment. Requires a phillips head screw-
driver to unlock.
N. Hinged Front Panels: Allow access to circuit breaker, metering, accessory, and blank
compartments.
O. Buses and Connections: Three phase, four wire unless otherwise indicated.
1. Phase- and Neutral Bus Material: Hard-drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity,
silver- plated, with copper feeder circuit-breaker line connections.
2. Line and Load Terminals: Insulated, rigidly braced, runback bus extensions, of same material
as through buses, equipped with compression connectors for outgoing and incoming circuit
conductors. Provide load terminals for future circuit-breaker positions at full-ampere rating
of circuit- breaker position.
3. Ground Bus: 1/4-by-2-inch-hard-drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity, equipped with
compression connectors for feeder and branch-circuit ground conductors. For busway
feeders, extend insulated equipment grounding cable to busway ground connection and
support cable at intervals in vertical run.
4. Main Phase Buses and Equipment Ground Buses: Uniform capacity for entire length of
switchboard's main and distribution sections. Provide for future extensions from both ends.
5. Neutral Bus: 100 percent of the ampacity of phase buses unless otherwise indicated, equipped
with mechanical connectors for outgoing circuit neutral cables. Brace bus extension for
busway feeder neutral bus.
6. All compression connectors shall be copper, long barrel, 2-hole compression lugs.

P. Future Devices: Equip compartments with mounting brackets, supports, bus connections,
and appurtenances at full rating of circuit-breaker compartment.
Q. Backstopping equipment. Network integration for BACOP.
1. Extend set of 52A status contacts of main utility and incoming generator breaker to a
common terminals for BACOP monitoring.
2. Refer to EPMS section for metering requirements of BACOP.
R. Catcher Automation & Dynamic Load Balancing (DLB) system integration.
2.3 Surge protection DEVICES
A. Surge Protection Device Description: IEEE C62.41-compliant, integrally mounted, wired-in

or bolt-on, solid-state, parallel-connected, with sine-wave tracking suppression and filtering
modules, UL 1449, second edition, short-circuit current rating matching or exceeding the
switchboard short-circuit rating, and with the following features and accessories:
1. Fuses, rated at 200-kA interrupting capacity.
2. Fabrication using bolted compression lugs for internal wiring.
3. Integral disconnect switch.
4. Redundant suppression circuits.
5. Redundant replaceable modules.
6. Arrangement with wire connections to phase buses and ground bus.
7. LED indicator lights for power and protection status.
8. Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has failed.
9. Form-C contacts rated at 5 A and 250-V ac, one normally open and one normally closed, for
remote monitoring of system operation. Contacts shall reverse position on failure of any surge
di- version module or on opening of any current-limiting device. Normally Closed (NC) contact
to be wired to switchboard’s Sequence of Events recorder for monitoring by building power
monitoring and control system.
10. Transient-event counter set to totalize transient surges.
B. Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating: 160 kA per mode/320 kA per phase.
C. Withstand Capabilities: 12,000 IEEE C62.41, Category C3 (10 kA), 8-by-20-mic.sec.
surges with less than 5 percent change in clamping voltage.
D. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for either solidly grounded or high resistance
grounded delta/wye circuits with voltage and phase configuration as shown on drawings.
Provide voltage ratings as appropriate for configuration as shown on drawings.
2.4 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

A. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with full interrupting
capacity to meet available fault currents. Series rating not allowed.
1. Electronic trip circuit breakers with rms sensing; field-replaceable rating plug or field-
replicable electronic trip; provide clear Plexiglas cover over the settings user interface to
prevent involun- tary changes and aid in visual inspection of settings. The following field-
adjustable settings are required:
a. Instantaneous trip.
b. Long- and short-time pickup levels.
c. Long- and short-time time adjustments.
d. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.
2. Communication Capability: Integral communication module with Modbus communication

with external power monitoring system. Refer to the Electrical Power Monitoring Section
below and Current Revisions of the Controls Specifications for required monitoring points for
remote monitoring.
3. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories:
a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.

b. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material.
c. Ground-Fault Protection (Where indicated on the one line diagram): Integrally mounted relay
and trip unit with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-
fault indicator.
d. Shunt Trip (Where indicated on the one line diagram): 120-V trip coil energized from separate
circuit, set to trip at 75 percent of rated voltage.
e. Auxiliary Contacts: Two SPDT switches with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts mimic
circuit- breaker contacts, "b" contacts operate in reverse of circuit-breaker contacts.
f. Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit circuit-breaker operation; key shall be
removable only when circuit breaker is in off position.
g. Normally closed clear covers over all pushbuttons.
h. Mechanical interlock to prevent closing breaker when lock-out tag-out.
i. Lockable clear covers over trip units and settings interface.

B. Feeder Circuit Breakers, Insulated-Case Circuit Breaker (ICCB): Three pole, 100
percent rated, sealed, insulated-case power circuit breaker with interrupting capacity rating
to meet available fault current without fuses. Equivalent to Square D NW breakers.
1. Drawout circuit-breaker mounting.
2. Two-step, stored-energy closing.
3. Full-function, microprocessor-based trip units with interchangeable rating plug, trip
indicators, and the following field-adjustable settings and features:
b. Long- and short-time pickup and time adjustments.
c. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.
d. Metering function including volts, amps, power (kW), frequency, and energy
(kWh). The voltage sensing wires shall be configured to measure bus
voltage.
e. Power monitoring connection shall be on the line side of the circuit breaker.
4. Remote trip indication and control.

6. Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit circuit-breaker operation; key shall be
7. Safety shutters to isolate bus stubs when the breaker is racked out
8. Padlockable levering device to mechanically locking the breaker in OFF position.
9. Operation counter
10. Control Voltage: 120-V ac.
11. Auxiliary Contacts:
a. Six SPDT switches with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts mimic circuit-
breaker contacts, "b" contacts operate in reverse of circuit-breaker contacts.
b. Six sets of switches to indicate circuit breaker is withdrawn and disconnected.
c. Six sets of switches to indicate circuit breaker is connected.
d. Wire all unused contacts to the customer terminals for future use

12. Three bell alarm contacts to indicate over-current trip.

13. Normally closed clear covers over all pushbuttons.
14. Mechanical interlock to prevent closing breaker when lock-out tag-out.
C. Main Circuit Breakers, Insulated-Case Circuit Breaker (ICCB): Four Pole, 100 percent
rated, sealed, insulated-case power circuit breaker with interrupting capacity rating to meet
available fault current without fuses. Equivalent to Square D NW breakers.
1. Drawout circuit-breaker mounting.
2. Two-step, stored-energy closing.
3. Full-function, microprocessor-based trip units with interchangeable rating plug, trip
indicators, and the following field-adjustable settings and features:
b. Long- and short-time pickup and time adjustments.
c. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.
d. Metering function including volts, amps, power (kW), frequency, and energy (kWh). The
voltage sensing wires shall be configured to measure bus voltage. Power monitoring connection
shall be on the line side of the circuit breaker.
4. Remote trip indication and control.

5. LED to indicate breaker open (green), closed (red), tripped (amber).
7. Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit circuit-breaker operation; key shall be
8. Safety shutters to isolate bus stubs when the breaker is racked out
9. Padlockable levering device to mechanically locking the breaker in OFF position.
10. Operation counter
11. Control Voltage: 120-V ac.
a. Six SPDT switches with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts mimic circuit-breaker contacts,
"b" contacts operate in reverse of circuit-breaker contacts.
b. Six sets of switches to indicate circuit breaker is withdrawn and disconnected.
c. Six sets of switches to indicate circuit breaker is connected.
d. Three bell alarm contacts to indicate over-current trip.
e. Wire all unused contacts to the customer terminals for future use
13. Additional Requirements (For Interface with Automatic Transfer Control System):
a. Automatic spring charging motor and control circuits.
b. Electrically operated, shunt close and shunt trip control circuits.
c. Remote control (breaker open/close) push buttons at the front of the switchboard.
d. LED to indicate breaker open (green), closed (red), tripped (amber).


16. Lockable clear covers over trip units and settings interface.
D. The selected trip units as indicated on SLDs shall utilize system that reduces the arc flash en-
ergy during maintenance. The system shall reduce the trip unit Instantaneous pickup value when
activated. The device shall not compromise breaker phase protection even when enabled. Once
the the unit is disabled, the recalibration of trip unit phase protection shall not be required. Acti-
vation and deactivation of ARMS setting shall be accomplished without opening the circuit
breaker door and exposing operators to energized parts.
1. The system shall be enabled via a switch on the trip unit. It shall also provide confirmation
of protection via a Blue LED.
2. The system shall be wired locally with interposing relays and wired to SER terminals for
remote monitoring when enabled.
2.5 INSTRUMENTATION
A. Instrument Transformers: IEEE C57.13, NEMA EI 21.1, and the following:
1. Potential Transformers: IEEE C57.13; 120 V, 60 Hz, single secondary; disconnecting type
with integral fuse mountings. Burden and accuracy shall be consistent with connected
metering and relay devices.
2. Current Transformers: IEEE C57.13; 5 A, 60 Hz, secondary; bushing type; single secondary
winding and secondary shorting device. Burden and accuracy shall be consistent with
connected metering and relay devices.
3. Control-Power Transformers: Dry type, mounted in separate compartments for units larger
than 3 kVA.
4. Current Transformers for Neutral and Ground-Fault Current Sensing: Connect secondary
wiring to ground overcurrent relays, via shorting terminals, to provide selective tripping of
main and tie circuit breaker. Coordinate with feeder circuit-breaker, ground-fault protection.
B. Multifunction Digital-Metering Monitor: Microprocessor-based unit suitable for three- or
four-wire systems and with the following features:
1. Utility MCBU Power Quality Meter shall be configured by switchgear provider to
provide one Form A (NO) output contact which will change to a closed state, with no
delay, if any of the three phase voltage THD values exceed 7%. The single contact shall
be wired to an easily accessible customer terminal strip in the switchgear allowing the
installing contractor to interconnect it with the AMCOP panel.
2. Meter and associated instrument transformers shall demonstrate a maximum end- to-
end uncertainty of plus or minus 0.5% or better for current, voltage, and power.

3. Touch screen or Switch-selectable digital 3.5" display with event and alarm logging of
the following values:
a. Phase Currents, Each Phase.

b. Phase-to-Phase Voltages, Three Phase.
c. Phase-to-Neutral Voltages, Three Phase.
d. Megawatts.
e. Megavars.
f. Power Factor.
g. Frequency.
h. Accumulated Energy, Megawatt Hours; accumulated values unaffected by
power outages up to 72 hours.
i. Megawatt Demand; demand interval programmable from five to 60 minutes.
j. Contact devices to operate remote impulse-totalizing demand meter.
4. Mounting: Display and control unit flush or semiflush mounted in instrument

compartment door.
5. Communication Capability: Integral communication module with ModbusTCP
communication with external power monitoring system. Refer to the Electrical Power
Monitoring Section below and Current Revisions of the Controls Specifications for
required monitoring points for remote monitoring.
6. Waveform Capture Capability: Ability to capture disturbance and steady-state
waveforms at minimum of 256 points per cycle.
7. Time Syncing: Meter is capable of time syncing via PTP protocol pursuant to IEEE
1588 or capable of receiving IRIG-B or DCF-77 time signal from SER within
switchboard.
8. Refer to Section 2.8H for additional meter requirements
C. Protective Relays: Microprocessor-based unit suitable for interface with the Amazon
Change-Over Panel (AMCOP) and with the following features:
1. The protective relays shall provide necessary control and monitoring of the utility source
and generator source as outlined in the AMCOP sequence of operation.
2. Utility Source Protective Relay: Basler model BE1-700V with the following protective
functions and default settings.
a. Undervoltage pickup and delay – ANSI Device 27
1) Default Setting: 90% of nominal voltage.
b. Negative sequence overvoltage pickup and delay – ANSI Device 47.
1) Default Setting: 15V phase-to-neutral based on 120V PT secondary voltage.
3. Generator Source Protective Relay: Basler model BE1-700V with the following protective
functions.
a. Undervoltage pickup and delay – ANSI Device 27.
b. Overvoltage pickup and delay – ANSI Device 59.

c. Negative sequence overvoltage pickup and delay – ANSI Device 47.

1) Default Setting: 10V phase-to-neutral based on 120V PT secondary voltage.
d. Over/Under frequency pickup and delay – ANSI Device 81 O/U.
1) Default Setting: 63 Hz to 57 Hz
based on nominal 60 Hz.
4. Mounting: Display and control unit flush or semiflush mounted in instrument compartment
door.
with external power monitoring system.
a. Watchdog general alarm contact for monitoring to be wired to switchboard SER.
7. Time Syncing: Meter is capable of time syncing via PTP protocol pursuant to IEEE 1588 or
capable of receiving IRIG-B time signal from SER within switchboard.
2.6 SEQUENCE OF EVENTS RECORDER (SER)
A. Provide 32 port sequence of events recorder to log and record open/closed and tripped for
all circuit breakers and alarms from external electrical equipment. Monitoring also includes
control power source availability, relay alarms, SPD alarmds, and others as noted in the
electrical drawing set.
B. SER shall be capable of stratum 1 time syncing via PTP and NTP. SER shall also be capable
of outputting IRIG-B or DCF-77 time signal as a master for time syncronization to meters and
relays if they do not have PTP functionality. PTP to IRIG-B and/or DCF-77 shall be configured
and wired for relays and other non-PTP compliant meter time sync (Cyber Sciences PLX-5V and
or PLX-24V).
C. SER to time stamp events at 1 ms accuracy, use isolated digital inputs, allow Ethernet con-
nectivity for secure web application viewing and a minimum of four ModbusTCP masters
polling data simultaneously.
D. Allowable models includes CyberSciences SER-3200-PTP or Amazon approved equivalent.
E. Webpage shall be enabled.
2.7 CONTROL POWER

A. The control power system shall be designed to eliminate the single point of failure by
using multiple source of control power derived externally and internnaly from the switchboard
and provide discrimination for faults within each control power branches.
B. Control Circuits: 120-V ac, supplied through secondary disconnecting devices from
control- power transformers.
C. 120 VAC Electrically Interlocked Control Power Transfer System:
1. USB: Two control-power transformers in separate compartments, with interlocking relays,
connected to the primary side of each control-power transformer at the line side of the
associated main circuit breaker, and two external UPS circuit. 120-V secondary connected
through automatic transfer relays to ensure a fail-safe automatic transfer scheme. Control
power source priority shall be as follows:
a) Source 1 (Preferred Primary Source): External UPS circuit Unit A.

b) Source 2 (Alternate Source 1): External UPS circuit Unit B.
c) Source 3 (Alternate Source 2): Utility source.
d) Source 4 (Alternate Source 3): Generator source.
2. COP: Two control-power transformers in separate compartments, with interlocking relays,

connected to the primary side of each control-power transformer at the line side of the
associated main circuit breaker, and two external UPS circuits. 120-V secondary connected
through automatic transfer relays to ensure a fail-safe automatic transfer scheme.Control
power source priority shall be as follows:

a) Source 1 (Preferred Primary Source) External UPS circuit Unit A.

b) Source 2 (Alternate Source 1): External UPS circuit Unit B.
c) Source 3 (Alternate Source 2): Catcher 1 source.
d) Source 4 (Alternate Source 3): Catcher 2 source.
D. 24VDC Control Power: Uninterrupted control power shall be provided for the required sys-
tems and installed in a separate compartment inside the switchboard. At minimum, 24VDC con-
trol power shall be provided for the internal to switchgear devices necessary for proper opera-
tion of the AMCOP sequence of operation. The 24VDC control power system shall consist of
rec- tifiers/chargers, VRLA battery and necessary protection against overcurrent and DC
backfeed. The battery shall be sized for full load at 4hr discharge rate. The 24VDC control
power system shall be fed from the load side of the 120 VAC Electrically Interlocked Control
Power Transfer System.
1. Provide monitoring points for 24VDC Power Supply, UPS and battery. Normally open (NO)
volt- free alarm contacts shall be provided from the equipment and wired to the switchboard
SER for pick-up externally by Amazon Controls Team.
2. 24VDC control power shall be capable of being tied together between A & B lineups as a
means of redundancy. See detail E564 for control power requirements.
3. Provide a redundant (2nd) 24VDC power supply and UPS internal to single-ended (stand-
alone A or B or Catcher) lineups. See detail E564 for control power requirements.
4. Where split-bus switchgear exists, provide 24VDC control power supply and UPS within
each gear section. Provide means of extending 120V control power (output of 4 sources)
between switchgear sections. See detail E564 for control power requirements.
E. Provide LED indicator lights for status monitoring of four AC control power source as well
as the redundant 24VDC control power. The LED indicator lights will be located to the front
face of the switchboard.
F. Control-Power Fuses: Primary and secondary fuses for current-limiting and overload protec-
tion of transformer and fuses for protection of control circuits. The control power branch distri-
bution within the switchboard shall be designed to ensure each branch is properly and sepa-
rately protected with appropriately sized fuses/breakers to provide coordination against faults
that may cause single point of failure of control power supply.
G. Control Wiring: Factory installed, with bundling, lacing, and protection included. Provide
flexible conductors for No. 8 AWG and smaller, for conductors across hinges, and for
conductors for interconnections between shipping units. Properly and uniquely label each
terminals and wires for tracebility.
2.8 ELECTRICAL POWER MONITORING

A. The switchboard must be compatible with Owner’s stand-alone electrical power monitoring
system. All monitoring points specified herein must be available via ModBusTCP. Electrical
equipment provider must ensure that all electrical power monitoring components provided in
the switchgear / switchboard have the latest available stable firmware version during on site
level 3 commissioning startup. Electrical equipment provider is responsible for troubleshooting
any device firmware and cabling issues with the equipment they provide. Provide an industrial
Ethernet Switch with single point connection, RJ-45 port to be connected by the owner’s power
monitoring contractor. All points specified herein shall be available at the Ethernet switch with
no other wiring or connection required by the installing contractor.
B. The switchboard must also be compatible with Owner’s stand-alone backstopping system per
lineup. Power quality meters associated with backstopping shall have the capability of concur-
rent Modbus TCP and ModbusRTU over serial communications. Meters shall be a minimum of
Janitza UMG-512-PRO AWS, Schneider PM8000, Eaton PXM4000, Siemens 9410 or Amazon
approved equivalent with metering class solid core CTs, shorting strips and fuses and allow for
the entire serial string of meters to be sampled at 200ms intervals or faster. All monitoring points
specified herein must be available via ModbusRTU at or exceeding baud rates of 115.2
kBaud. Power quality meters to be serial daisy chained internally to the switchboard using
Belden 9841 2-wire RS-485 connection or Amazon approved equivalent cable. Provide single
point of connection via terminal strip labeled clearly for owner’s electrical contractor to termi-
nate to the start of the serial string within the switchgear which will then allow for connection to
the backstopping panel. All points specified herein shall be available at the single connection
point for backstopping with no other wiring or connection required by the installing contractor.
C. All hardware choices must be submitted for AWS Controls Design for review and approval.
D. All meters shall be located in segregated section from voltages exceeding 240VAC with
ease of access for service and troubleshooting, and compliance with UL 1244.
1. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 12.
E. All serial-based devices shall connect to a serial to Ethernet gateway.
F. All devices that communicate with EPMS shall be Ethernet based and connected over
Ether- net to the industrial Ethernet switch in the gear.
G. Digital-Metering Monitor, available monitoring points.
2. Real-Time Reading:
a. Per phase current.
b. Neutral current.
c. 3-phase average current.
d. % unbalance current.
e. Line-to-line, per phase voltage.
f. Line-to-line, 3-phase average voltage.
g. Line-to-neutral, per phase voltage.
h. % unbalance voltage.
i. Per phase power (kW).
j. 3-phase total power (kW).
k. Per phase power (kVAR).
l. 3-phase total power (kVAR).
m. Per phase power (kVA).

n. 3-phase total power (kVA).

o. Per phase power factor.
p. 3-phase total power factor.
q. Frequency.
3. Demand Readings:
a. Demand Current, Per phase, 3-phase average, Neutral.
b. Last complete interval.
c. Peak.
d. Average Power Factor, 3-phase total.
e. Last complete interval.
f. Coincident with kW peak.
g. Coincident with kVAR peak.
h. Coincident with kVA peak.
i. Demand Real Power, 3-phase total.
j. Last complete interval.
k. Predicted.
l. Peak.
m. Coincident kVA Demand.
n. Coincident kVAR Demand.
o. Demand Reactive Power, 3-phase total.
p. Last complete interval.
q. Predicted.
r. Peak.
s. Coincident kVA Demand.
t. Coincident kVAR Demand.
u. Demand Apparent Power, 3-phase total.
v. Last complete interval.
w. Predicted.
x. Peak.
y. Coincident kW Demand.
z. Coincident kVAR Demand.
3. Energy Readings:
a. Accumulated energy (real, reactive, apparent).
b. Power Analysis Values:
1) THD – voltage and current.
2) 3-phase, per phase, neutral.
3) Fundamental voltages per phase.
4) Magnitude & angle.
5) Fundamental currents per phase.
6) Magnitude & angle.
7) Displacement power factor (per phase, 3-phase).
8) Phase rotation.
9) Unbalance (current & voltage).
10) Individual current and voltage harmonic magnitudes.
11) Individual current and voltage harmonic angles.

H. Power Quality Meter (PQM)

1. Eaton PXM4000
2. Schneider PM8000
3. Janitza UMG512-PRO-AWS
4. Or AWS approved alternate
5. Protocol – must support ModbusTCP with minimum of 4 ModbusTCP Masters polling
simultaneously
6. UL, CE, CSA certified for use as applicable in the region installed
7. Meter Accuracy to meet or exceed
a. ANSI C12.20 Class 0.2
b. IEC 62053-22 Class 0.2
8. CT Accuracy Class to meet or exceed
a. IEEE C57.13 Class 0.3
b. IEC 60044-1 Class 0.5S
9. PT Accuracy Class to meet or exceed
10. Meter shall allow for onboard configuration settings to be backed up and restored, with
the intent that the same configuration settings will be used on all of the like meters in the
switchgear.
11. Meter must provide at minimum all data values as listed in the Power Quality Meter
section of the Controls Points List natively via Modbus in addition to the points listed in
2.8G. Digital Metering Monitor.
12. Meter must include waveform capture at 256 samples/cycle minimum with accuracy to
63rd harmonic
13. Time Sync: PTP time sync preferred. If meter does not support PTP but does support
IRIG- B or DCF-77, this time signal must be wired to the device from the closest SER. If
PTP nor IRIG-B or DCF-77 is supported, meter must be configured for NTP time sync.
14. Record maximum, average, and minimum block interval readings over 1, 5, 10, or 15
minute intervals for the following points:
a. Real Power A/B/C/Total
b. Apparent Power A/B/C/Total
c. Current A/B/C/Average
d. These readings should be calculated based on RMS readings taken at least once per
1000ms. Readings calculated during a block interval period are stored once the
interval is complete and are available via ModbusTCP until the end of the next
block interval, at which time the value is overwritten by the next interval's
calculated value.
15. Switchgear manufacturer to manage meter configuration files for all monitoring
scenarios. File includes PT/CT ratio, alarm thresholds, communication parameters,
waveform capture settings, etc.
16. Webpage shall be enabled.
17. Power Demand Calculations: According to one of the following calculation methods,
selectable by the user:
a. Thermal Demand: Sliding window updated every second for the present demand
and at end of the interval for the last interval. Adjustable window that can be set in
1-minute intervals, from 1 to 60 minutes.
b. Block Interval with Optional Subintervals: Adjustable for 1-minute intervals, from
1 to 60 minutes. User-defined parameters for the following block intervals:
2) Sliding block that calculates demand every second, with intervals less than
15 minutes, and every 15 seconds with an interval between 15 and 60
minutes.

3) Fixed block that calculates demand at end of the interval.

4) Rolling block subinterval that calculates demand at end of each subinterval
and displays it at end of the interval.
c. Demand Calculation Initiated by a Synchronization Signal:
5) Signal is a communication signal. Calculation shall be configurable as either
a block or rolling block calculation.
6) Demand can be synchronized with clock in the power meter.
18. Harmonic Calculation: Display and record the following:
a. Harmonic magnitudes and angles for each phase voltage and current through 63rd
harmonic. Calculate for all three phases, current and voltage, and residual current.
Current and voltage information for all phases shall be obtained simultaneously
from same cycle.
b. Harmonic magnitude reported as a percentage of the fundamental or as a
percentage of rms values, as selected by user.
19. Current and Voltage Ratings:
a. Designed for use with current inputs from standard instrument current transformers
with 5-A secondary and shall have a metering range of 0-10 A.
b. Withstand ratings shall not be less than 15 A, continuous; 50 A, lasting over 10
seconds, no more frequently than once per hour; 500 A, lasting 1 second, no more
frequently than once per hour.
c. Designed for use with voltage inputs from standard instrument potential
transformers with a 120-V secondary.
20. Waveform Capture:
a. Capture and store steady-state waveforms of voltage and current channels; by
automated trigger. See waveform trippers shown in Controls Specification 25 26
00 Section 3.3. Q. Each capture shall be for 3 cycles, 128 data points for each
cycle, allowing resolution of harmonics to 31st harmonic of basic 60 Hz.
b. Store captured waveforms in internal nonvolatile memory; available for PC
display, archiving, and analysis.
21. Input: Two digital input signal(s).
a. Normal mode for on/off signal.
b. Demand interval synchronization pulse, accepting a demand synchronization pulse
from a utility demand meter.
c. Conditional energy signal to control conditional energy accumulation.
22. Outputs:
a. Operated either by user command sent via communication link, or set to operate in
response to user-defined alarm or event.
b. Closed in either a momentary or latched mode as defined by user.
c. Each output relay used in a momentary contact mode shall have an independent
timer that can be set by user.
d. One digital KY pulse to a user-definable increment of energy measurement. Output
ratings shall be up to 120-V ac, 300-V dc, 50 mA, and provide 3500-V rms
isolation.
e. Two relay output module(s), providing a load voltage range from 20- to 240-V ac
or from 20- to 30-V dc, supporting a load current of 2 A.
f. Output Relay Control:
7) Relay outputs shall operate either by user command sent via communication
link or in response to user-defined alarm or event.
8) Normally open and normally closed contacts, field configured to operate as
follows:

a) Normal contact closure where contacts change state for as long as

signal exists.
b) Latched mode when contacts change state on receipts of a pickup
signal; changed state is held until a dropout signal is received.
c) Timed mode when contacts change state on receipt of a pickup signal;
changed state is held for a preprogrammed duration.
d) End of power demand interval when relay operates as synchronization
pulse for other devices.
e) Energy Pulse Output: Relay pulses quantities used for absolute kWh,
absolute kVARh, kVAh, kWh In, kVARh In, kWh Out, and kVARh
Out.
f) Output controlled by multiple alarms using Boolean-type logic.
23. Onboard Data Logging:
a. Store logged data, alarms, events, and waveforms in 256 MB of onboard
nonvolatile memory.
b. Stored Data:
9) Custom Data Logs: Three user-defined log(s) holding up to 96 parameters.
Date and time stamp each entry to the second and include the following user
definitions:
a) Schedule interval.
b) Event definition.
c) Configured as "fill-and-hold" or "circular, first-in first-out."
10) Alarm Log: Include time, date, event information, and coincident
information for each defined alarm or event.
11) Waveform Log: Store captured waveforms configured as "fill-and-hold" or
"circular, first-in first-out."
c. Default values for all logs shall be initially set at factory, with logging to begin on
device power up.
24. Alarms.
a. User Options:
12) Define pickup, dropout, and delay.
13) Assign one of four severity levels to make it easier for user to respond to the
most important events first.
14) Allow for combining up to four alarms using Boolean-type logic statements
for outputting a single alarm.
b. Alarm Events:
15) Over/undercurrent.
16) Over/undervoltage.
17) Current imbalance.
18) Phase loss, current.
19) Phase loss, voltage.
20) Voltage imbalance.
21) Over kW demand.
22) Phase reversal.
23) Digital input off/on.
24) End of incremental energy interval.
25) End of demand interval.
25. Control Power: 90- to 457-V ac or 100- to 300-V dc.
26. Display Monitor:
a. Backlighted LCD to display metered data with touch-screen selecting device.

b. Touch-screen display shall be a minimum 3.5-inch diagonal, resolution of 320 by

240 RGB pixels, 256 colors; NEMA 250, Type 1 display enclosure.
c. Display four values on one screen at same time.
26) Current, per phase rms, three-phase average.
27) Voltage, phase to phase, phase to neutral, and three-phase averages of phase
to phase and phase to neutral.
28) Real power, per phase and three-phase total.
29) Reactive power, per phase and three-phase total.
30) Apparent power, per phase and three-phase total.
31) Power factor, per phase and three-phase total.
32) Frequency.
33) Demand current, per phase and three-phase average.
34) Demand real power, three-phase total.
35) Demand apparent power, three-phase total.
36) Accumulated energy (MWh and MVARh).
37) THD, current and voltage, per phase.
d. Reset: Allow reset of the following parameters at the display:
38) Peak demand current.
39) Peak demand power (kW) and peak demand apparent power (kVA).
40) Energy (MWh) and reactive energy (MVARh).
I. Power Meter Plus (PM+)

1. Eaton PXM2260
2. Janitza UMG604-PRO AWS with Application-681
4. Protocol – must support ModbusTCP with minimum of 4 ModbusTCP Masters polling
simultaneously
5. UL, CE, CSA certified for use as applicable in the region installed
6. Meter Accuracy to meet or exceed
a. ANSI C12.20 Class 0.5
b. IEC 62053-22 Class 0.5S
7. CT Accuracy Class to meet or exceed
b. IEC 60044-1 Class 0.5S
8. PT Accuracy Class to meet or exceed
9. Meter shall allow for onboard configuration settings to be backed up and restored, with
the intent that the same configuration settings will be used on all of the like meters in the
switchgear.
10. Meter must provide at minimum all data values as listed in the Power Meter section of
the Controls Points List natively via Modbus. Prefer meter also include advanced values
as shown on the Power Quality Meter section such as Voltage THD, Current TDD and
Voltage and Current Unbalance.
11. Record maximum, average, and minimum block interval readings over 1, 5, 10, or 15
minute intervals for the following points:
a. Real Power A/B/C/Total
b. Apparent Power A/B/C/Total
c. Current A/B/C/Average
d. These readings should be calculated based on RMS readings taken at least once per
1000ms. Readings calculated during a block interval period are stored once the

interval is complete and are available via ModbusTCP until the end of the next
block interval, at which time the value is overwritten by the next interval's
calculated value.
J. Sequence of Events Recorder (SER)

1. Refer to section 2.6 for requirements
K. Remote I/O Module

1. Moxa IOlogik E1210
2. Janitza ProData 2 Data Logger
3. Or AWS approved alternate.
4. Digital input and output module that supports dry contact remote monitoring
5. Protocol – must support ModbusTCP with minimum of 4 ModbusTCP masters polling
simultaneously
2. DIN Rail Mounted
6. In MSDB module must support Ethernet daisy chain
L. Serial to Ethernet Gateway

1. Moxa Mgate
2. Schneider EGX-150
3. Eaton PXG900
4. Or AWS approved alternate.
5. Converts between ModbusTCP and ModbusRTU/ASCII protocols
6. Minimum of 1 Ethernet port
7. Supports 16 Simultaneous TCP masters with up to 32 simultaneous requests per master
8. Web page for configuration
9. Serial interface support
a. Baud rate: 9.6k to 115k
b. Parity: None, Even, Odd, Space, Mark
c. Stop Bits: 1,2
d. Pull High/Low Resistor for RS-485: 1 kilo-ohm, 150 kilo-ohms
e. RS-232/422/485 (software selectable)
10. Include screw terminal adaptor for serial cable connection if gateway by default provides
DB9, RJ45 or RJ11 connector.
M. Industrial Unmanaged Network Switch

1. Moxa EDS-208A
2. EDS-316
4. 10/100BaseT (X) (conector RJ45)
5. IP30 aluminum housing
6. Redundant dual 12/24/48 VDC power inputs
7. -10 to 60 degrees C operating temperature range
8. 5 to 95% (non-condensing) ambient relative humidity
9. Standards
a. IEEE 802.3 for 10BaseT
b. IEEE 802.3u for 100BaseT(X) for 100BaseFX
c. IEEE 802.3x for flow control

N. Breaker Trip Unit

1. ABB Ekip Touch
2. Schneider Micrologic P
3. Eaton Digitrip 1150
4. Eaton PXR25
6. Must have a display that allows for configuration and monitoring (if applicable).
7. Must have current and voltage monitoring capabilities for applicable wiring type.
8. Voltage sensing for trip unit to be on the line side of the breaker.
9. Circuit Breaker Trip Units, Available monitoring points:
a. Real-Time Readings.
1) Current.
a) Per phase.
b) Neutral.
c) Ground.
d) Max of 3 phase and neutral.
e) 3-phase average.
f) Current unbalance.
2) Voltage.
a) Line-to-line, per phase.
b) 3-phase average, line-to-line.
c) Line-to-line, per phase.
d) 3-phase average, line-to-line.
e) Voltage unbalance.
3) Real power.
a) 3-phase total.
b) Per phase.
4) Reactive power.
a) 3-phase total.
b) Per phase.
5) Apparent power.
a) 3-phase total.
6) Power factor.
a) 3-phase total.
b) Per phase.
7) Frequency.
a. Demand Readings.
1) Demand current.
a) Present, per phase and neutral.
b) Peak, per phase and neutral.
c) Peak K-factor demand, per phase and neutral.
d) Predicted, per phase and neutral.
2) Average power factor, 3-phase total.
a) Present.
e) Coincident with kW peak.
f) Coincident with kVAR peak.
g) Coincident with kVA peak.
3) K-factor.
a) Present, per phase and neutral.
h) At peak demand current, per phase and neutral.

i) Peak, per phase and neutral.

j) Predicted, per phase and neutral.
4) Demand real power, 3-phase total.
a) Present.
k) Predicted.
l) Peak.
m) Coincident kVAR.
n) Coincident kVA.
5) Demand Reactive Power, 3-phase total.
o) Present.
p) Predicted.
q) Peak.
r) Coincident kW.
s) Coincident kVA.
6) Demand Apparent Power, 3-phase total.
a) Present.
t) Predicted.
u) Peak.
v) Coincident kW.
w) Coincident kVAR.
7) Energy Readings:
a) Accumulated energy (real, reactive, apparent).
8) Digital Status.
a) Breaker Status (Open / Closed).
x) Breaker Tripped.
y) Ground Fault Alarm.
z) Voltage Unbalance Alarm.
aa) Under Frequency Alarm.
bb) Over Frequency Alarm.
cc) Over Voltage Alarm.
dd) Under Voltage Alarm.
ee) Reverse Power Alarm.
ff) Internal Communications Alarm.
gg) Summary Alarm.
O. Cabling
1. Must be compliant with Controls Specification including proper labeling and structured
orderly layout.
2. If power and communication cabling is run in separate pathways, CAT6E U/UTP may be
used in lieu of CAT6E F/UTP.
2.9 Catcher automation & dynamic load balancing (DLB) system
A. DLB System Overview

The dual catcher system with N+2C increases the redundancy by having a second catcher
when one catcher is not available due to scheduled maintenance or being partially or fully
loaded. In order to protect against this situation and to utilize both catchers to their full
capacity when needed, DLB automation will continuously monitor the loads, control the
power flow, prevent

overloading of the catcher system, and maintain the full catcher system redundancy. DLB
automation also complements the Backstopping (BACOP) system by monitoring total
catcher load and balancing the total load between the two catchers to prevent overloading of
catcher lineups.
B. DLB System Hardware Requirements

Refer to power one-lines, electrical details for the installation and engineering details of
the DLB system. All DLB hardware and DLB connection diagrams shall be approved by
AWS Engineering.
1. Distribution Automation Controller (DAC): The DAC provides the control and monitoring
capabilities to the DLB system. One DAC will be located in each catcher switchboard. Using
DNP3.0 or IEC61850, the DAC collects breaker and load statuses from all LACs and perform
automation duties according to programmed sequence. The DAC is used as secured gateway
to communicate metering, breaker statuses and system alarms to EPMS. The DAC has
capability to monitor output to a Human Machine Interface (HMI) that would be used to
display alarms, breaker statuses, and metering as well as local controls.
Each DAC with a Primary/Secondary configuration shall be installed within Catcher MEDS
switchboards (MEDS-C1 and MEDS-C2) / USB switchboard (USB C1 and USB C2).
Approved Manufacturers:
Schweitzer Engineering Laboratories - SEL3555 (AWS Part#: 3555#KJ79
or3555#C6BD) -OR-
Siemens- SICAM A8000 (CP-8050, CAT# 6MF2805-0AA00)
2. Local Automation Controller (LAC): The LAC provide metering and breaker control
capabilities to the DLB system. LACs will be installed in each COP and connected for line
voltage, bus voltage and line current measurements as well as breaker controls and local LED
annunciation. LACs will be installed in each catcher switchgear, one for utility, one for
generator incomer and connected for line voltage, bus voltage and line current measurements
and local LED annunciation.
Schweitzer Engineering Laboratories - SEL751 (AWS Part#: 751#24MM or 751#GBB8,
MOT: 751002B1B0X70851820) -OR-
Siemens - SIPROTEC 7SJ85 (CAT# P1J930756)
3. Managed Network Switch: The network switch is used to provide Ethernet connectivity for
DLB system.
Schweitzer Engineering Laboratories-SEL2730M(MOT#:2730M0ARCA2222AAAAX0)
Siemens: Ruggedcom RST2228 (CAT# 6GK6222-6AB00-5DN0-Z
A00+B01+C05+D05+E05+F05+G05)
SFP 1121-1FX2 A for RST 2228 (6GK6000-8FE50-0AA0)

** Provide SFPs as required for sites with chiller COPs.
4. Human Machine Interface (HMI) : HMI will be installed at the Catcher MEDS/USB
switchboards and provide a central location for operators to view alarms, status, and
remotely control COP breakers. The minimum size of the HMI screen shall be 19inches. HMI
will be wired to DAC.

Approved Manufacturer:
Schweitzer Engineering Laboratories Touch Screen Monitor Kit (P/N: 91610054)
Siemens- SIMATIC IPC 477E ( 6AV7241-5EB05-0FA0)
C. Time Synchronisation: The DAC will be configured to receive precision time protocol (PTP)
for the primary time source and network time protocol (NTP) as a backup time source. Time will
be distributed to all LACs to synchronize the LAC time to IRIG-B with sub- millisecond
accuracy.
D. DLB System Internal and External Cabling Requirements:
1. Fiber Optic Ethernet connections between devices shall be provided using AFL Hyperscale
111954-XXXM or AWS approved equivalent OM3, 50 um, duplex, plenum rated cables with
LC- to-LC connectors.
2. Mirror bit connections between devices shall be provided using AFL Hyperscale 111956-
XXXM or AWS approved equivalent OM3, 50 um, duplex, plenum rated cables with ST-to-ST
duplex connectors.
3. Mirrored Bit and Ethernet fiber cables may be run inside the same plenum rated cable
between devices using AFL Hyperscale 111955-XXXM or AWS approved equivalent.
4. Cable splices are not permitted.
5. Cables must be ordered in needed length. Extraneous lengths and excess slack coils are not
permitted.
E. DLB System Scope of Services:
1. Switchboard vendor shall provide, install and connect all DLB hardware as per the AWS
provided DLB schematics and BOM.
2. The AWS Engineering shall provide a complete set of DLB schematics, software program
files and setting files, startup and DLB operation manuals to the switchboard vendor.
3. The General Contractor shall be responsible to install and terminate external fiber cabling
between COP and Catcher switchoards as shown on engineering drawings.
4. During startup on site, the switchboard vendor shall be responsible for uploading of the DLB
program files and setting files into the DLB hardware and ensure the DLB system is ready for
commissioning.
5. Switchboard vendor shall assist commissioning team during DLB system commissioning and
testing.
2.10 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES

A. Accessory Set: Include tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent protective de-
vice test, inspection, maintenance, and operation.
B. Motorized racking device to remotely rack out / rack in drawout breakers. (One required pro-
vided with first phase construction of the building)
C. Overhead Circuit-Breaker Lifting Device: Mounted at top front of switchboard, with
hoist and lifting yokes matching each drawout circuit breaker.
D. Protective Clear Plastic Lockable Covers: Installed over all electromechanical
control switches, Breaker settings interface and buttons to prevent accidental operation.
E. Anti-condensation space heaters in each switchboard section. Connect all space heaters to
external customer terminals for external power source connection for temporary storage.
2.11 IDENTIFICATION
A. Mimic Bus: Continuously integrated mimic bus factory applied to front of switchboard.
Ar- range in single-line diagram format, using symbols and letter designations consistent with
final mimic-bus diagram.
B. Coordinate mimic-bus segments with devices in switchboard sections to which they are ap-
plied. Produce a concise visual presentation of principal switchboard components and connec-
tions.

first of a kind equipment (Design Changes, Component Changes, Firmware Changes) and when-
ever the owner deems necessary.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY

A. Overcurrent protective device coordination shall be performed. Protective devices shall be
set based on results of the protective device coordination study.
3.2 EXAMINATION
A. The switchboard shall be factory witness tested by the owner and/or owner’s representative
prior to leaving the factory for delivery. Factory acceptance test script shall be reviewed and ap-
proved by the owner prior to the test. Upon completion of the test, a factory certified test report
shall be provided.
3.3 INSTALLATION

A. The switchboard shall be installed by the owner’s installing contractor.

B. SPD installation:
1. Install the SPD devices at service entrance on load side, with ground lead bonded to service
entrance ground.
2. Install the SPD devices for switchboard with conductors and buses between supressor and
points of attachment as short as possible. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended lead
length. Do not bond neutral and ground.
C. Control power installation:
1. Provide 24VDC connection (conduit and wire) between control power sources in A & B lineups.
2. Provide 120V connection (conduit and wire) between control power sources in split-bus
switchgear sections.

specification 019113 General Commissioning Requirements section inclusive of levels 1, 2, 3
and other testing.
section.
3.5 Onsite trainnig
A. Manufacturer to engage with the Owner’s representative to coordinate training for personnel
to adjust, operate, and maintain the Switchboard. Provide a minimum of 4 hours onsite training
per building, to be coordinated by Operations.

SECTION 262413.1 – SWITCHBOARDS-AUTO TRANSFER CONTROL SCHEME
PART 1 - SWITCHGEAR AUTOMATIC OPERATION
1.1 UTILITY MAIN - GENERATOR
A. NORMAL CONDITIONS
1. The utility main breaker (52-U) is closed.

2. The generator breaker (52-G) is open.
3. The Auto/Man switch is in the “AUTO” position.
4. The Generator stop/start switch is in the “OFF” position.
B. NORMAL POWER FAILURE
1. Undervoltage/phase imbalance/reversal is detected by device 47/27-1 relay.

2. After a three (3) second source loss time delay, the utility main breaker (52-U) opens.
3. The generator start relay de-energizes signaling the generator to start.
4. Generator breaker (52-G) closes ten (12 “sorce stabilization timer”) seconds after the
proper voltage and frequency is detected by 47/27/59/81-2 Voltage/Frequency relays.
C. NORMAL POWER RETURNS (AUTO RETRANSFER – OPEN TRANSITION)
1. Condition 1: Normal voltage is detected by device 47/27-1 Voltage relay on the Utility
side.
2. Condition 2: UPS is in Normal operation mode verification by signal from UPS control.
IF UPS in BYPASS PLC, do not transfer Generator back to Utility. Alarm and/or event
log to communicate this condition.
3. After the voltage has been stable for t (x this timer is adjustable by the operator)
seconds), the generator breaker will open. (If loss of voltage or abnormal frequency
occurs to the generator source during this time, the time delay will be reduced to one (1)
second delay and an open transition transfer to the normal power source will occur).
4. The utility main breaker is closed two (2) seconds after the generator breaker is verified
open.
5. The generator start signal will be removed fifteen (15) minutes after the generator breaker
opens. This time delay is to allow the generator to cool down.
D. DEAD BUS CONDITION OCCURS

4. Ten (10) seconds after generator source is lost, the generator breaker opens. Forty-five
(45) seconds after the utility is restored, the dead bus override closes the utility breaker.
5. If the system detects a dead bus condition for more than 45seconds, PLC will transfer to
the available source.

E. GENERATOR EMERGENCY STOP SWITCH
1. Switch is provided on the front panel, and there are terminals to connect an external fault
contact input. These inputs cause the system to enter the auto-fail mode, which trips
generator breakers and locks out the transfer system until reset. The fault contact is
arranged to operate normally closed, so an open circuit on this interlock triggers the auto-
fail condition.
2. Generator status pilot lights are provided on the front panel. These lights accept external
dry contacts from the generator status interface module to provide annunciation of
various generator faults at the switchboard.
PART 2 - SWITCHGEAR MANUAL OPERATION
2.1 UTILITY MAIN - GENERATOR
A. MANUAL OPERATION
1. Turn the Auto/Man switch to the “MAN” position.

2. If closing of the generator breaker is desired, start the generator turning the Gen
Stop/Start switch to the “START” position.
3. Open transition operation is permitted at all times when the Auto/Manual switch is in the
“MAN” position.
4. Abnormal voltage or frequency conditions as detected by the respective relays will not
result in the respective Main breaker opening.
5. When the Generator Source Available light illuminates, press the Utility Main breaker
(52- U) open button “ At the Breaker”. After verifying that the utility main breaker (52-
U) has opened, press the Generator close button to close the GEN breaker (52-G) “ At the
Breaker”.
6. Reverse the procedure to restore power to the Utility Main.
7. The generator start signal will be removed after the generator stop/start switch is returned
to the “STOP” position.
8. Return the Auto/Man switch to the “AUTO” position to resume normal operation.
B. MANUAL GENERATOR EXERCISE
1. Turn the Auto/Man switch to the “MAN” position.

2. Turn the Generator Stop/Start to the “START” position.
3. The generator start relay signals the generator to start.
4. The generator start signal will be removed after the generator stop/start switch is returned
to the “STOP” position.
5. Return the Auto/Man switch to the “AUTO” position to resume normal operation.
C. AUTOMATIC GENERATOR EXERCISE- Adjustable
1. The PLC program is equipped with an automatic generator exercise routine.

2. The default program setting allows the routine to run once a week on Sunday at 1:00PM.
3. When the PLC internal date and time match the programmed setting, the generator start
relay will signal the generator to start.
4. The generator start relay will remain de-energized for a thirty (30) minute exercise period.

5. Generator exercise parameters can be adjusted on the System Settings screen.
D. GENERATOR FAILURE
1. The PLC program monitors the Generator breaker (52-G) status. If the generator should
fail, the generator breaker (52-G) will open after a three (10) second source loss delay.
2. If the generator breaker (52-G) opens three times within a 15 minute interval, a generator
failure is assumed and the generator breaker (52-G) is then locked out.
3. The “AUTO FAIL” pilot light will illuminate to indicate a system problem.
4. If the utility source returns, the utility MAIN breaker (52-U) will close after a one (1)
second delay. (Utility source stabilization delay has been overridden.)
5. The fault indication can be reset by moving the Auto/Manual switch to the “MAN”
position and then back to “AUTO”. If the utility source returns, the Auto-Fail condition
will be reset and the system will transfer back to the utility”.
E. ADDITIONAL INTERLOCKS AND STATUS RELAYS
1. There are several additional relay outputs from the PLC.
a. System on Generator relay (closes when generator breaker is closed, wired to

terminals for customer use).
b. System on Utility relay (closes when utility breaker is closed, wired to terminals
for customer use).
c. HVAC reheat lockout (closes when generator breaker is closed, wired to terminals
for customer use).
d. Feeder load shed (closes to shunt trip a selected feeder when the generator load
exceeds a preset threshold, normally factory wired to the selected feeder shunt trip
coil).
e. Load bank breaker open (closes to shunt trip the load bank breaker when the
system requires the generator to support the bus, normally factory wired to the load
bank breaker shunt trip coil).
F. TRIPPED UTILITY CIRCUIT BREAKER
1. The utility circuit breaker is tripped* and the bell alarm contact is closed (SDE).
2. The generator start relay de-energizes signaling the generator to start.
3. Generator breaker (52-G) closes ten (10) seconds after the proper voltage and frequency
is detected by 47/27/59/81-2 Voltage/Frequency relays.
4. The generator is providing source to the load.
5. If the generator breaker trips* and the bell alarm contact is closed (SDE) no further
transfers will take place. A dead bus condition will exist.
6. The system will not automatically re-transfer to the utility source.

G. MANUAL INITIATED RETRANSFER TO UTILITY SOURCE AFTER A BREAKER TRIP

– UTILITY SOURCE AVAILABLE AND STABLE.
1. After a circuit breaker trips, make a thorough inspection of the entire system, and
verify that no damage to conductors or insulation has occurred. High mechanical
and thermal stresses developed by short-circuit currents may damage conductors
and insulation. Check the overcurrent-protection device that interrupted for
possible arcing damage.
2. Press the red reset button on the utility circuit breaker. Press the reset breaker on the
generator breaker if generator breaker also tripped.
3. Turn the Auto – Manual switch to the MANUAL position and then back to the AUTO
position.
4. After the voltage has been stable for ten (10) seconds, the generator breaker will open. (If
loss of voltage or abnormal frequency occurs to the generator source during this time, the
time delay will be reduced to one (1) second delay and an open transition transfer to the
normal power source will occur).
5. The utility main breaker is closed two (2) seconds after the generator breaker is verified
open.
H. TRIPPED GENERATOR CIRCUIT BREAKER AFTER LOSS OF UTILITY - TRANSFER

TO GENERATOR
1. The generator circuit breaker is tripped* and the bell alarm contact is closed (SDE).
3. After the utility source returns and the voltage has been stable for ten (10) seconds, the
utility breaker will close.
4. The utility source is providing source to the load.
5. If the utility breaker trips* and the bell alarm contact is closed (SDE) no further transfers
will take place. A dead bus condition will exist.
6. Until the the generator breaker is reset and the PLC is reset, the system will not
automatically transfer to generator on loss of utility.
I. RESET THE GENERATOR BREAKER AFTER A FAULT TRIP
1. After a circuit breaker trips, make a thorough inspection of the entire system, and
verify that no damage to conductors or insulation has occurred. High mechanical
and thermal stresses developed by short-circuit currents may damage conductors
and insulation. Check the overcurrent-protection device that interrupted for
possible arcing damage.
2. Press the red reset button on the generator circuit breaker. Press the reset breaker on the
utility breaker if utility breaker also tripped.
3. Turn the Auto – Manual switch to the MANUAL position and then back to the AUTO
position.
4. The switchboard will now transfer to the generator upon loss of utility.

J. INTERLOCKING OPERATION NOTES
1. When the Auto/Manual switch is in the "MANUAL" position, breaker control buttons are
operable and protective interlocks including non-paralleling, non-reclosure onto a fault,
and voltage protection remain intact. Breakers will not close automatically. Auto/Manual
switch should be left in "MANUAL" position when switchgear is to be serviced or
automatic operation is not desired.
2. In the event of PLC failure, electrical interlocking outside the PLC program utilizes
breaker auxiliary contacts to logically prevent all breakers from being closed at the same
time. (forces open transition transfers).
3. Open/Close pushbuttons on the circuit breaker should not be used while in “AUTO”
mode. Doing so will result in an AUTO-FAIL.

PART 3 - Failures scenarios
Re-
Test Action Required /
Description of Test Expected Response sponse
No. Time Stamps
OK
1 Transfer to Generator Three seconds after the utility source stabiliza-
utility Basler VDS is tion - 2:10
Perform an open tran-
opened the utility circuit
sition transfer to gener- utility source loss -
breaker will open. The
ator by opening the util- 0:03
generator start relay will
ity Basler PT voltage
then energize. 10 sec- gen source stabiliza-
disconnect switch
onds after the generator tion - 0:10
(VDS). After the gen-
Basler PT VDS is closed gen source loss - 0:10
erator start relay ener-
the generator circuit
gizes close the genera- transfer time - 0:02
breaker will close.
tor Basler PT VDS.
gen cooldown - 1:00
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260001-1

Re-
No. Time Stamps
OK
2 Retransfer to Utility Condition 1 met: Normal
Voltage is detected by
device 47/27-1 Voltage
sition transfer from
relay pn the Utility side.
generator to utility by
closing the utility Basler Condition 2 met: UPS is
PT voltage disconnect in normal mode. If UPS
switch (VDS). After the is in BYPASS the re-
generator start relay transfer to utility is not
de-energizes open the ALLOW.
generator Basler PT
The source stabilization
VDS.
timer in the PLC will
begin timing after the util-
ity Basler VDS is closed.
After the source
stabilization timer times
out the generator circuit
breaker will open and
after a delay the utility
circuit breaker will close.
The generator will begin
a cooldown cycle. After
the cooldown timer times
out the generator start
relay will de-energize.

Re-
No. Time Stamps
OK
3 Generator fail (three Three seconds after the Auto fail will be indi-
strikes) utility Basler VDS is cated and will auto-
opened the utility circuit matically reset upon
breaker will open. The return to utility.
sition transfer to gener-
ator by opening the util-
then energize. 10 sec-
ity Basler PT VDS.
onds after the generator
After the generator Basler PT VDS is closed
start relay energizes the generator circuit
close the generator breaker will close. 10
Basler PT VDS. seconds the after the
After the generator cir- Basler PT VDS is opened
cuit breaker closes the generator circuit
open the generator breaker will open. (strike
Basler PT VDS. 1). 10 seconds after the
generator Basler PT VDS
After the generator cir- is reclosed the generator
cuit breaker opens circuit breaker will close.
(strike 1) reclose the 10 seconds the after the
generator Basler PT Basler PT VDS is opened
VDS. the generator circuit
After the generator cir- breaker will open. (strike
cuit breaker closes 2). 10 seconds after the
open the generator generator Basler PT VDS
Basler PT VDS. is closed the generator
After the generator cir- 10 seconds the after the
cuit breaker opens Basler PT VDS is opened
(strike 2) reclose the the generator circuit
generator Basler PT breaker will open. (strike
VDS. 3). The generator start
After the generator cir- relay will de-energize. 1
cuit breaker closes second after the Basler
open the generator utility source VDS is
Basler PT VDS. closed the utility circuit
breaker will close.
After a delay the
generator circuit
breaker opens (strike
3). Close the utility
Basler VDS to reclose
the utility circuit
breaker.

Re-
No. Time Stamps
OK
4 Generator fail (three Three seconds after the Utility source stabiliza-
strikes utility returns) utility Basler VDS is tion test setting at
opened the utility circuit 2:10.
[Set the utility source
stabilization delay to 27 Auto fail will be indi-
minutes] cated and will auto-
matically reset upon
Perform an open tran- onds after the generator
return to utility.
sition transfer to gener- Basler PT VDS is closed
ator by opening the util- the generator circuit
ity Basler PT VDS. breaker will close. 10
After the generator seconds the after the
start relay energizes Basler PT VDS is opened
close the generator the generator circuit
Basler PT VDS. breaker will open. (strike
1). 10 seconds after the
After the generator cir- generator Basler PT VDS
cuit breaker closes is reclosed the generator
open the generator circuit breaker will close.
Basler PT VDS. 10 seconds the after the
After the generator cir- Basler PT VDS is opened
cuit breaker opens the generator circuit
(strike 1) reclose the breaker will open. (strike
generator Basler PT 2). 10 seconds after the
VDS. Reclose the util- generator Basler PT VDS
ity Basler PT VDS is closed the generator
After the generator cir- 10 seconds the after the
cuit breaker closes Basler PT VDS is opened
open the generator the generator circuit
Basler PT VDS. breaker will open. (strike
After the generator cir- 2). The generator start
cuit breaker opens relay will de-energize. 1
(strike 2) reclose the second after the third
generator Basler PT strike the utility circuit
VDS. breaker will close.
After the generator cir-
cuit breaker closes
open the generator
Basler PT VDS.
After a delay the gener-
ator circuit breaker
opens (strike 3).

Re-
No. Time Stamps
OK
5a Dead bus #1 - after 1 second after the Utility source stabiliza-
simulated mainte- switchboard is place in tion time delay is by-
nance outage the auto position the util- passed.
ity circuit breaker will
Place the switchboard
close.
in manual and ensure
both circuit breakers
are open. Open the
utility Basler VDS. Re-
close the utility Basler
VDS. Place the switch-
board in auto to auto-
matically close the util-
ity circuit breaker.
5b Dead bus #2 - genera- A dead bus condition oc-
tor fail to start curs. 45 seconds after
the utility is restored the
dead bus override closes
in auto and fail utility.
the utility breaker.
Leave the generator
Basler VDS open to
simulate generator fail-
ure. Return utility any
time after utility breaker
opens.
5c Dead bus #3 - genera- A dead bus condition oc-
tor fail to run curs. 10 seconds after
generator source is lost,
the generator breaker
in auto and fail utility.
opens. 45 seconds after
Close the generator
the utility is restored the
Basler VDS after gen-
dead bus override closes
erator start signal turns
the utility breaker.
on. After the generator
breaker closes, open
the generator Basler
VDS to simulate com-
plete generator failure
while running. Leave
the generator VDS
turned off. Return utility
at any time.

Re-
No. Time Stamps
OK
6 Utility breaker fault After the utility circuit After the utility cir-
breaker is faulted the cuit breaker is reset
Trip the utility circuit
generator start relay will (press the red on the
breaker. After the gen-
energize. 10 seconds af- face of the circuit
ter the generator Basler breaker), Reset the
gizes close the genera-
PT VDS is closed the PLC auto fail (turn
tor Basler PT VDS.
generator circuit breaker the system switch
will close. from AUTO to
MANUAL and back to
AUTO). An open
transition transfer to
utility will take place.
NOTE: the generator
three-strike will be
disabled. The gener-
ator will continually
attempt to close if
utility is available
and the utility
breaker is faulted.
7 Generator breaker Three seconds after the After the generator
fault utility Basler VDS is circuit breaker is re-
opened the utility circuit set (press the red on
breaker will open. The the face of the circuit
generator start relay will breaker), Reset the
ator by opening the util-
then energize. 10 sec- PLC auto fail (turn
ity Basler PT voltage
onds after the generator the system switch
disconnect switch
Basler PT VDS is closed from AUTO to
(VDS). After the gen-
the generator circuit MANUAL and back to
breaker will close. AUTO).
tor Basler PT VDS. The generator will enter
cooldown and shutdown
On the closed genera-
after the cool down time
tor circuit breaker con-
expires.
nect a full function test
kit and trip the genera- 1 second after the utility
tor circuit breaker. Basler VDS closes the
utility circuit breaker will
After the utility Basler
close.
VDS is closed the utility
breaker closes. Reset the generator cir-
cuit breaker (press the
red on the face of the cir-
cuit breaker).

Re-
No. Time Stamps
OK
8 Utility circuit breaker Three seconds after the
fails to open utility Basler VDS is
Remove a the MX wire
breaker does not open.
from the utility circuit
The auto fail light is on.
breaker. Open the util-
The generator start relay
ity Basler VDS.
does not energize.
Reclose the utility Basler
VDS. Reset the auto fail
Reconnect the utility cir-
cuit breaker MX wire.
9 Generator circuit Three seconds after the
breaker fails to utility Basler VDS is
close opened the utility circuit
Remove a the XF wire
from the generator cir-
cuit breaker. Open the
utility Basler VDS.
Basler PT VDS is closed
breaker does not close.
The generator start relay
de-energizes.
1 second after the utility
Basler VDS is closed the
utility circuit breaker will
close.
Reconnect the generator
circuit breaker XF wire.
Reset the auto fail.

Re-
No. Time Stamps
OK
10 Generator circuit Three seconds after the
breaker fails to open utility Basler VDS is
[set the source stabili-
zation delay to 1 mi-
nute]
Remove a the MX wire onds after the generator
from the generator cir- Basler PT VDS is closed
cuit breaker. the generator circuit
Perform an open tran- breaker will close.
sition transfer to gener- The generator circuit
ator by opening the util- breaker will stay closed
ity Basler PT voltage the generator start relay
disconnect switch will stay energized. The
(VDS). After the gen- auto fail light is on.
Reconnect the generator
circuit breaker MX wire.
tor Basler PT VDS.
Reset the auto fail.
Reclose the utility
Basler VDS. After the
source stabilization
timer times out the
generator circuit
breaker stays closed.

Re-
No. Time Stamps
OK
11 Utility circuit breaker Three seconds after the NOTE: the generator
fails to close utility Basler VDS is three-strike will be
opened the utility circuit disabled. The gener-
[set the source stabili-
breaker will open. The ator will continually
zation delay to 1 mi-
generator start relay will attempt to close if
nute]
then energize. 10 sec- utility is available
Remove a the XF wire onds after the generator and the utility
from the utility circuit Basler PT VDS is closed breaker is faulted.
breaker. the generator circuit
Perform an open tran- breaker will close.
sition transfer to gener- The source stabilization
ator by opening the util- timer in the PLC will
ity Basler PT voltage begin timing after the util-
disconnect switch ity Basler VDS is closed.
(VDS). After the gen- After the source stabiliza-
erator start relay ener- tion timer times out the
gizes close the genera- generator circuit breaker
tor Basler PT VDS. will open and after a de-
Reclose the utility lay the utility circuit
Basler VDS. After the breaker will not close.
source stabilization The generator circuit
timer times out the breaker will reclose. The
generator circuit generator start relay will
breaker opens and the remain energized.
utility circuit breaker Reconnect the utility cir-
can not close. cuit breaker XF wire. Re-
set the auto fail.

Re-
No. Time Stamps
OK
12 Transfer to Generator Three seconds after the utility source stabiliza-
- Utility Flicker (Com- utility Basler VDS is tion - 2:10
mit to Generator test) opened the utility circuit
utility source loss -
Perform an open tran- 0:03
then energize. Once the gen source stabiliza-
ator by opening the
generator start relay en- tion - 0:10
utility Basler PT
ergizes, the utility Basler gen source loss - 0:10
voltage disconnect
VDS is closed. 10 sec-
switch (VDS). After the transfer time - 0:02
utility circuit breaker
Basler PT VDS is closed gen cooldown - 1:00
opens reclose the
utility Basler PT
breaker will close.
voltage disconnect
switch (VDS) After expiration of the
immediately. After the Utility source stabilization
generator start relay timer the generator
energizes close the breaker will open and the
generator Basler PT utility breaker will re-
VDS. close.
13a Manual operation of Both utility and generator To clear the Auto
the utility breaker in main breakers are locked Fail condition, turn
Auto Mode - Utility out mechanically and an the PLC mode switch
Available Auto Fail is indicated.No from Auto then to
further switching occurs. Manual. Place the
Mechanically open the
(This means both switch back to Auto.
Utility Breaker using
breaker are open - DEAD One (1) second later
the push button on the
BUS). the utility breaker au-
breaker with utility
tomatically closes
available.
(as long as utility is
available).
13b Manual operation of Both utility and generator To clear the Auto Fail
the utility breaker in main breakers are locked condition, turn the
Auto Mode - Utility out electro-mechanically PLC mode switch
Loss and an Auto Fail is indi- from Auto then to
cated.No further switch- Manual. Turn the
Mechanically open the
ing occurs. This is a dead switch back to Auto.
Utility Breaker using
bus condition. Without utility availa-
the push button on the
ble, the generator
breaker. Open the util-
start signal immedi-
ity Basler VDS.
ately comes on. Ten
seconds later the
generator breaker
automatically closes.

Re-
No. Time Stamps
OK
13c Manual operation of Both utility and generator To clear the Auto Fail
the generator breaker main breakers are locked condition, turn the
in Auto Mode - Utility out electro-mechanically PLC mode switch
Loss and an Auto Fail is indi- from Auto then to
cated.The generator start Manual. Turn the
Transfer the switch-
signal is removed. No switch back to Auto.
board to generator by
further switching occurs.
simulating utility loss. - If utility source is
This is a dead bus condi-
The switchboard is on not available, the
tion.
generator. Mechani- generator will start
cally open the Genera- and the switchboard
tor Breaker using the will close the genera-
push button on the tor breaker after 1
breaker with utility not second.
available. Utility is re-
- If the utility source
stored after the breaker
is available, the
has been opened.
switchboard will
transfer to utility af-
ter 1 second.
14 Manual operation of No switching occurs and
the utility breaker the switchboard remains
on utility.
in Manual with the util-
ity source available.
Open the Utility Basler
VDS to simulate a loss
if utility.
15 Manual transfer to Generator starts and the
generator and back to operator is able to manu-
utility ally open and close the
breakers. Electrical Inter-
locks are still in place. No
in Manual with the util-
automatic actions occur
ity source available.
regardless of source
Start the generator us-
availability.
ing the generator run
switch. Mechanically
open the utility breaker
and then close the gen-
erator breaker.

Re-
No. Time Stamps
OK
16a Racking out of gener- Switchboard indicates an Auto Fail requires re-
ator breaker while in Auto Fail. Utility breaker setting via toggle of
Auto remains closed. Switch- the PLC Mode switch
board can be placed into (Auto - Manual -
Switchboard is in Auto,
Manual or Auto with no Auto). Source of Au-
utility source is availa-
change in status. tofail condition must
ble, and the utility
be cleared prior to
breaker is closed. The
resetting.
operator racks out the
generator breaker.
16b Racking out of utility Switchboard indicates an Auto Fail requires re-
breaker while in Auto Auto Fail. Generator setting via toggle of
breaker remains closed. the PLC Mode switch
Switchboard can be (Auto - Manual -
generator source is
placed into Manual or Auto). Source of Au-
available, and the gen-
Auto with no change in tofail condition must
erator breaker is
status. be cleared prior to
closed. The operator
resetting.
racks out the utility
breaker.
17a Emergency Generator Switchboard indicates an Auto Fail requires re-
Stop - Utility breaker Auto Fail. Utility breaker setting via toggle of
closed remains closed. No the PLC Mode switch
transfer to generator will (Auto - Manual -
occur if utility source is Auto). Source of Au-
utility source is availa-
failed. tofail condition must
ble, and the utility
be cleared prior to
breaker is closed. The
resetting.
operator hits the gener-
ator stop button.
17b Emergency Generator Generator breaker opens Auto Fail requires re-
Stop - Generator and generator start signal setting via toggle of
breaker closed turns off. the PLC Mode switch
(Auto - Manual -
Transfer the switch- A dead bus condition will
Auto). Source of Au-
board to generator by occur. If utility becomes
tofail condition must
simulating utility loss available, the board will
be cleared prior to
while in Auto. The transfer back to utility 45
resetting.
switchboard transfers seconds after utility re-
to generator. Return turns.
utility at any time after
the board transfers to
generator. The opera-
tor hits the generator
stop button.

Re-
No. Time Stamps
OK
18a Generator Crank Fail PLC attempts to start the To clear the Auto
- No Utility Power generator. After 5 Fail condition, turn
Available minutes, a Crank Fail is the PLC mode
indicated and "Generator switch from Auto
Failed to Start" is shown then to Manual. Turn
on the screen. Start sig- the switch back to
simulating utility loss
nal is removed. Switch- Auto. If utility is not
while in Auto. The
board indicates an Auto available, the
switchboard transfers
Fail. generator will
to generator. Leave
attempt to re- start.
the utility Basler VDS
open. Leave the
generator Basler
VDS open.
18b Generator Crank Fail PLC attempts to start the Auto fail condition is
- Utility Power Re- generator. After 5 automatically reset
turns minutes, a Crank Fail is when the board
indicated and "Generator transfers back to util-
Failed to Start" is shown ity.
on the screen. Switch-
simulating utility loss
board indicates an Auto
while in Auto. The
Fail. When utility returns,
switchboard transfers
the utility breaker closes
to generator.Leave the
after 1 second.
generator Basler VDS
open.Close the Utility
Basler VDS any time
after a Crank Fail is in-
dicated.
19 Generator Exerciser The PLC will start the The operator can
generator and run the stop the exercise
With the switchboard in
generator for the exer- with operator secu-
Auto and utility power
cise duration. Once the rity priveleges via a
available, enable the
exercise duration ex- virtual button on the
exercise timer and set
pires, the generator will HMI.
the exercise time to the
shutdown without a
current time plus one
cooldown.
minute.

Re-
No. Time Stamps
OK
20a Load Shed (Only if 27 Timer TBR1 will begins
relay is installed) timing. After TDBR1
times out the Chiller cir-
With the load bus ener-
cuit breaker, the CHWP
gized, close the Chiller
circuit breaker and the
circuit breaker, the
two CRAC circuit break-
CHWP circuit breaker
ers will open.
and the two CRAC cir-
cuit breakers. Install a
jumper between
BPTB:1 and BPTB:2 to
simulate a contact clo-
sure from the SCSB-1
control panel.
20b Load Shed (Only if 27 Timer TBR2 will begins
relay is installed) timing. After TDBR1
times out the Chiller cir-
cuit breaker, the CHWP
circuit breaker and the
two CRAC circuit break-
ers will open.
and the two CRAC cir-
cuit breakers. Install a
jumper between
BPBP:3 and BPBP:4 to
simulate an Basler 27
relay undervoltage trip
from the oposite
switchgear.
20c Load Shed (Only if 27 Timer TBR2 will begins Verify that the power
relay is installed) timing. After TDBR1 light on Basler 27 re-
times out the Chiller cir- lay is energized. Re-
cuit breaker, the CHWP set the Trip indica-
circuit breaker and the tion if it is illumi-
two CRAC circuit break- nated.
ers will open.
and the two CRAC cir- Close BP3 2 pole
cuit breakers. Install a fused disconnect.
jumper between
BPTB:3 and BPTS:3.
Install a second jumper
between BPTB:4 and
BPTS:4. De-energize
the load bus to verify
operation of the Basler
27 relay.

END OF SECTION 262413.1

SECTION 263213.2 – ENGINE HOUSE GENERATORS (3-PHASE, 4-WIRE)
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Specifications:

9. 262413 Switchboards (3Phase, 4Wire, Wye System).
C. Items in RED are options/requirements for certain jurisdictions. It is the responsibility of the
design team to confirm specific requirements prior to generator purchase.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Generator Ratings:
1. 700KW, 480/277V, 3-Phase, Standby. (Considering all three QRO project sites are
located at an altitude around 6,000 feet)
B. This Section includes packaged engine-generator sets for standby power supply with the
following features:
1. Diesel engine.
2. Unit-mounted cooling system.
3. Unit-mounted control and monitoring.
4. Outdoor weather and sound attenuated enclosure.
5. Generator disconnect circuit breakers.
6. Base mounted fuel storage tank.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Standby Rating: Power output rating equal to the power the generator set delivers continuously
under normally varying load factors for the duration of a power outage.

B. Prime Rating: Power output available with varying load for an unlimited time in accordance
with ISO 8528. 10% overload power in accordance with ISO 3064/1.
C. Operational Bandwidth: The total variation from the lowest to highest value of a parameter over
the range of conditions indicated, expressed as a percentage of the nominal value of the
parameter.
D. Power Output Rating: Gross electrical power output of diesel engine generator set minus total
power supplied to cooling fans, pumps and other accessories.
E. Steady State Voltage Modulation: The uniform cyclical variation of voltage within the
operational bandwidth expressed in Hertz.
for owner approval.
D. Product Data: For each type of packaged engine generator indicated. Include rated capacities,
operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. In addition, include the
following:
1. Thermal damage curve for generator.

2. Time-current characteristic curves for generator protective device.
E. Engine Exhaust Emission Documentation (SFO & IAD Clusters): Supplier shall provide all
documentation necessary to secure operating permits from the Local Air Quality Management
District for the engines furnished for the project. Documentation shall be furnished within 7
calendar days of notice of award of the order. Documentation to be submitted to Local Air
Quality Management District by Owner. To comply with local codes NOM-ECOL-043
F. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
connection.
1. Dimensioned outline plan and elevation drawings of engine-generator set and other
components specified.
requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic restraints and for designing
vibration isolation bases.
3. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.
Detail fabrication, including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported
equipment. Include base weights.


5. Structural/Seismic Design Calculations: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional

engineer. Provide appropriate calculations to substantiate the tank and enclosure package
will withstand forces consistent with seismic or wind or snow event degfined in IBC
standards.
6. Fuel tank capacity calculations: Provide detailed calculations that the quantity of fuel
available in the proposed belly tank meets requirements of 24 hours of runtime at full
load.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS (SFO and QRO Cluster only)
A. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that fuel tank, engine-
generator set, batteries, battery racks, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces
according to importance factor of 1.0 and defined in Structural Drawings and Specifications.
Include the following:
any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified.
4. Provide project-specific anchor-bolt selection calculations according to latest IBC
standards that are stamped and certified by registered Professional Engineer in the state
project resides in.
5. According to the seismic study provided by AECOM in QRO project areas, the seismic
zone for the three sites is SEISMIC ZONE B, and the IMPORTANCE FACTOR is 1.5
for the equipment anchor points
B. Manufacturer Certificates: For each product, from manufacturer.
C. Source quality-control test reports.
1. Certified summary of prototype-unit test report.

2. Certified Test Reports: For components and accessories that are equivalent, but not
identical, to those tested on prototype unit.
3. Certified Summary of Performance Tests: Certify compliance with specified requirement
to meet performance criteria for sensitive loads.
4. Report of factory test on units to be shipped for this Project, showing evidence of
compliance with specified requirements.
5. Report of sound generation.
6. Report of exhaust emissions showing compliance with applicable regulations.
7. Certified Torsional Vibration Compatibility: Comply with NFPA 110.
D. Factory Acceptance Test Reports: Include in the submittal.

E. Product Test Reports: Indicate test results compared with specified performance requirements,
and provide justification and resolution of differences if values do not agree.
F. Field quality-control reports and startup reports: Startup reports to record approved firmware
version installed.
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit installation, operating and maintenance instructions.
1. List of tools and replacement items recommended to be stored at Project for ready access.
Include part and drawing numbers, current unit prices, and source of supply.
A. Installer Qualifications: Installation by contractor who is trained and approved for installation of
units required for this Project.
B. Manufacturer & Distributor Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer with an authorized

distributor: maintain, within 150 miles (321 km) of Project site, a service center capable of
providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance repairs.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain packaged generator sets and auxiliary components through one
source from a single supplier.
D. Comply with ASME B15.1.
F. Comply with NFPA 70.
G. Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 1 emergency power supply system.
I. Comply with NOM 081
J. Engine Exhaust Emissions: Comply with applicable state and local government requirements
defined in this specification or established by the design team. Engine shall comply with EPA
Requirements at time of order.
K. Noise Emission: Comply with applicable state and local government requirements defined in
this specification or established by the design team for maximum noise level at adjacent
property boundaries due to sound emitted by generator set including; engine, engine exhaust,
engine cooling-air intake and discharge, and other components of installation. QRO acoustic
study indicates that the system must be 75dBA at 23 feet (7 meters) Local code: NOM 081

A. Interruption of Existing Electrical Service: Do not interrupt electrical service to facilities

occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only
after arranging to provide temporary electrical service according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Owner no fewer than fourteen days in advance of proposed interruption of

electrical service.
2. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without Owner's written permission.
B. Environmental Conditions: Engine-generator system shall withstand the following

environmental conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of
performance capability:
1. Ambient Temperature: Published ASHRAE 20-year extreme dry bulb temperature range
plus estimated peak heat gain from generator heat ingestion.
2. Relative Humidity: 0 to 95 percent.
3. Altitude: Sea level to 6,000 feet (1,900 meters).
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases for package engine generators. Drilled anchors
should be used. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division
03.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. As specified in
MPA. PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

following:
1. Caterpillar; Engine Div.

2. MTU Onsite Energy.
3. Cummins.
2.2 ENGINE-GENERATOR SET
A. Factory-assembled and -tested, engine-generator set.

B. Mounting Frame: Maintain alignment of mounted components without depending on concrete

foundation; and have lifting attachments.
1. Rigging Diagram: Inscribed on metal plate permanently attached to mounting frame to

indicate location and lifting capacity of each lifting attachment and generator-set center
of gravity.
C. Capacities and Characteristics:
1. Power Output Ratings: Nominal ratings as indicated.

2. Output Connections: Three-phase, four wire.
3. Nameplates: For each major system component to identify manufacturer's name and
address, and model and serial number of component.
D. Generator-Set Performance:
1. Generator set shall be rated for 100% power output of its standby rating with an 80%
permissible average power output over 24hr of operation.
2. Steady-State Voltage Operational Bandwidth: 3 percent of rated output voltage from no
load to full load.
3. Transient Voltage Performance: Not more than 20 percent variation for 50 percent step-
load increase or decrease. Voltage shall recover and remain within the steady-state
operating band within three seconds.
4. Steady-State Frequency Operational Bandwidth: 0.5 percent of rated frequency from no
load to full load.
5. Steady-State Frequency Stability: When system is operating at any constant load within
the rated load, there shall be no random speed variations outside the steady-state
operational band and no hunting or surging of speed.
6. Transient Frequency Performance: Less than 5 percent variation for 50 percent step-load
increase or decrease. Frequency shall recover and remain within the steady-state
operating band within five seconds.
7. Output Waveform: At no load, harmonic content measured line to line or line to neutral
shall not exceed 5 percent total and 3 percent for single harmonics. Telephone influence
factor, determined according to NEMA MG 1, shall not exceed 50 percent.
8. Sustained Short-Circuit Current: For a 3-phase, bolted short circuit at system output
terminals, system shall supply a minimum of 250 percent of rated full-load current for not
less than 10 seconds and then clear the fault automatically, without damage to generator
system components.
9. Start Time: Comply with NFPA 110, Type 10, system requirements.
2.3 ENGINE
A. EPA Emissions Requirement: Tier 2 or standard in effect at time of permit application.
B. Fuel: Fuel oil, Grade DF-2.
C. Rated Engine Speed: 1800 rpm.
D. Lubrication System: The following items are mounted on engine or skid:

1. Provide a full flow, filtration lubrication system with bypass to allow lubrication to
continue during high filter restriction. An alarm will be generated when in bypass.
2. Filter and Strainer: Rated to remove 90 percent of particles 5 micrometers and smaller
while passing full flow.
3. Thermostatic Control Valve: Control flow in system to maintain optimum oil
temperature. Unit shall be capable of full flow and is designed to be fail-safe.
4. Crankcase Drain: Arranged for complete gravity drainage to an easily removable
container with no disassembly and without use of pumps, siphons, special tools, or
appliances.
5. Crankcase emission control device as required by Local Air Pollution Control District.
E. Engine Fuel System:
1. Main Fuel Pump: Mounted on engine. Pump ensures adequate primary fuel flow under
starting and load conditions.
2. Relief-Bypass Valve: Automatically regulates pressure in fuel line and returns excess fuel
to source.
3. Fuel Filtering: Remove water and contaminants larger than 1 micron.
4. Primary Fuel Filter: Fuel water separators per manufacturer’s standard design.
5. Secondary Fuel Filter: Mounted on engine.
6. Fuel Cooler: Factory mounted air-cooled type.
7. Hand priming pump.
8. Fuel lines shall be Stratoflex or equivalent AQP elastomer tube, with polyester inner
braid and a single wire braid reinforcement, and blue AQP elastomer cover.
F. Coolant Jacket Heater: Electric-immersion type with integral circulating pump, factory installed
in coolant jacket system. Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 1 equipment for
heater capacity. Provide isolation valves to allow for servicing without draining cooling system.
G. Governor: Adjustable isochronous, with speed sensing.
H. Cooling System: Closed loop, liquid cooled, with radiator factory mounted on engine-generator-
set mounting frame and integral engine-driven coolant pump.
1. Coolant: Solution of 50 percent ethylene-glycol-based antifreeze and 50 percent water,

with anticorrosion additives as recommended by engine manufacturer.
2. Size of Radiator: Adequate to contain expansion of total system coolant from cold start to
110 percent load condition.
3. Expansion Tank: Constructed of welded steel plate and rated to withstand maximum
closed-loop coolant system pressure for engine used. Equip with gage glass and petcock.
4. Temperature Control: Self-contained, thermostatic-control valve modulates coolant flow
automatically to maintain optimum constant coolant temperature as recommended by
engine manufacturer.
5. Coolant Hose: Flexible assembly with inside surface of nonporous rubber and outer
covering of aging-, ultraviolet-, and abrasion-resistant fabric.
a. Rating: 50-psig maximum working pressure with coolant at 180 deg F, and non-
collapsible under vacuum.
b. End Fittings: Flanges or steel pipe nipples with clamps to suit piping and equip-
ment connections.

I. Muffler/Silencer: Critical type (incorporated into Diesel Particulate Filter when applicable)
sized as recommended by engine manufacturer and selected with exhaust piping system to not
exceed engine manufacturer's engine backpressure requirements.
1. Exhaust muffler performance shall match the overall sound performance specified in
enclosure section.
2. If vertically-oriented exhaust piping is used, a heavy duty hinged counter-weighted rain
cap at discharge point is to be provided.
J. Diesel Particulate Filter: (SFO Cluster Only)
1. Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) shall use active regeneration technology that utilizes a
porous sintered metal filter media that is both particulate filter and electrical heater.
2. Unit shall meet CARB Level 3+ to achieve a minimum 85% PM reduction.
3. A dual independent microprocessor-based system measures back pressure and applies
electrical current to heat the media and burn off accumulated soot. Controller shall
indicate abnormal operation and shall annunciate alarms to the generator controller.
4. Regeneration shall be automatic and shall keep the filter cartridges functioning at low
back pressure and peak efficiency.
5. DPF shall incorporate an integrated diesel oxidation catalyst to reduce the soluble organic
fraction, gaseous hydrocarbons and carbon monoxide.
6. The active regeneration system shall regenerate the DPF independently of the exhaust
temperature.
7. DPF shall incorporate a Hospital Grade Silencer with 35-42 dBA attenuation.
8. DPF shall be Rypos Series HDPF/C Flat Pack Module or equal.
9. Housing shall be constructed of carbon steel with high temperature zinc base primer and
painted to match generator housing.
10. To comply with the local code NOM-043-SEMARNAT-1993 and NOM-ECOL-043
K. Air-Intake Filter: Heavy-duty, engine-mounted air cleaner with replaceable dry-filter element
and "blocked filter" indicator.
L. Starting System: 24-V electric, with negative ground.
1. Components: Sized so they will not be damaged during a full engine-cranking cycle with
ambient temperature at maximum specified in Part 1 "Project Conditions" Article.
2. Cranking Motor: Heavy-duty unit that automatically engages and releases from engine
flywheel without binding.
3. Cranking Cycle: As required by NFPA 110 for system level specified.
4. Battery: Adequate capacity within ambient temperature range specified in Part 1 "Project
Conditions" Article to provide specified cranking cycle at least three times without
recharging.
5. Battery Cable: Size as recommended by engine manufacturer for cable length indicated.
Include required interconnecting conductors and connection accessories.
6. Battery Compartment: Factory fabricated of metal with acid-resistant finish and thermal
insulation. Thermostatically controlled heater shall be arranged to maintain battery above
10 deg C regardless of external ambient temperature within range specified in Part 1
"Project Conditions" Article. Include accessories required to support and fasten batteries
in place.

7. Battery-Charging Alternator: Factory mounted on engine with solid-state voltage

regulation and 35-A minimum continuous rating.
8. Battery Charger: Current-limiting, automatic-equalizing and float-charging type. Unit
shall comply with UL 1236 and include the following features:
a. Operation: Equalizing-charging rate of 20A shall be initiated automatically after

battery has lost charge until an adjustable equalizing voltage is achieved at battery
terminals. Unit shall then be automatically switched to a lower float-charging
mode and shall continue to operate in that mode until battery is discharged again.
b. Automatic Temperature Compensation: Adjust float and equalize voltages for
variations in ambient temperature from minus 40 deg C to plus 60 deg C to prevent
overcharging at high temperatures and undercharging at low temperatures.
c. Automatic Voltage Regulation: Maintain constant output voltage regardless of
input voltage variations up to plus or minus 10 percent.
d. Ammeter and Voltmeter: Flush mounted in door. Meters shall indicate charging
rates.
e. Safety Functions: Sense abnormally low battery voltage and close contacts
providing low battery voltage indication on control and monitoring panel. Sense
high battery voltage and loss of ac input or dc output of battery charger. Either
condition shall close contacts that provide a battery-charger malfunction indication
at system control and monitoring panel.
f. Enclosure and Mounting: NEMA 250, Type 1, wall-mounted cabinet.
2.4 FUEL OIL STORAGE
A. Comply with NFPA 30.
B. Base-Mounted Fuel Oil Tank: Factory installed and piped, complying with UL 142 protected
fuel oil tank. Features include the following:
1. Tank Capacity:
a. QRO, SFO, CMH and IAD Clusters: 1500 gallons, with usable capacity at least
85% of actual. (Minimum useable fuel capacity for Run Time of 24 hours at full
load).
b. PDX Cluster: 1500 gallons, with usable capacity at least 85% of actual, or
approved alternate useable capacity for minimum of 24 hours run time at full load.
2. Containment: Integrally bunded rupture basin with a capacity of 110 percent of nominal
capacity of fuel tank.
3. Leak Detector: Locate in rupture basin and connect to provide audible and visual alarm in
the event of day-tank leak.
4. Low-Level Alarm Sensor: Liquid-level device operates alarm contacts at 25 percent of
normal fuel level.
5. High-Level Alarm Sensor: Liquid-level device operates alarm and redundant fuel shutoff
contacts at midpoint between overflow level and 100 percent of normal fuel level.
6. Continuous Float Level Sensor: Liquid-level device provides analogue fuel monitoring of
belly tank. Readings shall be available via Modbus through Generator Controller.
a. Type - Continuous Float Level Sensor

b. Output – 4-20mA, 1-5VDC, or Resistive type permitted to be compatible with

generator input. Generator controller to be calibrated by equipment provider to
ensure accurate readings via generator controller.
c. Resolution – ¼” or better
d. Stem Material – 316 Stainless Steel
e. UL E150881
f. UL Approval Location: Hazardous Location; Class 1, Groups A, B, C, D;
Class II, Groups E, F, G; Class III
g. Madison C4651 or Amazon Approved Equivalent
h. When used in conjunction with an Amazon approved fuel level totalizer and
alarm output module, the continuous float level sensor can provide the
functions of the low-level and high-level alarm sensors to output to Gen
controller and IO module. Red Lion PAXD0010 with PAXCDS20 and
PAXCDL10 optional add- on cards or Amazon approved equivalent.
7. Tank level indicator gauge: Manual tank level indicator to be provided adjacent to the fill
port.
8. Piping Connections: Factory-installed fuel supply and return lines from tank to engine;
local fuel fill, vent line, overflow line; and tank drain line with shutoff valve.
a. Vandal resistant manual fill with 7-1/2 gallon spill containment with overfill
prevention valve at 90%.
b. Primary and emergency tank vent extended to at least 12’ above grade.
c. Primary and emergency containment vent extended to at least 12’ above grade.
d. Two (2) 2” spare NPT couplings in tank.
e. Two (2) 2” spare NPT couplings in containment.
f. Drain ports for the tank and containment tank.
C. BELLY TANK DETAIL

1. General Requirements
a. The generator supplier shall supply and install a rectangular, internally bunded
belly tank beneath each generator that shall be able to support the running of the
Generator at full load for 24 hours as a minimum - supplier to provide calculations
to confirm final tank capacity with Amazon Design Engineering (typical 20.000
liters).
b. Refer to generator data in mechanical design drawings the criteria for the project.
The vendor must supply the belly tank as well as the associated delivery systems
from the tank to the engine. The design life of the tank and support frame shall be
20 years without major maintenance. Local maintenance painting shall be possible
in-situ. The tank shall be designed and constructed in such a way to allow
inspection of all surfaces for corrosion during its service life. It shall be possible to
maintain the tank without disconnecting electrical cables or removing the
generator.
2. Tank Design Requirements
Connection Notes
Engine Supply Via foot valve, 50mm (2”) from tank base. Sized by supplier to meet engine
requirements.

Engine Return Return to be separated from supply location to avoid fuel hot-spots

Connection Notes
Polisher Supply Via foot valve at lowest point of the tank. Installation of polishing skid con-
nection points and internal sparge pipes of sufficient bore and layout to
allow
for even polishing of the entire contents of the tank.
Polisher Return Return to opposite side from polisher supply
Fill Point 40mmØ (1 ½”) fill c/w motorised fill valve controlled by fuel fill panel. Tank
fill via shared overfill prevention valve.
Manual Fill Point 50mmØ (2”) via shared overfill prevention valve.
Tank Drain Spare 80mmØ (3”) connection to be provided at each end of the tank to allow
the tank to be pumped out.
Bund Drain 25mmØ (1”) drain port from the tank bund section.
Access Manway 600mmØ (24”) manway access to bund and tank c/w full nitrile/cork gasket
seal suitable for a diesel application (min. 3mm (0.1”) thick) Top access on
tank only above full level
Level Sensor Screwed connection for a multi-level sensor.
Tank Vent Vent to be provided to meet tank design requirements and provided with a
desiccant breather to avoid water vapour entering the tank.
Spare Connections 2 no. 50mmØ (2”) spare connections.
Heater Connections 2 no. DN 150 (6”) flanged connections, blanked on tank top
3. Marking: Each tank shall have a plate bearing the following information:
a. the number and date of this design standard (i.e., BS 799-5:2010);
b. type of tank (e.g., Type J)
c. capacity (in litres);
d. date of manufacture.
e. manufacturer's name or trademark.
f. manufacturer's reference number.
g. design pressure.
h. test pressure and date of testing.
4. Bracing
a. Tank design shall use the tank structure to provide adequate support to the internal
tank. No internal bracing within the tank volume shall be permitted.
b. There shall be no internal obstructions which would impede safe confined space
entry.
c. There shall be a minimum, clear internal height of 900mm (36”). Internal volume
of the tank to be unobstructed. Tank support to be provided by the structural steel
frame around the tank.
5. Support
a. The tank shall be supported at the edges on columns with support plates to spread
the load to the foundation pad. These shall be sufficient in number to adequately
support all loads and not overload the foundation pad. Supports to be fully
shimmed to ensure equal loading at all points. Transverse supports may span the
tank underneath but shall be clear of the support pad by 100 mm (4”).
6. Design Codes- Structural, Environmental
a. The function of the belly tank/support frame is twofold:
1) A load bearing structure to support and restrain the generator enclosure and
fuel storage tank .
2) Act as a double containment diesel storage tank with 110% bund capacity.

b. Structural steel design shall be in accordance with relevant Eurocodes for loading
and structural design.
c. Tank design shall be certified to BS 799-5:2010 in Europe and be compliant with
any local codes or jurisdictional requirements for the storage of diesel in above
ground tanks, outside of Europe tanks shall comply with UL142 and include local
jurisdictional requirements.
d. In all cases tanks shall be 110% bunded and internally lined with a suitable coating
for continuous immersion diesel and biofuel blends. See section on tank coatings
below.
e. The tank vent from bund with desiccant breather shall be no more than 0.5m above
brim-full level. Tank Design Pressure shall be equivalent to head of water (S.G.1)
0.5m above the roof of the tank.
f. In jurisdictions where 3rd Party Certification is required for fuel storage tanks, this
will be a responsibility of the tank manufacturer to deliver.
g. Minimum sheet steel thickness of 4mm (0.15”) is required.
7. Tank Testing
a. Testing requirements shall be per the tank design code. Belly tank to be factory
tested AND site tested to ensure there has been no damage to the belly tank during
transit. All belly tank welds to be subject to a magnetic Dye Penetrant Inspection
test (DPI), this test shall be used to detect any discontinuities such as cracks from
fatigue, quenching, and grinding, as well as fractures, porosity, incomplete fusion,
and flaws in joints. This test shall be completed prior to painting. In conjunction
with the design code the purchaser’s requirements shall be:
1) No painting shall take place on any weld until all inspection and testing is
complete. All slag and scale will be removed from welds prior to testing.
2) Prior to the pressure test a leak test will be performed on each inner tank.
The tank will be pressurized with air and a soap bubble test applied to all
welds. The inner pressure will remain constant for 30 minutes after 20
minutes of settling time.
3) The outer bund shall be tested with a bubble test after 20 minutes settle time.
The inner tank shall be fitted with a gauge to ensure no back pressure leaks
to inner tank from bund.
4) Pressure testing of tanks shall be witnessed and verified by a representative
of the purchaser.
5) Consider inspection of the leak and bubble testing. Vendors shall submit
testing procedures for review at bid stage.
8. Fuel Supply
a. A 40mmØ (1 ½”) connection shall be provided complete with a motorized fill
valve to allow the tank be topped up automatically via the site top-up fuel supply
system. The generator enclosure shall also have a secondary fill connection on the
side of the generator to allow for the emergency filling of the generator in the
event that the fuel fill system becomes unavailable. A fuel fill cabinet shall be
provided on the exterior of the generator enclosure housing a 50mmØ (2”) valved
and capped fuel fill connection. Engine supply and return connections to/from the
belly tank shall be suitably separated within the belly tank to avoid any hot spots
due to recirculation of fuel from the engine.
b. In addition to the standard fuel filters provided by the engine manufacturer, there
shall also be installed a primary fuel filter/water separator in the fuel inlet line to
the

engine, this shall be a Racor 3 headed hot swappable fuel filter Model No: 791000
FHV.
c. All fuel piping shall be black iron or flexible fuel hose rated for this service. No
galvanized piping will be permitted. Flexible fuel lines shall be minimally rated for
150°C F and 8 bar.
d. A fire detection system shall be provided within the generator enclosure complete
with dead weight valves to shut off the fuel supply to the engine in the event of a
fire within the enclosure.
9. Overfill prevention valve

a. Tank to be fitted with overfill prevention valve. The valve will be capable of
completely closing and shutting off against 8 bar line pressure.
10. Polisher Specification
a. A CJC HDU 27/27 (or equal and approved) offline fuel polisher sized for
continuous operation 200 litres per hour shall be provided in an accessible cabinet
at the front of the generator. Polisher to be installed on rails to allow it be moved
out of the enclosure for maintenance. Polisher shall be complete with anti vibration
mounts. Connection to tank fitting sto be by flexible hoses with crimped fittings
suitable for diesel service.
b. Polisher to have:
1) micron absolute filter rating
2) kg dirt holding capacity
3) 2 litre water absorption capacity
4) phase motor, 415v 50Hz, AC (dependiong on region)
5) Steel Gear pump with internal pressure relief valve
6) Magnetically coupled sealed pump
7) Auto close solenoid inlet valve
8) Inlet mesh strainer
9) Non return discharge valve
10) Leak detection probe
11) Stainless Steel Drip Tray
12) Pressure indicator gauge
13) Air vent screw
14) Sample valve
15) Pressure switch, Pressure transmitter- 4-20mA signal to BMS
16) Local/Remote Stop Start
17) Local reset button
18) Lockable, rotary isolator
19) High Pressure trip
20) Common alarm for leak/pressure/motor overload
11. Polishing Connections, sparge pipes
a. The fuel polisher shall pick up diesel from the lowest point of the tank and return it
to the opposite side to ensure constant movement of the fuel and any suspended
particles. The fuel polisher piping arrangement shall be provided for AWS
approval as part of the vendor bid submittal. A 1” sampling port shall be provided
off the fuel polisher pipework to allow for sampling of the belly tank fuel.
12. Internal Slope, drain points

a. Provide slope required to provide a useful fall within the tank. 3" spare connection
to pump out located at lowest point next to polisher suction. The slope inside the
tank will be at least 2 degrees.
13. Inspection and access requirements
a. Manlid minimum 600 mm (24”) diameter internally through the floor of the
generator to avoid any water entering the tank while the manhole is open. Full ring
gasket. Compressible material suitable with diesel - Cork/nitrile. Minimum 3mm
(0.1”) gasket.
14. Leak Detection
a. Both the belly tank bund and the generator enclosure shall be monitored by leak
detection sensors. In the event that a leak is detected, an alarm shall be raised via
the EPMS and a beacon on the exterior of the generator enclosure shall be
activated. The leak detection shall be located to report a leak within 5 mm (0.2”) of
the lowest level of the containment.
b. A removable 25mm (2”) plug shall be located at 1/3 and 2/3 length of the tank on
the roof. This will be accessible via removable panel in the generator enclosure
floor.
15. Level Sensors, switches for control, sensors for display
a. Tank to be fitted with OLE T5020 Gauge or equivalent. Gauge display to provide
fuel level at the temporary connection point and an output to the BMS.
b. Gauge functions:
1) Accuracy 0.25% or better
2) Alarm Test Function
3) Level display in litres and percentage bar graph
4) Product temperature in Degrees Celsius
5) 4-20 mA output from hydrostatic probe
6) Modbus RS485 Output to BMS
7) Bund Leak alarm from float switch NC Contact
8) Relay output for level triggers (4 no)
9) Multi level reed switch sensor with individual outputs to control the fill valve.
10) HiHi, Hi, Lo, LoLo
c. Fill level control by the generator vendor with BMS outputs. See T5020 with
master/slave - Mark to send spec.
d. AWS to provide control strategy and required points. Common alarm to the BMS
with beacon on the container.
16. Fill Control Strategy.
a. The belly tank shall be supplied with a fuel control panel within the generator
enclosure. The fuel level shall be controlled by means of a multi-level sensor (OLE
T4000-GXXX or equivalent) providing the following outputs:
1) Low Level sensor in Belly tank, valve opens.
2) High level sensor, close valve
3) High-high, alarm and send close signal to valve.
4) Low-Low, alarm and send open signal to valve.
b. Top Terminal box to be IP65.

c. Contacts: 110/220V AC dependiong on region, max 10 watts switch, SPST.

d. Once the valve is driven open by a fuel request, the fuel fill panel shall provide an
output to the BMS to request fuel. This shall result in the diesel pump starting to
provide fuel to the belly tank.
e. All power circuits to sensors and valves shall have their MCB’s monitored, and in
the event of a loss of control power to any circuit, an alarm shall be raised.
D. Manual Fill Control Strategy.

1. In the event that the central fuel fill system becomes unavailable, the generator has the
option to be filled directly via a tanker. A manual fill panel shall be provided in the
exterior of the generator enclosure, vandal resistant manual fill with 30 litre spill
containment with overfill prevention valve at 90%.
2. A 2” fill valve c/w non-return valve shall be piped into the tank via the overfill
prevention valve. A level sensor (T5020) shall provide a visual indication to the operator
of the level within the tank and an audible high level alarm shall be provided within the
enclosure to avoid the risk of activating the overfill prevention, provided as a last resort.
3. Earthing
a. The tank shall be fitted externally with an earthing boss to allow the attachment of
an adequately sized earthing cable.
4. Tank Vent
a. The outlet of the vent shall not be more than 0.5m above the tank roof. The vent
shall be sized to prevent overpressure of the tank in the event of an overfill
situation. The vent shall be sized to ensure the pressure due to an overfill does not
exceed the design pressure of the tank at the maximum flow rate available. In any
event the vent shall be at least one pipe size larger than the fill point.
b. The vent shall be fitted with a dessicant breather to prevent moisture ingress to the
tank head space. The breather shall be designed such that it does not allow an
overpressure of the tank in an overfill situation. Underpressure or vacuum shall
also not be allowed to occur.
2.5 CONTROL AND MONITORING
A. Automatic Starting System Sequence of Operation: When mode-selector switch on the control
and monitoring panel is in the automatic position, remote-control contacts in one or more
separate automatic transfer switches initiate starting and stopping of generator set. When mode-
selector switch is switched to the on position, generator set starts. The off position of same
switch initiates generator-set shutdown. When generator set is running, specified system or
equipment failures or derangements automatically shut down generator set and initiate alarms.
Operation of a remote emergency-stop switch also shuts down generator set.
B. Operating and safety indications, protective devices, basic system controls, and engine guages
shall be grouped in a common control and monitoring panel mounted on the generator set.
Mounting method shall isolate the control panel from generator-set vibration.
C. Supporting Items: Include sensors, transducers, terminals, relays, and other devices and include
wiring required to support specified items. Locate sensors and other supporting items on engine
or generator, unless otherwise indicated.

D. To satisfy the three principle purposes of the EPMS, it is imperative that the proper devices and
specific measurements and statuses on those devices are monitored. This is coordinated through
the EPMS portion of Electrical Design drawings showing the devices to be monitored, which
must be referenced with the latest released Controls Points List, which is updated on a
quarterly basis.
E. Generator provide electrical power redundancy to the data center and are critical to ensure
continuous supply of power to racks in the event of an extended utility outage. Generator
controller integration is required to provide generator run state, fuel tank conditions, and any
alarm conditions, which impede the generators ability to provide power. In addition to
Generators, Fuel Oil Systems provide extended fuel backup reserves to generators. EPMS
monitoring of these systems includes valve positions, controller HOA status, fuel levels, and
leak status.
1. Generator supplier shall participate in a coordination meeting at project site to coordinate
all setpoints, device settings, time delays and other relevant programming with Controls
Engineer, GC, Electrical contractor, EPMS vendor and other equipment suppliers. The
purpose is to develop a fully coordinated electrical control and monitoring system for the
Owner. Final settings shall be documented in the O&M manuals.
2. All EPMS components must be assembled in Marshaling sections to allow safe working
conditions.
3. Generator supplier/ Generator Enclosure vendor to confirm connectivity across all
components before shipment to site.

F. Power Monitoring Architecture
CAT6 CAT6
Remote I/O ModbusTCP

Module Gateway
CAT6 (Belly Tank Fuel and

Remainder of Gen Enclosure Digital Statuses) RS-485
To Electrical Room
EPMS Panel
Genset Controller
G. Hardware: The physical components located throughout the EPMS network must be built of
high quality components and function within the environmental constraints they will be
subjected to. All hardware components must be compliant with related governing standards
such as UL, CE, TIA/EIA, etc.
1. Protocol Gateway
a. Quantity 1 per Generator Enclosure
b. Modbus RTU to Modbus TCP converter
c. Allow Ethernet daisy chain.
d. Protocol – must support ModbusTCP with minimum of 5 ModbusTCP Masters
polling simultaneously.
e. UL, CE, CSA certified for use globally
f. DIN Rail Mounted
g. 24VDC Power Supply
h. Gateway to interface with Generator Controller RS485 connection
i. Moxa MGate MB3180 or Approved Amazon Equivalent
2. Remote I/O Modules
b. UL, CE, CSA certified for use globally


polling simultaneously
e. Support all digital inputs on Fuel Oil System on one module. If more than one
module is required, units must support daisy chain topologies. Note: Refer to Fuel
Oil System Specification and SOO for required monitoring points
f. DIN Rail Mounted
g. Support Dry and Wet Contacts
h. 24VDC Power Supply
i. Moxa ioLogik E1210 or Approved Amazon Equivalent
j. Remote I/O module within Gen EPMS Panel:
1) I0 - Belly Tank High High Alarm
2) I1 - Belly Tank Low Low Alarm
3) I2 - Control Power Supply Healthy
4) I3 - Leak Detection Alarm
5) I4 - Main Generator Output Main Breaker 52A Status (NO Contact)
6) I5 - Main Generator Output Main Breaker Not Tripped (NC Contact)
3. Generator Controller
c. Analogue fuel monitoring must be provided for belly tank monitoring. Readings
shall be available via Modbus through Generator Controller. Mechanical Design
Engineering will need to provide direction on utilization of submersible or optical
sensors
d. Protocol – Provide Modbus RTU RS485 interface connection to the protocol
gateway
e. As required by NFPA 110 for Level 1, the following points need to be available
from Generator Controller via Modbus RTU RS485:
- AC Voltmeter
- AC Ammeter
- AC Frequency meter
- DC Voltmeter (alternator battery charging)
- Engine-coolant temperature gage
- Running-time meter
- Ammeter-Voltmeter, phase selector switch(es)
- Generator-Voltage adjusting rheostat
- Start-Stop switch
- Overspeed shutdown
- Coolant high-temperature shutdown
- Coolant low-level shutdown
- Oil low-pressure shutdown
- Fuel tank derangement alarm
- Fuel tank high-level shutdown of fuel supply alarm
- Generator overload
- Generator over/under frequency, over/under voltage and over-cur-
rent protection
- Jacket heater alarm

- Louver position alarm

- Alternator heater alarm
- Battery charger alarm
- DPF (RYPOS) active alarm (where applicable)
4. Gen EPMS Enclosure:
a. Generator vendor will be responsible for all labor, materials and equipment
necessary for the installation of a complete integrated system.
b. IP31.
c. UL, CE, CSA certified for use globally.
d. To be provided assembled within the Generator Enclosure.
e. Vendor to calculate heat load of the panel and make sure air inlets are installed
if required.
H. Control Power: The control power system shall be designed to eliminate the single point of
failure by using two source of control power derived externally and internally from the
generator control control panel.
1. 24VDC Power Supply
a. Quantity 2 per generator enclosure. One power supply has to be fed from a
UPS/Battery backed source and other source does not need to be fed from a
UPS/Battery backed source.
b. If leveraging internal generator enclosure battery bank as 24VDC source, no power
supply is needed for that specific source and it can be wired directly to the diode.
c. UL and IEC Certified.
d. Phoenix Contact P/N 2866776, 2938620 or Amazon approved equivalent.
2. Redundancy Module
a. Quantity 1 per gen enclosure.
b. UL and IEC Certified.
c. Phoenix Contact P/N 2907719 or Amazon approved equivalent.
I. Wiring / Network Connections

1. CAT6 cable
a. All CAT6 cables to be terminated with ANSI/TIA-T568B layouts.
b. All CAT6 cables shall be blue in color
c. All CAT6 cables shall be factory terminated where feasible
d. All CAT6 cables shall be Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP)
e. CAT6 cables to not exceed a length of 100 meters
2. Serial Cable – RS485 connections
a. AWG24 or 22 to account for the maximum length allowed for RS485 Modbus,
which is 1000m.
b. Overall foil and tinned copper braid shielding to allow for one end of the cable to
be connected to ground to reduce noise interface
c. Characteristic impedance of 120 Ohm and low capacitance of 12.8 or 12 pF/ft to
reduce signal reflection
d. Conductor direct resistance of 24 Ohm per 1000ft
e. 1 twisted pair for a 2 wire system with 4.8 twist per foot
f. PVC (Polyvinyl Chloride) outer jacket for standard application, plenum rated outer
jacket when used in plenum space

g. Insulation material should be PE (Polyethylene)

h. Attenuation of 0.60dB/100ft at 1 MHz and delay of 66%
i. Voltage rating of 300V RMS
j. High temperature of 80 degC and an operating temperature range between -30
degC to +80 degC
k. All wiring will be contained in the Generator Enclosure Panel or Camlock
Switchboard or run in conduit. The wiring will only be accessible at the
termination points.
l. Belden 9841 or Amazon Approved Equivalent
3. Wiring – Hardwired points
a. Internal panel wiring will be 18AWG, stranded MTW.
b. For wiring from terminal blocks to panel devices, only single conductor wiring is
permitted (SER connections)
c. Multiple conductor wire is permitted from one panel device to another panel
device (Belly Tank Fuel connections)
d. White and or black jacketed wire is preferred. If a multiple wire jacket colour
scheme is to be used, the specific colour scheme will need to be pre-approved by
Amazon prior to panel construction
e. Each wire will be labelled per design drawings with heat shrinkable sleeves at each
end. Each label will be machine printed
f. All wiring will be contained in the Generator Enclosure panel or run in conduit.
The wiring will only be accessible at the termination points
g. PE insulated, unarmoured, LSF Instrumentation cable or Approved Amazon
Equivalent
J. Remote Alarm Annunciator: Comply with NFPA 99. An LED labeled with proper alarm
conditions shall identify each alarm event and a common audible signal shall sound for each
alarm condition. Silencing switch in face of panel shall silence signal without altering visual
indication. Connect so that after an alarm is silenced, clearing of initiating condition will
reactivate alarm until silencing switch is reset. Cabinet and faceplate are surface- or flush-
mounting type to suit mounting conditions indicated. Remote Alarm Annunciator to be mounted
in Main Switchboard.
K. Emergency-Stop Switch: Mounted to generator control panel. Push button shall be protected
from accidental operation.
2.6 GENERATOR OVERCURRENT AND FAULT PROTECTION
A. Generator Circuit Breaker: Insulated-case, electronic-trip type; 100 percent rated; complying
with UL 489.
1. Circuit Breaker Rating:
a. 700W Unit: 1600A frame with 1250A sensor. (6,000 feet derating considered)
3. Tripping Characteristics: Adjustable long-time and short-time delay and instantaneous.
Adjustable ground fault protection.
4. Trip Settings: Selected to coordinate with generator thermal damage curve.
5. Shunt Trip: Connected to trip breaker when generator set is shut down by other protec-
tive devices.
6. Mounting: Adjacent to or integrated with control and monitoring panel.

7. Provision for main power feeder to exit/enter to the side or rear of the generator
enclosure.
8. Circuit breaker termination shall be provided with bus bar provision to terminate
two- hole long barrel compression lugs with NEMA hole spacing.
B. Ground-Fault Protection:
1. Generator circuit breaker ground fault trip by integral trip unit. Integrate ground-fault
trip indication with other generator-set shutdown indications.
C. Generator Protector: Microprocessor-based unit shall continuously monitor current level in each
phase of generator output, integrate generator heating effect over time, and predict when
thermal damage of alternator will occur. When signaled by generator protector or other
generator-set protective devices, a shunt-trip device in the generator disconnect switch shall
open the switch to disconnect the generator from load circuits. Protector shall perform the
following functions:
1. Initiates a generator overload alarm when generator has operated at an overload
equivalent to 110 percent of full-rated load for 60 seconds. Indication for this alarm is
integrated with other generator-set malfunction alarms.
2. Under single or three-phase fault conditions, regulates generator to 300 percent of
rated full-load current for up to 10 seconds.
3. As overcurrent heating effect on the generator approaches the thermal damage point of
the unit, protector switches the excitation system off, opens the generator disconnect
device, and shuts down the generator set.
4. Senses clearing of a fault by other overcurrent devices and controls recovery of
rated voltage to avoid overshoot.
D. Ground-Fault Indication: Comply with NFPA 70, "Emergency System" signals for ground-fault.
Integrate ground-fault alarm indication with other generator-set alarm indications.
2.7 GENERATOR, EXCITER, AND VOLTAGE REGULATOR
A. Comply with NEMA MG 1.
B. Drive: Generator shaft shall be directly connected to engine shaft. Exciter shall be rotated
integrally with generator rotor.
C. Electrical Insulation: Class H or Class F.
D. Stator-Winding Leads: Brought out to terminal box to permit future reconnection for other
voltages if required.
E. Construction shall prevent mechanical, electrical, and thermal damage due to vibration, overspeed
up to 125 percent of rating, and heat during operation at 110 percent of rated capacity.
F. Enclosure: Drip proof.
G. Instrument Transformers: Mounted within generator enclosure.

H. Voltage Regulator: Digital type, separate from exciter, providing performance as specified.
1. Adjusting control and monitoring panel shall provide plus or minus 5 percent
adjustment of output-voltage operating band.
I. Strip Heater: Thermostatically controlled unit arranged to maintain stator windings above dew
point.
J. Windings: Two-thirds pitch stator winding and fully linked amortisseur winding.
K. Subtransient Reactance: 12 percent, maximum.
2.8 OUTDOOR GENERATOR-SET ENCLOSURE
A. Description: Vandal-resistant, sound-attenuating, weatherproof 14 gauge galvanized-steel

housing. Multiple panels shall be lockable and provide adequate access to components requiring
maintenance. Panels shall be removable by one person without tools. Instruments and controls
shall be mounted within enclosure.
1. Sound Attenuation: Maximum sound attenuation to be measured 23 feet from enclo-
sure and five feet above grade in a free field environment with generator at full load.
a. IAD1 and IAD9 Sites: 75dBA at 23feet.
b. All other IAD and SFO sites: 85dBA at 23feet.
c. PDX sites: No Sound Attenuation required.
d. QRO: 75dBA at 23 feet (7 meters)
2. Structural Design and Anchorage: Comply with ASCE 7 for wind loads for wind loads
of up to 100mph and roof loading of 50 lbs/sq. ft.
3. Hinged Doors: With padlocking provisions.
4. Ventilation: Enclosure air intake to be designed for air velocity of 850-1000 fpm or as
recommended by the manufacturer to mitigate water intrusion inside of the enclosure.
5. Thermal Insulation: Manufacturer’s standard materials and thickness selected in coordi-
nation with space heater (if applicable) to maintain winter interior temperature within
operating limits required by engine generator components.
6. Pitched roof for rain water run-off
7. Extend engine crankcase breather tubes to be extended to downstream side of radiator.
8. DPF/muffler Location (SFO Cluster Only): External to enclosure.
9. Provide limit switches to monitor louver position.
B. Engine Cooling Airflow through Enclosure: Maintain .5 inches of water column or less overall
static pressure drop throughout ventilation stream.
1. Fixed external, cooling-air inlet louvers. Stainless steel bird screen and rodent
protection shall be provided at inlet and outlet openings.
2. Automatic dampers of extruded aluminum construction shall be supplied at the air
intake. The dampers shall be spring open and 120 VAC power close.
3. Gravity backdraft dampers shall be supplied at the air discharge
C. Generator Auxiliary Power Panel: Provide 208/120 volt, three phase, four-wire panelboard sized
to adequately power all internal generator needs, typically 100 amps. Provide required 208V
and 120V circuits to power generator block heater, lighting, battery charger(s), receptacles and
other 120-volt loads as required by the specification and enclosure design. The panel and all
components that it powers to be factory pre-wired. The contractor shall bring 208-volt external

feed and connect at the generator auxiliary power panel. If a Generator Auxiliary Power Panel
cannot be provided, the contractor shall provide all dedicated 208V and 120V internal generator
support circuits from an external source.
D. Interior Lights with Switch: Factory-wired, LED vapor proof-type fixtures within housing;
arranged to illuminate controls and accessible interior. Minimum of one fixture shall be located
close to each entrance / exit and permanently illuminated to provide 45 foot-candles of
illumination. These fixtures shall be provided with 3-hour emergency battery backup. The
remainder of the luminaires shall be operated via switch at each entrance / exit. Light switch
shall be located just inside door and shall allow personnel to operate switch by reaching into the
enclosure without fully entering the generator enclosure. Switch shall be within 6” of door
threshold. Include light switch location on equipment submittals.
E. Convenience Outlets: Factory wired, GFCI. Arrange for external electrical connection.
2.9 GROUNDING
A. Solidly grounded wye system: Neutral-to-ground bond established at the generator terminal.
2.10 VIBRATION ISOLATION DEVICES
A. Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open-spring isolators with seismic restraint.
1. Housing: Steel with resilient vertical-limit stops to prevent spring extension due to wind
loads or if weight is removed; factory-drilled baseplate bonded to 1/4-inch- (6-mm-)
thick, elastomeric isolator pad attached to baseplate underside; and adjustable
equipment mounting and leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation.
2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of compressed height of the spring at
rated load.
3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of required deflection at rated load.
4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without defor-
mation or failure.
2.11 SMOKE DETECTOR

a. The container must have an internal smoke detector, supplied by the generator man-
ufacturer. The system will be connected to the building central through a monitor
module provided by the installer of the fire center. Need to confirm with local
codes if it is required
2.12 FINISHES
A. Indoor and Outdoor Enclosures and Components: Manufacturer's standard white finish over
corrosion-resistant pretreatment and compatible primer.

A. Prototype Testing: Factory test engine-generator set using same engine model, constructed of
identical or equivalent components and equipped with identical or equivalent accessories.
1. Tests: Comply with NFPA 110, Level 1 Energy Converters and with IEEE 115.
B. Project-Specific Equipment Tests: Before shipment, factory test engine-generator set and other
system components and accessories manufactured specifically for this Project. Perform tests at
rated load and power factor. Include the following tests: Factory test shall be performed as a
complete unit as generator and enclosure.
1. Test components and accessories furnished with installed unit that are not identical
to those on tested prototype to demonstrate compatibility and reliability.
2. Full load run with inlet air temperature at limits as mentioned in spec 40 degC,
95%RH. All enclosure doors to be closed during testing.
3. Maximum power.
4. Voltage regulation.
5. Transient and steady-state governing.
6. Single-step load pickup.
7. Safety shutdown.
8. Provide 14 days' advance notice of tests and opportunity for observation of tests by
Own- er's representative.
9. Report factory test results within 10 days of completion of test and provide copy of
factory test report with equipment delivery. Include in factory test report: pressure
drop across enclosure, coolant and oil temperatures in test data from #2 above.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION BY CONTRACTOR
A. Examine areas, equipment bases, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation and other conditions affecting packaged engine-generator
performance.
B. Examine roughing-in of piping systems and electrical connections. Verify actual locations of
connections before packaged engine-generator installation.

3.2 INSTALLATION BY CONTRACTOR
A. Comply with packaged engine-generator manufacturers' written installation and alignment

instructions and with NFPA 110.
B. Install packaged engine generator to provide access, without removing connections or

accessories, for periodic maintenance.
C. Install packaged engine generator with restrained spring isolators having a minimum deflection
of 1 inch on 4-inch high concrete base. Secure sets to anchor bolts installed in concrete bases.
Concrete base construction is specified in Structural Drawings and Specifications.
D. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by equipment manufacturers but not
specified to be factory mounted.
3.3 CONNECTIONS BY CONTRACTOR
A. Connect engine exhaust pipe to engine with flexible connector.
B. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
C. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors

and Cables."
3.4 IDENTIFICATION BY CONTRACTOR
A. Identify system components according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical

Systems."
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test,

019113 General Commissioning Requirements section.
3.6 ONSITE TRAINING
adjust, operate, and maintain packaged engine generators. Provide a minimum of 4 hours onsite
training per building, to be coordinated by Operations.

3.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
A. The Vendor shall submit for approval to the Owner (6) sets of installation, operating, and
maintenance instructions in bound form no later than (10) business days after the equipment has
been shipped to the site.
B. Each installation, operation, and maintenance instruction manual shall include, but not limited
to, the following items:
1. Power and control wiring diagrams, including any modifications made to the
diagrams during factory testing. Diagrams shall include terminal markings and
connections in point-to-point format.
2. All approved shop drawing information.
3. Typical sectional views and mounting details.
4. List of all pre-alarm and alarm shutdown protective devices.
5. Complete parts list. List of tools and replacement items recommended being stored
at Project for ready access. Include part and drawing numbers, current unit prices,
and source of supply.
6. Preventive maintenance schedule with detailed instructions.

SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Specifications:

1.2 SUMMARY
1. Distribution panelboards.
2. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.
A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, switching and overcurrent protective device,
transient voltage suppression device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions
and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings,
and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.
1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed
devices, equipment features, and ratings.
2. Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.
3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.
4. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices.
5. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent
protective devices and auxiliary components.
6. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

A. Seismic Qualification Certificates: Submit certification that panelboards, overcurrent protective

devices, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26
Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the following:
B. Field Quality-Control Reports:

3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with
requirements.
C. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards.
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section
"Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
1. Keys: Two spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock.
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by
a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. Comply with NEMA PB 1.
C. Comply with NFPA 70.

Un. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panelboards; install temporary
electric heating (250 W per panelboard) to prevent condensation.
B. Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NECA 407.
Un. Environmental Limitations:
1. Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work
in spaces is complete and dry, work above panelboards is complete, and temporary
HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions
at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
2. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise
indicated:
3. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 23 deg F to plus 104 deg F.
4. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet. QRO project located at an altitude of 6000 feet
B. Service Conditions: NEMA PB 1, usual service conditions, as follows:
1. Ambient temperatures within limits specified.

2. Altitude not exceeding 6600 feet. QRO project located at an altitude of 6000 feet
C. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied
by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after
arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Construction Manager and Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed
interruption of electric service.
2. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Construction Manager's and
Owner's written permission.
3. Comply with NFPA 70E.
1.10 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that
penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment,
raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces.
Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors
and panels.
B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor-
bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in
Division 03.

1.11 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace panelboards that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
7. Warranty Period: 18 months from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS
A. Fabricate and test panelboards according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in
Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
B. Enclosures: Surface-mounted cabinets.
1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.
a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.
2. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, match
box dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box.
3. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within
hinged trim cover.
4. Skirt for Surface-Mounted Panelboards: Same gage and finish as panelboard front with
flanges for attachment to panelboard, wall, and ceiling or floor.
5. Gutter Extension and Barrier: Same gage and finish as panelboard enclosure; integral
with enclosure body. Arrange to isolate individual panel sections.
6. Finishes:
a. Panels and Trim: galvanized steel, factory finished immediately after cleaning and
pretreating with manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of
prime coat and thermosetting topcoat.
b. Back Boxes: Same finish as panels and trim.
7. Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in transparent cardholder.
C. Incoming Mains Location: Top or Bottom, as per contract drawings.
D. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses:
1. Material: Aluminum or Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.

2. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding
conductors; bonded to box.
E. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.
1. Material: Aluminum or Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.

2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Compression type.
3. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Compression type.

4. Feed-Through Lugs: Compression type, suitable for use with conductor material. Locate
at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device.
F. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances
required for future installation of devices.
G. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit

current available at terminals.
2.2 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS

following.

2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
5. Industrial Electric Mfg. (IEM)
B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type.
C. Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.
1. For doors more than 36 inches high, provide two latches, keyed alike.
D. Mains: Circuit breaker.
E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller:
Bolt-on circuit breakers.
F. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A:
Bolt-on circuit breakers; plug-in circuit breakers where individual positive-locking device
requires mechanical release for removal.
G. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Circuit Breakers.
2.3 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS

following.

5. Industrial Electric Mfg. (IEM)

B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type.
C. Mains: Circuit breaker.
D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing
adjacent units.
E. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.
2.4 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

following:

B. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to
meet available fault currents.
1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level

overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable
magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.
2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-
mounted, field-adjustable trip setting.
3. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories:
a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.

b. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor
materials.
c. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable
pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator.
d. Trip units on circuit breakers shall be factory set in the state wherein they are read-
only. Write capabilities that permit remote operation or modification shall be
disabled. Where remote capability cannot be disabled, trip units shall not be
networked. Contact state reporting for open/close/tripped shall remain enabled.
e. Shunt Trip:
1) 120-VAC trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 55 percent
of rated voltage.
2) 24-VDC trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 75% of rated
voltage for cold aisle busway tap box breakers.
f. Undervoltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage without
intentional time delay.
g. Auxiliary Contacts: Two SPDT switches with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts
mimic circuit-breaker contacts and "b" contacts operate in reverse of circuit-
breaker contacts.

h. Alarm Switch: Single-pole, normally open contact that actuates only when circuit
breaker trips.
i. Multipole units enclosed in a single housing or factory assembled to operate as a
single unit.
j. Handle Padlocking Device: Fixed attachment, for locking circuit-breaker handle in
on or off position.
k. Handle Clamp: Loose attachment, for holding circuit-breaker handle in on position.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NECA 407.
B. Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged or rusted or have
been subjected to water saturation.
C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NECA 407.
B. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration
and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
C. Mount top of trim 90 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.
D. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed
panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box.
E. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed.
1. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges.
F. Install filler plates in unused spaces.
G. Comply with NECA 1.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning

signs complying with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads;
incorporate Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer
or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.
C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements
for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
D. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a
nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section
Un. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections in
accordance with specification section 019113 requirements.
3.5 ADJUSTING
Un. Adjust moving parts and operable component to function smoothly, and lubricate as
recommended by manufacturer.
B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.
3.6 PROTECTION
Un. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's
written instructions.

SECTION 262500 – ENCLOSED BUS ASSEMBLIES (OPTDC)
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Specifications:

1.2 SUMMARY
1. Feeder-bus assemblies.
2. Plug-in bus assemblies.
3. Bus plug-in devices.
for owner approval.

D. Provide production test reports for Type tests and Routine tests required by UL 857 standard.
E. Shop Drawings: For each type of bus assembly and plug-in device.
1. Show fabrication and installation details for enclosed bus assemblies. Include plans,
elevations, and sections of components. Designate components and accessories, including
clamps, brackets, hanger rods, connectors, straight lengths, and fittings.
2. Show fittings, materials, fabrication, and installation methods for listed fire-stop barriers.
3. Indicate required clearances, method of field assembly, and location and size of each
field connection.
4. Detail connections to switchgear, switchboards, transformers, and panelboards.
5. Wiring Diagrams: Power wiring.
6. Seismic-Restraint Details: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.
a. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting seismic restraints.

b. Detail fabrication, including anchorages and attachments to structure and to
supported equipment.
A. A comprehensive 2D AutoCAD layout and 3D schematic must be supplied showing overall

design and individual run designs, which identify every element from a corresponding bill of
materials. Each element supplied must be individually labelled with information which also
includes, site designation, data hall no, run identification, actual position as detailed on 3D
schematic.
B. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans and sections, drawn to scale. Include scaled bus-assembly
layouts and relationships between components and adjacent structural, mechanical, and
electrical elements. Show the following:
1. Vertical and horizontal enclosed bus-assembly runs, offsets, and transitions.

2. Clearances for access above and to the side of enclosed bus assemblies.
3. Vertical elevation of enclosed bus assemblies above the floor or bottom of structure.
4. Support locations, type of support, and weight on each support.
C. Location of adjacent construction elements including light fixtures, HVAC and plumbing
equipment, fire sprinklers and piping, signal and control devices, and other equipment.
D. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that enclosed bus

assemblies, plug-in devices, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined
in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the
following:
a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation
of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and
the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."

Comply with UL 857 , NEMA BU 1, "Busways " and NOM-001-SEDE-2012
Un.
Un. Deliver, store, and handle enclosed bus assemblies according to NEMA BU 1.1, "General
Instructions for Proper Handling, Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Busway Rated 600
Volts or Less."
Un. Derate enclosed bus assemblies for continuous operation at indicated ampere ratings for ambient
temperature not exceeding 122 deg F.
1.8 COORDINATION
Un. Coordinate layout and installation of enclosed bus assemblies and suspension system with other
construction that penetrates ceilings or floors or is supported by them, including light fixtures,
HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.
1.9 WARRANTY
Un. As specified in MPA.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

following:
1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Products.
4. E+I Engineering Group; Powerbar Products
5. ABB, Inc. (Non GE)

2.2 ENCLOSED BUS ASSEMBLIES
A. Feeder-Bus Assemblies: NEMA BU 1, low-impedance bus assemblies in nonventilated

housing; bolted joints; ratings as indicated.
1. Seismic Fabrication Requirements: Fabricate mounting provisions and attachments for

feeder-bus assemblies with reinforcement strong enough to withstand seismic forces
defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems"
when mounting provisions and attachments are anchored to building structure
2. Voltage: 480V; 3 phase; 100 percent neutral capacity.
3. Temperature Rise: 55 deg C above 40 deg C ambient maximum for continuous rated
current.
4. Bus Materials: Current-carrying Copper or Aluminum conductors, fully insulated with
Class 130C insulation except at joints; plated surface at joints.
5. Ground.
a. Integrated housing
6. Enclosure: Aluminum with manufacturer's standard finish.
7. Fittings and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard.
8. Mounting: Arranged flat, edgewise, or vertically without derating.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Support bus assemblies independent of supports for other elements such as equipment
enclosures at connections to panelboards and switchboards, pipes, conduits, ceilings, and ducts.
1. Design each fastener and support to carry load indicated by seismic requirements and to
comply with seismic-restraint details according to Division 26 Section "Vibration and
Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
2. Design each fastener and support to carry 200 lb or 4 times the weight of bus assembly,
whichever is greater.
3. Support bus assembly to prevent twisting from eccentric loading.
4. Support bus assembly with not less than 3/8-inch steel rods. Install side bracing to
prevent swaying or movement of bus assembly. Modify supports after completion to
eliminate strains and stresses on bus bars and housings.
5. Fasten supports securely to building structure according to Division 26 Section "Hangers
and Supports for Electrical Systems."
B. Install expansion fittings at locations where bus assemblies cross building expansion joints.
Install at other locations so distance between expansion fittings does not exceed manufacturer's
recommended distance between fittings.
C. Construct rated fire-stop assemblies where bus assemblies penetrate fire-rated elements such as
walls, floors, and ceilings. Seal around penetrations according to Division 07 Section
"Penetration Firestopping."
D. Install a concrete curb at least 4 inches high around bus-assembly floor penetrations.

E. Coordinate bus-assembly terminations to equipment enclosures to ensure proper phasing,

connection, and closure.
F. Tighten bus-assembly joints with torque wrench or similar tool recommended by bus-assembly
manufacturer. Tighten joints again after bus assemblies have been energized for 30 days.
G. Install bus-assembly, plug-in units. Support connecting conduit independent of plug-in unit.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
B. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors

and Cables."
C. Identify busway according to Division 26 Section “Identification for Electrical Systems”.

specification 019113 General Commissioning Requirements section.
B. During installation, a project engineer from the Busway Manufacturer must be available within
predefined times by the client to attend site on a number of occasions to assist the installing
contractor with measurement and design of missing links/site measures. These missing
links/site measures should be delivered in 7 – 8 working days from site visit.
C. Following the installation of the Busway, the Busway manufacturer must make available within
predefined times by the client a qualified Field Service Engineer, to assist, verify the installation
and test the installed Busway system for the complete duration of Level 4 and Level 5
commissioning (approximately 2 weeks). Following successful testing, the Busway
Manufacturer must issue a test certificate for the installed system.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning.

3.6 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection to ensure that moisture does not enter bus assembly.

SECTION 262726 – WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Specifications:

1.2 SUMMARY
B. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates.
1. Twist-locking receptacles.
2. Weather-resistant receptacles.
3. Snap switches and wall-box dimmers.
4. Wall-switch
5. Pendant cord-connector devices.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following

manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles:
1. Cooper Wiring Devices; Division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper).

2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell).
3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton).
4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour).

2.2 GENERAL WIRING-DEVICE REQUIREMENTS
Un. Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
2.3 STRAIGHT-BLADE RECEPTACLES
Un. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6

Configuration 5-20R, UL 498, and FS W-C-596.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Cooper; 5351 (single), CR5362 (duplex).

b. Hubbell; HBL5351 (single), HBL5352 (duplex).
c. Leviton; 5891 (single), 5352 (duplex).
d. Pass & Seymour; 5361 (single), 5362 (duplex).
2.4 GFCI RECEPTACLES
Un. General Description: Straight blade, non-feed-through type.
1. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, UL 943 Class A, and FS W-C-596.

2. Include indicator light that shows when the GFCI has malfunctioned or tripped and no
longer provides proper GFCI protection.
3. End of life function by rendering itself incapable of delivering power when the test fails
or indicating visually/audibly that the device must be replaced.
4. Reverse line-load miswiring function by denying power to the receptacle face if it is
miswired.
B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:
a. Cooper; VGF20.
b. Hubbell; GFR5352L.
c. Pass & Seymour; 2095.
d. Leviton; 7590.
2.5 TWIST-LOCKING RECEPTACLES
Un. Single Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6

Configuration L5-20R, and UL 498.
a. Cooper; CWL520R.
b. Hubbell; HBL2310.

a. Leviton; 2310.
b. Pass & Seymour; L520-R.
2.6 PENDANT CORD-CONNECTOR DEVICES
A. Description:
1. Matching, locking-type plug and receptacle body connector.

2. NEMA WD 6 Configurations L5-20P and L5-20R, heavy-duty grade, and FS W-C-596.
3. Body: Nylon, with screw-open, cable-gripping jaws and provision for attaching external
cable grip.
4. External Cable Grip: Woven wire-mesh type made of high-strength, galvanized-steel wire
strand, matched to cable diameter, and with attachment provision designed for
corresponding connector.
2.7 TOGGLE SWITCHES
A. Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W-S-896.
B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:
a. Single Pole:
1) Cooper; AH1221.
2) Hubbell; HBL1221.
3) Leviton; 1221-2.
4) Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC1.
b. Two Pole:
1) Cooper; AH1222.
3) Leviton; 1222-2.
c. Three Way:
1) Cooper; AH1223.
3) Leviton; 1223-2.
d. Four Way:
1) Cooper; AH1224.

3) Leviton; 1224-2.
C. Single-Pole, Double-Throw, Momentary-Contact, Center-off Switches: 120/277 V, 20 A; for

use with mechanically held lighting contactors.
a. Cooper; 1995.
b. Hubbell; HBL1557.
c. Leviton; 1257.
d. Pass & Seymour; 1251.
2.8 WALL-BOX DIMMERS
A. Dimmer Switches: Modular, full-wave, solid-state units with integral, quiet on-off switches,
with audible frequency and EMI/RFI suppression filters.
B. Control: Continuously adjustable slider; with single-pole or three-way switching. Comply with
UL 1472.
2.9 WALL PLATES
A. Single and combination types shall match corresponding wiring devices.
1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish.

2. Material for Finished Spaces: Smooth, high-impact thermoplastic.
3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel.
4. Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed
and labeled for use in wet and damp locations.
B. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with Type 3R, weather-
resistant, die-cast aluminum with lockable cover.
2.10 FLOOR SERVICE FITTINGS
A. Type: Modular, flush-type, dual-service units suitable for wiring method used.
B. Compartments: Barrier separates power from voice and data communication cabling.
C. Service Plate: Rectangular, solid brass with satin finish.
D. Power Receptacle: NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, gray finish, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Voice and Data Communication Outlet: Two modular, keyed, color-coded, RJ-45 jacks for UTP
cable.

2.11 FINISHES
A. Device Color:
1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: White unless otherwise indicated
or required by NFPA 70 or device listing.
2. Wiring Devices Connected to Emergency Power System: Red
3. Wiring Devices Connected to UPS: Blue
B. Wall Plate Color: For plastic covers, match device color.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1, including mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise
indicated.
B. Coordination with Other Trades:
1. Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials over device
boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside
of boxes.
2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete,
dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and
cables.
3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint
unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.
4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.
C. Conductors:
1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until right before they are spliced or terminated
on devices.
2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid
scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.
3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70,
Article 300, without pigtails.
4. Existing Conductors:
a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors.

b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter.
c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted, provided the outlet box is large enough.
D. Device Installation:
1. Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and that were
installed before building finishing operations were complete.

2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect
conductors.
3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last
possible moment.
4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches (152 mm)
in length.
5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid
conductor tightly clockwise, two-thirds to three-fourths of the way around terminal
screw.
6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by manufacturer.
7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice
No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections.
8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device.
9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold
device- mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.
E. Receptacle Orientation:
1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles down, and on horizontally mounted
receptacles to the right.
F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount
outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.
G. Dimmers:
1. Install dimmers within terms of their listing.

2. Verify that dimmers used for fan speed control are listed for that application.
3. Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according to
manufacturers' device listing conditions in the written instructions.
H. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension
vertical. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates.
I. Adjust locations of floor service outlets and service poles to suit arrangement of partitions and
furnishings.
3.2 GFCI RECEPTACLES
A. Install non-feed-through-type GFCI receptacles where protection of downstream receptacles is

not required.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B. Identify each receptacle with panelboard identification and circuit number. Use hot, stamped, or
engraved machine printing with black filled lettering on face of plate, and durable wire markers
or tags inside outlet boxes.

1. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436.

2. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital
readout or illuminated digital-display indicators of measurement.
B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles:
1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V.

2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is unacceptable.
3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable.
4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943.
5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted.
6. Tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit
breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar
problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new
ones, and retest as specified above.
C. Wiring device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

SECTION 263213.1 – ENGINE GENERATORS (3-PHASE, 4-WIRE)
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Specifications:

1.2 SUMMARY
1. 2500kW, 480/277V, 3-Phase, Standby.
following features:
1. Diesel engine.
1.3 DEFINITIONS

parameter.
for owner approval.
following:

Quality Management District by Owner.
connection.



standards.
load.
a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation
of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified.
project resides in.
5. According to the seismic study provided by AECOM in the QRO project areas, the
seismic zone for the three sites is SEISMIC ZONE B, and the IMPORTANCE FACTOR
is 1.50 for the equipment anchor points


E. Product Test Reports: Indicate test results compared with specified performance requirements
version installed.

property boundaries due to sound emitted by generator set including engine, engine exhaust,
study indicates that the system must be 70dBA at 23 feet (7 meters). Local code: NOM 081



electrical service.

3. Altitude: Sea level to 6000 feet(1900 meters).
1.9 COORDINATION
03.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. As specified in
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
following:

3. Cummins.
Un. Factory-assembled and -tested, engine-generator set.



of gravity.

address, and model and serial number of components.
load to full load.
load to full load.
system components.
2.3 ENGINE

appliances.
to source.
3. Fuel Filtering: Remove water and contaminants larger than 2 microns.
4. Primary Fuel Filter: Fuel water separators.
a. Engines shall utilize Racor 79/1000FHV30 or Amazon approved equivalent.
5. Secondary Fuel Filter: Mounted on engine per manufacturer’s standard design.


b. Rating: 50-psig maximum working pressure with coolant at 180 deg F, and non-

c. End Fittings: Flanges or steel pipe nipples with clamps to suit piping and equip-
ment connections.
enclosure section.
3. A triple independent microprocessor-based system measures back pressure and applies
temperature.
7. DPF shall incorporate a Critical Grade Silencer with 35-42 dBA attenuation.
10. Comply with NOM-043-SEMARNAT-1993 and NOM-ECOL-043
recharging.

in place.
a. Operation: Equalizing-charging rate of 20A shall be initiated automatically

after battery has lost charge until an adjustable equalizing voltage is achieved
at battery terminals. Unit shall then be automatically switched to a lower float-
charging mode and shall continue to operate in that mode until battery is
discharged again.
variations in ambient temperature from minus 40 deg C to plus 60 deg C to
prevent overcharging at high temperatures and undercharging at low
temperatures.
d. Ammeter and Voltmeter: Flush mounted in door. Meters shall indicate
charging rates.
providing low battery voltage indication on control and monitoring panel.
Sense high battery voltage and loss of ac input or dc output of battery charger.
Either condition shall close contacts that provide a battery-charger malfunction
indication at system control and monitoring panel.
B. Base-Mounted Fuel Oil Tank: Factory installed, and piped fuel oil tank shall be UL 142 rated
(SFO sites require UL2085 rating). Features include the following:
1. Tank Capacity:
a. QRO, PDX, SFO, CMH and IAD Clusters: 5000 gallons, with usable capacity
at least 85% of actual (Minimum useable fuel capacity for Run Time of 24
hours at full load).
normal fuel level.


e. UL E150881
port.
d. Four (4) 2” spare NPTF fittings plus one (1) spare 4” NPTF fiitting in tank.

liters).
generator.

Connection Notes
requirements.
allow
Tank Drain Spare 80mmØ (3”) connection to be provided at each end of the tank to
allow the tank to be pumped out.
g. design pressure.
4. Bracing
entry.
5. Support

fuel storage tank .
below.
7. Tank Testing
of the purchaser.
8. Fuel Supply
belly tank shall be

suitably separated within the belly tank to avoid any hot spots due to recirculation
of fuel from the engine.
the engine, this shall be a Racor 3 headed hot swappable fuel filter Model No:
791000 FHV.
150°C F and 8 bar.

13) Air vent screw
14) Sample valve
approval

as part of the vendor bid submittal. A 1” sampling port shall be provided off the
fuel polisher pipework to allow for sampling of the belly tank fuel.
(0.1”) gasket.
14. Leak Detection
floor.
b. Gauge functions:



3. Earthing
4. Tank Vent
B. Configuration: Operating and safety indications, protective devices, basic system controls, and
engine guages shall be grouped in a common control and monitoring panel mounted on the
generator set. Mounting method shall isolate the control panel from generator-set vibration.

quarterly basis.
E. Generators provide electrical power redundancy to the data center and are critical to ensure
leak status.

conditions.
F. Power Monitoring Architecture:
1. All internal connections and terminations within the Generator enclosure for remote I/O
modules, Modbus gateway, and genset controller are responsibility of generator provider.
2. EPMS vendor will provide CAT6 termination on site that will connect in to their EPMS
panel within the electrical room.

1. Protocol Gateway:
a. Quantity 1 per Generator Enclosure.

b. Modbus RTU to Modbus TCP converter.
e. UL, CE, CSA certified for use globally.
f. DIN Rail Mounted.
g. 24VDC Power Supply.
h. Gateway to interface with Generator Controller RS485 connection.
i. Moxa MGate MB3170 or Approved Amazon Equivalent.
2. Remote I/O Modules:
a. Quantity 1 per Generator EPMS Panel.

b. Quantity 1 per Camlock Switchboard.
d. Allow Ethernet daisy chain.
e. Protocol – must support ModbusTCP with minimum of 5 ModbusTCP Masters
f. Support all digital inputs on Fuel Oil System and Camlock Breakers. Note:
Refer to Fuel Oil System Specification and SOO for required monitoring
points (xii below for reference).
g. DIN Rail Mounted.
h. Support Dry and Wet Contacts.
i. 24VDC Power Supply.
j. Moxa ioLogik E1210 or Amazon approved equivalent.
k. Remote I/O module within Camlock Switchboard.
1) I0 – [not used]
2) I1 - Permanent Gen / Load Bank Position
3) I2 - Temp Gen Position
4) I3 - [not used]
5) I4 - [not used]
6) I5 - Camlock ACB 52A Status (NO Contact)
7) I6 - Camlock ACB Not Tripped (NC Contact)
8) I7 - PSU Control Power Alarm (Alarm from 2 PSU’s in series)
9) I8 - Load Bank Shunt Engaged
10) I9 - [not used]
11) I10 - GPP Supply 120V Healthy (interposing ice cube relay on AC side)
12) I11 - CUPP Supply 120V Healthy (interposing ice cube relay on AC side)
l. Remote I/O module within Gen EPMS Panel:


3. Generator Controller:

c. Analogue fuel monitoring must be provided for belly tank monitoring.
Readings shall be available via Modbus through Generator Controller.
gateway.
e. As required by NFPA 110 for Level 1, the following points need to be
available from Generator Controller via Modbus RTU RS485:
1) AC Voltmeter
2) AC Ammeter
3) AC Frequency meter
4) DC Voltmeter (alternator battery charging)
5) Engine-coolant temperature gage
6) Running-time meter
7) Ammeter-Voltmeter, phase selector switch(es)
8) Generator-Voltage adjusting rheostat
9) Start-Stop switch
10) Overspeed shutdown
11) Coolant high-temperature shutdown
12) Coolant low-level shutdown
13) Oil low-pressure shutdown
14) Fuel tank derangement alarm
15) Fuel tank high-level shutdown of fuel supply alarm
16) Generator overload
17) Generator over/under frequency, over/under voltage and over-current
protection
18) Jacket heater alarm
19) Louver position alarm
20) Alternator heater alarm
21) Battery charger alarm
22) DPF (RYPOS) active alarm (where applicable)
4. 24VDC Power Supply:
a. UL and IEC Certified.

b. Phoenix Contact P/N 2866776, 2938620 or Amazon approved equivalent.

b. IP31.
if required.
H. Wiring / Network Connections:
1. CAT6 cable:

b. All CAT6 cables shall be blue in color.
c. All CAT6 cables shall be factory terminated where feasible.
d. All CAT6 cables shall be Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP).
e. CAT6 cables to not exceed a length of 100 meters.
2. Serial Cable – RS485 connections:
which is 1000m.
b. Overall foil and tinned copper braid shielding to allow for one end of the cable
to be connected to ground to reduce noise interface.
c. Characteristic impedance of 120 Ohm and low capacitance of 12.8 or 12 pF/ft
to reduce signal reflection.
d. Conductor direct resistance of 24 Ohm per 1000ft.
e. 1 twisted pair for a 2 wire system with 4.8 twist per foot.
f. PVC (Polyvinyl Chloride) outer jacket for standard application, plenum rated
outer jacket when used in plenum space.
g. Insulation material should be PE (Polyethylene).
h. Attenuation of 0.60dB/100ft at 1 MHz and delay of 66%.
i. Voltage rating of 300V RMS .
degC to +80 degC.
termination points.
l. Belden 9841 or Amazon Approved Equivalent.
3. Wiring – Hardwired points:

b. For wiring from terminal blocks to panel devices, only single conductor wiring
is permitted (SER connections).
device (Belly Tank Fuel connections).
d. White and or black jacketed wire is preferred. If a multiple wire jacket color
scheme is to be used, the specific color scheme will need to be pre-approved
by Amazon prior to panel construction.

e. Each wire will be labeled per design drawings with heat shrinkable sleeves at
each end. Each label will be machine printed.
f. All wiring will be contained in the Generator Enclosure panel or run in
conduit. The wiring will only be accessible at the termination points.
g. PE insulated, unarmoured, LSF Instrumentation cable or Amazon approved
equivalent.
I. Remote Alarm Annunciator: Comply with NFPA 99. An LED labeled with proper alarm
J. Emergency-Stop Switch: Mounted to generator control panel. Push button shall be protected
with UL 489.
1. Provide one output circuit breaker which will feed the Camlock switchboard. Camlock
switchboard shall be used for portable generator use as well as load bank testing of the
permanent generator. Refer to Camlock switchboard spec for details. The Camlock
switchboard shall be located within the generator enclosure. The Camlock connectors
provided shall be female connectors.
a. 3000kW Unit: 4500A frame with 4500A sensor.
3. Tripping Characteristics: LSIG, Adjustable long-time and short-time delay and

instantaneous. Adjustable ground fault protection.
5. Shunt Trip: Connected to trip breaker when generator set is shut down by other protective
devices.
7. Feeder lug provision to accept the following:
a. 3000kW Generator: Ten (10) sets of 444 DLO cables or twelve (12) sets of
373 DLO cables. Vendor to coordinate with Camlock Switchboard supplier for
correct lug configuration.
8. Circuit breaker termination shall be provided with bus bar provision to terminate two-
hole long barrel compression lugs with NEMA hole spacing.

11. Ground-Fault Protection: LSIG breaker required, Generator circuit breaker ground fault
trip by integral trip unit. Integrate ground-fault trip indication with other generator-set
shutdown indications.
B. Generator Protector: Microprocessor-based unit shall continuously monitor current level in each
C. Ground-Fault Indication: Comply with NFPA 70, "Emergency System" signals for ground-fault.
2.7 CAMLOCK SWITCHBOARD
A. Orientation: Camlock Switchboard shall have forward-facing camlock breaker section and
forward-facing camlock connector section. The Camlock Switchboard enclosure shall be
installed against the side-wall of the generator enclosure with the breaker and camlock
connectors facing the wall. The Camlock Switchboard shall be accessible by double-doors that,
when opened, expose the entirety of the camlock switchboard enclosure envelope (excluding
tophat accessory).
B. Enclosure details: Steel, NEMA 250, Type 1, Top Entry, Front- and Rear-Accessible
Switchboards.
C. Camlock Switchboard Breaker: Insulated case circuit breakers, fixed mounted, three pole, 100%
rated. Circuit breakers rated or otherwise adjustable to 1200 amps and larger shall have an arc
energy reducing maintenance switch with electronic trip and status indication to reduce clearing
time per NEC 240.87.
D. Sections front and rear aligned.
E. Nominal System Voltage: 480Y/277V.
F. System Short Circuit Withstand and Interruption Rating: 65kA symmetrical meeting UL891
requirements or as shown on single line diagrams.
G. Enclosure Finish for Indoor Units: Factory-applied finish in manufacturer's standard finish over
a rust-inhibiting primer on treated metal surface.
H. Buses and Connections: Three phase, four wire unless otherwise indicated.
1. Phase- and Neutral Bus Material: Hard-drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity, silver-
plated, with copper feeder circuit-breaker line connections.
2. Line and Load Terminals: Insulated, rigidly braced, runback bus extensions, of same
material as through buses, equipped with compression connectors for outgoing and
incoming circuit conductors. Provide load terminals for future circuit-breaker positions at
full-ampere rating of circuit-breaker position.
3. Ground Bus: 1/4-by-2-inch-hard-drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity, equipped with
compression connectors for feeder and branch-circuit ground conductors. For busway
feeders, extend insulated equipment grounding cable to busway ground connection and
support cable at intervals in vertical run.
4. Main Phase Buses and Equipment Ground Buses: Uniform capacity for entire length of
switchboard's main and distribution sections. Provide for future extensions from both
ends.
5. Neutral Bus: 100 percent of the ampacity of phase buses unless otherwise indicated,
equipped with mechanical connectors for outgoing circuit neutral cables. Brace bus
extension for busway feeder neutral bus.
6. All compression connectors shall be copper, long barrel, 2-hole compression lugs.
I. Camlock Connectors: At least ten (10) sets of 400A female camlock receptacles per phase and
neutral with five (5) sets of 400A female camlock receptacles for ground.
1. Hubbell Part Number HBLFRBK or Amazon approved equivalent.
J. Camlock cable accessibility: Female camlock connectors will be accessible via an access door
that allows the main double doors to close completely while the camlock cables are in-use.
K. Control Power: Two sources (One (1) 120V AC 20-amp circuit from GPP panel and one (1)
120V AC 20-amp circuit from associated CUPS-backed panel) shall feed Camlock Switchboard
for control power to the EPMS system.
L. Provision for main power feeder to exit/enter the side of the generator enclosure above the
camlock switchboard doors.
E. Construction shall prevent mechanical, electrical, and thermal damage due to vibration,
overspeed up to 125 percent of rating, and heat during operation at 110 percent of rated
capacity.

point.
A. Description: Prefabricated walk-in enclosure with the following features:

13. Construction: Walk-in style, walls constructed of 14 gauge galvanized-steel outer skin,
metal-clad, integral A36 structural-steel-framed building, packaged complete with fuel
tank and generator set as an assembly, for one crane pick, other than roof-mounted ex-
haust which ships separately due to height.
14. Sound Attenuation: Maximum sound attenuation to be measured 23 feet from enclosure
and five feet above grade in a free field environment with generator at full load.
15. Structural Design and Anchorage: Refer to structural engineering documents and S-002
project structural drawing to determine wind load requirements and roof loads.
16. Space Heater: Thermostatically controlled and sized to prevent condensation.
17. Hinged Doors: Fully gasketed with 304 SS leaf hinges and fitted key lock chrome-plate.
heavy duty freezer-style latch/handle mechanism, with interior door-operator. Provide all
SS hardware, hold-opens, and overhead rain lips for rainwater run-off. Provide no less
than two 42” wide single-swing doors.
18. Ventilation: Enclosure air intake shall use Class A louvers (Ruskin part# EME3625DFL
or AWS approved equivalent) designed to mitigate water intrusion inside of the enclo-
sure.
19. Thermal Insulation: Provide 3” thick (4” thick if sound attenuation required) semi-rigid
mineral wool panels held in place with 22 gauge galvanized perforated liner screwed to
walls and ceiling with SS screws.
20. Pitched roof for rain water run-off.
23. Generator enclosure interior shall have non-slip surfaces. Submit details for approval.

27. Gravity backdraft dampers shall be supplied at the air discharge.
C. Generator Auxiliary Power Panel & Transformer: Provide a 480V 50 amp fused disconnect,
480:120V/208Y 30 kVA transformer and 120/208V Generator Power Panel with sufficient
circuits to power all internal generator needs, typically 100 amp panel. Circuits shall be supplied
to power battery charger(s), lights, receptacles and all other 120/208-volt loads as required by
the specification and enclosure design. The panel and all components that it powers to be
factory pre-wired. The contractor shall bring 480-volt external feed and connect at the generator
auxiliary power transformer primary disconnect.
arranged to illuminate controls and accessible interior to provide 45 foot-candles of
illumination. Minimum of one fixture shall be located close to each entrance / exit and provided
with 3-hour emergency battery backup. Luminaires shall be operated via switch at each entrance
/ exit with the battery backed up fixtures to function also as emergency fixtures. Light switch
F. Exterior Lights: Factory-wired, LED full cutoff fixture Hubbell part # LNC2-12L-RK-035-3-
PCU or Amazon approved equivalent arranged to adequately illuminate generator stair platform
at all doors and stair locations. LED driver shall be suitably rated for the high/low temperature
range for the region. Provide with integral button type photocell for dusk to dawn operation.
Full UL Listed combined units shall utilize Arcadia part # WPFC-27W-40K-W-P.
2.10 GROUNDING
rated load.
mation or failure.

2.12 COOLING SYSTEM
A. The low voltage generator set shall be equipped with a rail-mounted, engine-driven radiator
with blower fan and all accessories. The cooling system shall be sized to operate at full load
conditions and with the local N=20 ASHRAE design condition ambient air entering the
enclosure and shall also be configured to run partially when the generator is stationary and the
ambient temperature has risen above a set point. The generator set supplier is responsible for
providing a properly sized cooling system based on the enclosure static pressure restriction. The
radiator shall be selected to allow for minimum generator set footprint and minimum cooling
airflow.
B. A radiator as follows, is preferred: SF44.0CTS. Terms:

1. S: Stacked Core (no ‘S’ implies single core)
2. F: Fan on Radiator (no ‘F’ implies fan on engine)
3. CT: Serpentine Core
4. CV: Tube-Fin Core
5. CTD or CVD: Dual System (core not divided)
6. CTS or CVS: Split System (tank and core)
7. No ‘D’ or ‘S’ implies JWAC
C. The radiator shall be fitted with a coolant level sensor, with associated alarm circuit to the
generator control system.
D. Heat exhaust shroud must be provided, self-support in generator enclosed/container, as shown

in the image below. It must have a 50' termination height above grade. It is the
responsibility of the generator manufacturer to ensure that the radiator exhaust fan has sufficient
external static pressure to overcome this shroud.
2.13 EXHAUST SYSTEM
A. A residential grade silencer, companion flanges, and flexible stainless-steel exhaust fitting
properly sized shall be furnished and installed according to the manufacturer's recommendation.
The flexible connection to the engine shall be suitably lagged to prevent stray seepage of
exhaust gases and reduce stray heat. Mounting shall be provided by the low voltage generator
set supplier as shown on the drawings. The silencer shall be mounted so that its weight is not
supported by the engine nor will exhaust system growth due to thermal expansion be imposed
on the engine. Exhaust pipe size shall be sufficient to ensure that exhaust backpressure does not
exceed the maximum limitations specified by the engine manufacturer. The supplier to allow for
EPA ‘test point’ on all generators, exact location to be confirmed.
2.14 EXHAUST FLUE
A. The low voltage generator set supplier shall design a suitable flue that will (if applicable) be
fixed to a structure (of generator container) and be a total length so that the fumes from the
generator(s) do not have an adverse effect on the air quality being drawn into the associated data
halls as part of the cooling scheme. The total length of the flue will be determined by the air
quality modelling completed (2’above OA) as part of planning/zoning/building permitting
requirements for that particular site. All flues to have a low point drain for connection by others.

B. The exhaust flue shall contain the following elements:

1. Storm collar.
2. Aluminum counter flashing.
3. Appropriate expansion joints.
4. Integrated silencer.
5. Heavy grade brackets to support the system to the building structure.
6. 4 Hour fire rating.
7. Flue discharge drain.
C. The generator flue shall be of twin wall construction with internal liners and external casings.
The flue shall be constructed in sections suitable for erection on site and be provided with either
flange or spigot and socket type connections. The flue shall be complete with all necessary
guide- brackets, thrust-brackets and support frames suitable for fixing to the purchasers’
structural steelwork (in container). Flues must be designed to evacuate the products of
combustion using the natural buoyancy of the flue gases.
D. Flue Installation
1. The generator supplier shall be responsible for the installation of the generator flue.
E. Materials of Construction
1. The inner lining of the flue shall be 304 grade stainless steel.
2. The outer of the flue shall be either 304 grade stainless steel.
F. Flue Insulation
1. A minimum of 50 mm (2 inches) thermal insulation shall be provided between the liner
and casing to reduce the risk of condensation and acid attack and protect personnel from
exposure to heat.
G. Flue Dimensions
1. The generator supplier shall confirm flue diameter size. The generator flue outlet size
may give an indication to the flue size; however the generator supplier shall calculate
actual flue diameter when considering losses due to silencers and overall height of the
flue.
H. Flue Supports
1. The flue shall be supported at intervals along their length as recommended by the
supplier, inside of Shrouds. The Flue must be supported on the shroud of (radiator heat
duct) enclosure.
2. Flues and Shrouds terminate 2’ above OA intake louver (in facade).
I. Flue Accessories
1. The flue shall terminate with a tapered vent terminal to provide a weather protected vent
to atmosphere. The flue shall be bonded to the building lightning protection system and
provision for this shall be made for in the flue design.
2. A condensate drain outlet shall be provided at the base of the flue. Flue drain outlet shall
be manufactured with threaded end drains to which pipe-work can be attached to dispose
of any condensate build-up.
3. Bosses suitable for the installation of the monitoring of flue gas temperatures and flue gas
emissions levels shall be provided in the flue. Exact location of bosses should be
confirmed at time of order.

2.15 ENGINE ASPIRATION AND COOLING VENTILATION
A. The radiator cooling air and engine combustion air will be provided for via end inlet weather
louvres with bird mesh grills. Air inlets shall be complete with an internal removable inlet
splitter attenuator to ensure the generator meets the planning noise requirements as indicated
above.
B. The heated extract air will be expelled via a weathered exhaust air louvre located either at the
end of the generator enclosure or through a 90-degree turning duct and exits on the roof. Where
air is exhausted through the roof of the enclosure, a galvanized grid will be installed over the
aperture, with the end section being open to the elements. Drains will be provided in the extract
end only. A gravity louvre will be provided to stop water entering the engine section. An access
door into this area shall also be included. The generator ventilation outlet shall be provided with
noise attenuation as required to meet the environmental requirements as outlined.
2.16 AIR INLET AND EXHAUST LOUVRES
A. Air inlet and exhaust louvres shall be weathered to Class A according to EN 13030:2001. The
louvre frame and mounting structure are to be constructed of weather resistant aluminum to EN-
AW-5754. The inlet and exhaust louvre profiles shall be weather resistant aluminum to EN-
AW-

6060. Inlet and exhaust louvres to be complete with drainable outlets to remove any rain build-
up. The low voltage generator set supplier is to provide suitable louvre mounting detail.
2.17 SMOKE DETECTOR
A. The container must have an internal smoke detector, supplied by the generator manufacturer.
The system will be connected to the building central through a monitor module provided by the
installer of the fire center. Need to confirm with local codes if it is required
2.18 FINISHES
A. Indoor and Outdoor Enclosures and Components: RAL 9010 white finish over corrosion-
resistant pretreatment and compatible primer.
34. Test components and accessories furnished with installed unit that are not identical to
those on tested prototype to demonstrate compatibility and reliability.
35. Full load run with inlet air temperature at limits as mentioned in spec 40 deg C,
95%RH. All enclosure doors to be closed during testing.
36. Maximum power.
40. Safety shutdown.
42. Report factory test results within 10 days of completion of test and provide copy of fac-
tory test report with equipment delivery. Include in factory test report: pressure drop
across enclosure, coolant and oil temperatures in test data from #2 above.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
Un. Examine areas, equipment bases, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
performance.
Un. Comply with packaged engine-generator manufacturers' written installation and alignment

Un. Connect engine exhaust pipe to engine with flexible connector.
Systems."

and Cables."
Un. Identify system components according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical
Systems."


3.6 ONSITE TRAINING

SECTION 263213.2 – ENGINE HOUSE GENERATORS (3-PHASE, 4-WIRE)
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Specifications:

1.2 SUMMARY
1. 700KW, 480/277V, 3-Phase, Standby. (Considering all three QRO project sites are
located at an altitude around 6,000 feet)
following features:
1. Diesel engine.
1.3 DEFINITIONS

parameter.
for owner approval.
following:

Quality Management District by Owner. To comply with local codes NOM-ECOL-043
connection.



standards.
load.
any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified.
project resides in.
5. According to the seismic study provided by AECOM in QRO project areas, the seismic
zone for the three sites is SEISMIC ZONE B, and the IMPORTANCE FACTOR is 1.5
for the equipment anchor points

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260001-

E. Product Test Reports: Indicate test results compared with specified performance requirements,
version installed.

property boundaries due to sound emitted by generator set including; engine, engine exhaust,
study indicates that the system must be 75dBA at 23 feet (7 meters) Local code: NOM 081



electrical service.

3. Altitude: Sea level to 6,000 feet (1,900 meters).
1.9 COORDINATION
03.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. As specified in
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
following:

3. Cummins.
Un. Factory-assembled and -tested, engine-generator set.



of gravity.

address, and model and serial number of component.
load to full load.
load to full load.
system components.
2.3 ENGINE

appliances.
to source.
3. Fuel Filtering: Remove water and contaminants larger than 1 micron.
4. Primary Fuel Filter: Fuel water separators per manufacturer’s standard design.
5. Secondary Fuel Filter: Mounted on engine.

a. Rating: 50-psig maximum working pressure with coolant at 180 deg F, and non-
b. End Fittings: Flanges or steel pipe nipples with clamps to suit piping and equip-
ment connections.

enclosure section.
3. A dual independent microprocessor-based system measures back pressure and applies
temperature.
7. DPF shall incorporate a Hospital Grade Silencer with 35-42 dBA attenuation.
10. To comply with the local code NOM-043-SEMARNAT-1993 and NOM-ECOL-043
recharging.
in place.


a. Operation: Equalizing-charging rate of 20A shall be initiated automatically after

battery has lost charge until an adjustable equalizing voltage is achieved at battery
terminals. Unit shall then be automatically switched to a lower float-charging
mode and shall continue to operate in that mode until battery is discharged again.
variations in ambient temperature from minus 40 deg C to plus 60 deg C to prevent
overcharging at high temperatures and undercharging at low temperatures.
d. Ammeter and Voltmeter: Flush mounted in door. Meters shall indicate charging
rates.
providing low battery voltage indication on control and monitoring panel. Sense
high battery voltage and loss of ac input or dc output of battery charger. Either
condition shall close contacts that provide a battery-charger malfunction indication
at system control and monitoring panel.
B. Base-Mounted Fuel Oil Tank: Factory installed and piped, complying with UL 142 protected
fuel oil tank. Features include the following:
1. Tank Capacity:
a. QRO, SFO, CMH and IAD Clusters: 1500 gallons, with usable capacity at least
85% of actual. (Minimum useable fuel capacity for Run Time of 24 hours at full
load).
b. PDX Cluster: 1500 gallons, with usable capacity at least 85% of actual, or
approved alternate useable capacity for minimum of 24 hours run time at full load.
normal fuel level.


e. UL E150881
port.
d. Two (2) 2” spare NPT couplings in tank.

liters).
generator.
Connection Notes
requirements.


Connection Notes
allow
Tank Drain Spare 80mmØ (3”) connection to be provided at each end of the tank to allow
the tank to be pumped out.
g. design pressure.
4. Bracing
entry.
5. Support
fuel storage tank .

below.
7. Tank Testing
of the purchaser.
8. Fuel Supply
belly tank shall be suitably separated within the belly tank to avoid any hot spots
due to recirculation of fuel from the engine.
the

engine, this shall be a Racor 3 headed hot swappable fuel filter Model No: 791000
FHV.
150°C F and 8 bar.

13) Air vent screw
14) Sample valve
approval as part of the vendor bid submittal. A 1” sampling port shall be provided
off the fuel polisher pipework to allow for sampling of the belly tank fuel.

(0.1”) gasket.
14. Leak Detection
floor.
b. Gauge functions:



3. Earthing
4. Tank Vent
B. Operating and safety indications, protective devices, basic system controls, and engine guages
shall be grouped in a common control and monitoring panel mounted on the generator set.
Mounting method shall isolate the control panel from generator-set vibration.

quarterly basis.
E. Generator provide electrical power redundancy to the data center and are critical to ensure
leak status.
conditions.

F. Power Monitoring Architecture
CAT6 CAT6
Remote I/O ModbusTCP

Module Gateway
CAT6 (Belly Tank Fuel and

Remainder of Gen Enclosure Digital Statuses) RS-485
To Electrical Room
EPMS Panel
Genset Controller
1. Protocol Gateway
b. Modbus RTU to Modbus TCP converter
e. UL, CE, CSA certified for use globally
f. DIN Rail Mounted
g. 24VDC Power Supply
h. Gateway to interface with Generator Controller RS485 connection
i. Moxa MGate MB3180 or Approved Amazon Equivalent
2. Remote I/O Modules


polling simultaneously
e. Support all digital inputs on Fuel Oil System on one module. If more than one
module is required, units must support daisy chain topologies. Note: Refer to Fuel
Oil System Specification and SOO for required monitoring points
f. DIN Rail Mounted
g. Support Dry and Wet Contacts
h. 24VDC Power Supply
i. Moxa ioLogik E1210 or Approved Amazon Equivalent
j. Remote I/O module within Gen EPMS Panel:
3. Generator Controller
c. Analogue fuel monitoring must be provided for belly tank monitoring. Readings
shall be available via Modbus through Generator Controller. Mechanical Design
Engineering will need to provide direction on utilization of submersible or optical
sensors
gateway
e. As required by NFPA 110 for Level 1, the following points need to be available
from Generator Controller via Modbus RTU RS485:
- AC Voltmeter
- AC Ammeter
- AC Frequency meter
- DC Voltmeter (alternator battery charging)
- Engine-coolant temperature gage
- Running-time meter
- Ammeter-Voltmeter, phase selector switch(es)
- Generator-Voltage adjusting rheostat
- Start-Stop switch
- Overspeed shutdown
- Coolant high-temperature shutdown
- Coolant low-level shutdown
- Oil low-pressure shutdown
- Fuel tank derangement alarm
- Fuel tank high-level shutdown of fuel supply alarm
- Generator overload
- Generator over/under frequency, over/under voltage and over-cur-
rent protection
- Jacket heater alarm

- Louver position alarm

- Alternator heater alarm
- Battery charger alarm
- DPF (RYPOS) active alarm (where applicable)
b. IP31.
if required.
H. Control Power: The control power system shall be designed to eliminate the single point of
failure by using two source of control power derived externally and internally from the
generator control control panel.
1. 24VDC Power Supply
a. Quantity 2 per generator enclosure. One power supply has to be fed from a
UPS/Battery backed source and other source does not need to be fed from a
UPS/Battery backed source.
b. If leveraging internal generator enclosure battery bank as 24VDC source, no power
supply is needed for that specific source and it can be wired directly to the diode.
c. UL and IEC Certified.
d. Phoenix Contact P/N 2866776, 2938620 or Amazon approved equivalent.
2. Redundancy Module
a. Quantity 1 per gen enclosure.
b. UL and IEC Certified.
c. Phoenix Contact P/N 2907719 or Amazon approved equivalent.
I. Wiring / Network Connections

1. CAT6 cable
b. All CAT6 cables shall be blue in color
c. All CAT6 cables shall be factory terminated where feasible
d. All CAT6 cables shall be Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP)
e. CAT6 cables to not exceed a length of 100 meters
2. Serial Cable – RS485 connections
which is 1000m.
b. Overall foil and tinned copper braid shielding to allow for one end of the cable to
be connected to ground to reduce noise interface
c. Characteristic impedance of 120 Ohm and low capacitance of 12.8 or 12 pF/ft to
reduce signal reflection
d. Conductor direct resistance of 24 Ohm per 1000ft
e. 1 twisted pair for a 2 wire system with 4.8 twist per foot
f. PVC (Polyvinyl Chloride) outer jacket for standard application, plenum rated outer
jacket when used in plenum space

g. Insulation material should be PE (Polyethylene)

h. Attenuation of 0.60dB/100ft at 1 MHz and delay of 66%
i. Voltage rating of 300V RMS
degC to +80 degC
termination points.
l. Belden 9841 or Amazon Approved Equivalent
3. Wiring – Hardwired points
b. For wiring from terminal blocks to panel devices, only single conductor wiring is
permitted (SER connections)
device (Belly Tank Fuel connections)
d. White and or black jacketed wire is preferred. If a multiple wire jacket colour
scheme is to be used, the specific colour scheme will need to be pre-approved by
Amazon prior to panel construction
e. Each wire will be labelled per design drawings with heat shrinkable sleeves at each
end. Each label will be machine printed
f. All wiring will be contained in the Generator Enclosure panel or run in conduit.
The wiring will only be accessible at the termination points
g. PE insulated, unarmoured, LSF Instrumentation cable or Approved Amazon
Equivalent
J. Remote Alarm Annunciator: Comply with NFPA 99. An LED labeled with proper alarm
K. Emergency-Stop Switch: Mounted to generator control panel. Push button shall be protected
with UL 489.
a. 700W Unit: 1600A frame with 1250A sensor. (6,000 feet derating considered)
49. Tripping Characteristics: Adjustable long-time and short-time delay and instantaneous.
Adjustable ground fault protection.
51. Shunt Trip: Connected to trip breaker when generator set is shut down by other protec-
tive devices.

53. Provision for main power feeder to exit/enter to the side or rear of the generator
enclosure.
54. Circuit breaker termination shall be provided with bus bar provision to terminate
two- hole long barrel compression lugs with NEMA hole spacing.
B. Ground-Fault Protection:
57. Generator circuit breaker ground fault trip by integral trip unit. Integrate ground-fault
trip indication with other generator-set shutdown indications.
C. Generator Protector: Microprocessor-based unit shall continuously monitor current level in each
D. Ground-Fault Indication: Comply with NFPA 70, "Emergency System" signals for ground-fault.
E. Construction shall prevent mechanical, electrical, and thermal damage due to vibration, overspeed
up to 125 percent of rating, and heat during operation at 110 percent of rated capacity.

point.
A. Description: Vandal-resistant, sound-attenuating, weatherproof 14 gauge galvanized-steel

housing. Multiple panels shall be lockable and provide adequate access to components requiring
maintenance. Panels shall be removable by one person without tools. Instruments and controls
shall be mounted within enclosure.
1. Sound Attenuation: Maximum sound attenuation to be measured 23 feet from enclo-
sure and five feet above grade in a free field environment with generator at full load.
63. Structural Design and Anchorage: Comply with ASCE 7 for wind loads for wind loads
of up to 100mph and roof loading of 50 lbs/sq. ft.
64. Hinged Doors: With padlocking provisions.
65. Ventilation: Enclosure air intake to be designed for air velocity of 850-1000 fpm or as
recommended by the manufacturer to mitigate water intrusion inside of the enclosure.
66. Thermal Insulation: Manufacturer’s standard materials and thickness selected in coordi-
nation with space heater (if applicable) to maintain winter interior temperature within
operating limits required by engine generator components.
67. Pitched roof for rain water run-off
73. Gravity backdraft dampers shall be supplied at the air discharge
C. Generator Auxiliary Power Panel: Provide 208/120 volt, three phase, four-wire panelboard sized
to adequately power all internal generator needs, typically 100 amps. Provide required 208V
and 120V circuits to power generator block heater, lighting, battery charger(s), receptacles and
other 120-volt loads as required by the specification and enclosure design. The panel and all
components that it powers to be factory pre-wired. The contractor shall bring 208-volt external

feed and connect at the generator auxiliary power panel. If a Generator Auxiliary Power Panel
cannot be provided, the contractor shall provide all dedicated 208V and 120V internal generator
support circuits from an external source.
arranged to illuminate controls and accessible interior. Minimum of one fixture shall be located
close to each entrance / exit and permanently illuminated to provide 45 foot-candles of
illumination. These fixtures shall be provided with 3-hour emergency battery backup. The
remainder of the luminaires shall be operated via switch at each entrance / exit. Light switch
2.9 GROUNDING
rated load.
mation or failure.
2.11 SMOKE DETECTOR

un. The container must have an internal smoke detector, supplied by the generator man-
ufacturer. The system will be connected to the building central through a monitor
module provided by the installer of the fire center. Need to confirm with local
codes if it is required
2.12 FINISHES
A. Indoor and Outdoor Enclosures and Components: Manufacturer's standard white finish over
corrosion-resistant pretreatment and compatible primer.

80. Test components and accessories furnished with installed unit that are not identical
to those on tested prototype to demonstrate compatibility and reliability.
81. Full load run with inlet air temperature at limits as mentioned in spec 40 degC, 95%RH.
All enclosure doors to be closed during testing.
82. Maximum power.
86. Safety shutdown.
88. Report factory test results within 10 days of completion of test and provide copy of
factory test report with equipment delivery. Include in factory test report: pressure
drop across enclosure, coolant and oil temperatures in test data from #2 above.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Examine areas, equipment bases, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
performance.

A. Comply with packaged engine-generator manufacturers' written installation and alignment


A. Connect engine exhaust pipe to engine with flexible connector.
Systems."

and Cables."
A. Identify system components according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical

Systems."

3.6 ONSITE TRAINING


SECTION 263353.1 – HOUSE STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Specifications:

8. 260533 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems.
9. 260536 Cable Trays for Electrical Systems.
C. This section refers to the House Uninterruptable Power Supplies designated as “House UPS
#X#” or “HUPS #X#” throughout the construction documents. Refer to specification section
263353.3 “CRITICAL STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY” for equipment
specifications pertaining to the critical UPS systems, designated as “CUPS #X.
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Three-phase, on-line, double conversion, static-type, UPS units with the following
features:
a. Surge suppression.
b. Rectifier-charger.
c. Single UPS module
d. Input harmonics reduction.
e. Inverter.
f. Controls and indications.
g. UPS input cabinet.
h. Static bypass transfer switch.
i. UPS internal inverter input breaker (as required).
j. Remote UPS monitoring provisions.
k. Battery, battery control/monitoring system and battery disconnect device(s).

l. Maintenance bypass panel (with key interlocks).
B. The Uninterruptable Power Supply shall be purchased by Amazon, furnished by the equipment
vendor and installed by the awarded electrical contractor. All factory testing shall be carried out
by the UPS vendor as outlined in this specification. All testing of the installed UPS shall be by
the electrical contractor, with assistance from other testing parties as detailed in this
specification. All vendor provided testing and factory startup assistance shall be included in the
equipment purchase agreement as outlined in part 3 of this specification.
for owner approval.
D. Bidders shall provide an overall Compliance Statement confirming overall compliance with the
previously approved AWS master equipment submittals.
A. Product Data: For each type of UPS.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components

and profiles, and finishes for UPS.
2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished
specialties and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: For UPS.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting attachment details.

2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
connection.
3. Show access, workspace, and clearance requirements; details of control panels; and
battery arrangement.
4. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For UPS and battery equipment, from manufacturer.

D. Manufacturer Certificates: For each product, from manufacturer.
E. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.
F. Factory Test Reports: Comply with specified requirements.
G. Product Test Reports: Indicate test results compared with specified performance requirements,
H. Field quality-control reports.
I. Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's warranties showing compliance with Amazon master
purchase agreement.
J. Battery calculations: Provide beginning and end of life battery calculations showing equipment
meets the required run times identified in this specification.
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For UPS units to include in emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals.
1. UPS and Battery Cabinet Ventilation Filters: One complete set(s).
A. Power Quality Specialist Qualifications: A registered professional electrical engineer or

engineering technician, currently certified by the National Institute for Certification in
Engineering Technologies, NICET Level 4, minimum, experienced in performance testing UPS
installations and in performing power quality surveys similar to that required in "Performance
Testing" Article.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by
C. UL Compliance: Listed and labeled under UL 1778 by an NRTL.

1.8 WARRANTY
A. As specified in
2.1 OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Automatic operation includes the following:

1. Normal Conditions (Double Conversion, IGBT): Load is supplied with power flowing
from the normal power input terminals, through the rectifier-charger and inverter, with
the battery connected in parallel with the rectifier-charger output.
2. Abnormal Supply Conditions: If normal supply deviates from specified and adjustable
voltage, voltage waveform, or frequency limits, the battery supplies energy to maintain
constant, regulated inverter power output to the load without switching or disturbance.
3. Power Failure: If normal power fails, energy supplied by the battery through the inverter
continues supply-regulated power to the load without switching or disturbance.
4. When power is restored at the normal supply terminals of the system, controls shall
automatically synchronize the inverter with the external source before transferring the
load. The rectifier-charger shall supply power to the load through the inverter and
simultaneously recharge the battery.
5. If the battery becomes discharged and normal supply is available, the rectifier-charger
shall charge the battery. The rectifier-charger shall automatically shift to float-charge
mode on reaching full charge.
6. If any element of the UPS system fails and power is available at the normal supply
terminals of the system, the static bypass transfer switch shall switch the load to the
normal ac supply circuit without disturbance or interruption.
7. The inverter shall sustain steady-state overload conditions of up to 110 percent of rated
full-load current for equal or more than 60 seconds, up to 125 percent for equal or more
than 30 seconds and up to 150 percent for equal or more than 10 seconds in normal
operation.
8. Should overloads persist past the time limitations, the automatic static transfer switch
shall switch the load to the bypass output of the UPS. When the fault has cleared, the
static bypass transfer switch shall return the load to the UPS system.
9. If the battery is disconnected, the UPS shall supply power to the load from the normal
supply with no degradation of its regulation of voltage and frequency of the output bus.
10. UPS overcurrent protection shall be provided via internal components. Operation of
external devices (breakers, contactors, etc.) shall not be permitted.
B. Manual operation includes the following:
1. Turning the inverter off causes the static bypass transfer switch to transfer the load
directly to the normal ac supply circuit without disturbance or interruption.
2. Turning the inverter on causes the static bypass transfer switch to transfer the load to the
inverter.
C. Maintenance Bypass/Isolation Switch Operation: Switch is interlocked so it cannot be operated

unless the static bypass transfer switch is in the bypass mode (including if the UPS is turned
off).
Device provides manual selection among the three conditions in subparagraphs below without
interrupting supply to the load during switching:
1. Full Isolation: Load is supplied, bypassing the UPS. Normal UPS ac input circuit, static
bypass transfer switch, and UPS load terminals are completely disconnected from
external circuits.
2. Maintenance Bypass: Load is supplied, bypassing the UPS. UPS ac supply terminals are
energized to permit operational checking, but system load terminals are isolated from the
load.
3. Normal: Normal UPS ac supply terminals are energized and the load is supplied through
either the static bypass transfer switch and the UPS rectifier-charger and inverter, or the
battery and the inverter.
D. UPS Bypass cabinet: Selects between online UPS source and external maintenance bypass via
keyed interlocked system.
1. Interlocked UPS output and maintenance bypass breakers via solenoid key release system
and circuit breaker keyed operation.
2. Input breakers for UPS invertor and internal bypass feed.
3. Operation per paragraph “C” in this specification section.
E. Environmental Conditions: The UPS shall be capable of operating continuously in the following
environmental conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of operating
capability, except battery performance:
1. Ambient Temperature for Electronic Components: 32 to 95 deg F.

2. Ambient Battery Temperature: 32 to 95 deg F.
3. Relative Humidity: 5 to 95 percent, noncondensing.
4. Altitude: Sea level to 6000 feet.
5. Conformal Coating: All UPS control PCBs at risk of exposure to corrosive airborne
pollutants shall be treated with a conformal coating to protect against corrosive pollutant
build and damage. UPS vendor shall submit information on which control boards are
conformally coated and which are not, with the reason for the choice made detailed.
Follow IPC and FTF standards for conformal coating process. UPS air filters may not
form the sole method of protection from environmental pollution.
A. Seismic Performance: UPS shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined
according to ASCE/SEI 7. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without
separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified.
B. The UPS shall perform as specified in this article while supplying rated full-load current,
composed of any combination of linear and nonlinear load, up to 100 percent nonlinear load
with a maximum load crest factor of 3.0, under the following conditions or combinations of the
following conditions:
1. Inverter is switched to battery source.

2. Steady-state ac input voltage deviates up to plus or minus 10 percent from nominal voltage.

3. Steady-state input frequency deviates up to plus or minus 5 percent from nominal

frequency.
4. THD of input voltage is up to 15 percent with a maximum crest factor of 3.0, and the
largest single harmonic component is a maximum of 5 percent of the fundamental value.
5. Load is 30 percent unbalanced continuously.
C. Minimum Duration of Supply: If battery is sole energy source supplying 100% rated full-load
UPS current, duration of supply is:
1. End of battery life: 4 minutes.

2. Beginning of battery life: As required to meet end of life value.
End of life value as calculated per IEEE 1632 at the environmental criteria detailed elsewhere
in this specification. Manufacturer shall submit beginning and end of life run time values.
D. Input Voltage Tolerance: System steady-state and transient output performance remains within
specified tolerances when steady-state ac input voltage varies plus 10 percent and minus 10
percent from nominal voltage.
E. Overall UPS Efficiency: Equal to or greater than 95 percent at 100 percent load, and 96 percent
at 50 percent load, without use of static bypass mode.
F. Input Frequency Tolerance: 60Hz, minimum of minus and plus 8 percent.
G. Maximum Acoustical Noise: 85dB, "A" weighting, emanating from any UPS component under
any condition of normal operation, measured 36 inches (1 meter) from nearest surface of
component enclosure.
H. Maximum Energizing Inrush Current: Soft start linear input current rise to 100 percent over a 1-
to 40-second period, factory set at 30 seconds.
I. Output Frequency: 60 Hz, plus or minus 0.8 percent over the full range of input voltage, load,
and battery voltage.
J. Limitation of harmonic distortion of input current to the UPS shall be as follows:
1. Description: Rectifier-charger circuits shall limit THD to 6 percent, maximum, at rated

full-load UPS current, for power sources with X/R ratio between 2 and 30. Provide tuned
harmonic filter if required to meet harmonic distortion limit.
K. Maximum Harmonic Content of Output-Voltage Waveform: 6 percent rms total and 3 percent
rms for any single harmonic, for 100 percent rated nonlinear load current with a load crest factor
of 3.0.
L. Minimum Overload Capacity of UPS at Rated Voltage: 125 percent of rated full load for 30
seconds, and 150 percent for 10 seconds all operating modes.
M. Maximum Output-Voltage Transient Excursions from Rated Value: For the following
instantaneous load changes, stated as percentages of rated full UPS load, voltage shall remain

within stated percentages of rated value and recover to, and remain within, plus or minus 2
percent of that value within 50 ms:
1. 50 Percent: Plus or minus 3 percent.

3. Loss of AC Input Power: Plus or minus 1 percent.
4. Restoration of AC Input Power: Plus or minus 1 percent.
M. Input Power Factor: A minimum of 0.95 lagging when supply voltage and current are at
nominal rated values and the UPS is supplying rated full-load current without additional filters.
N. EMI Emissions:
1. Comply with IEC 62040-2 Category C3.
2.3 UPS SYSTEMS
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
2. Vertiv Inc.
3. Mitsubishi Electric Automation, Inc.
4. Toshiba Corporation; Industrial Systems.
5. Schneider Electric.
B. System Configuration: UPS System shall consist of a single UPS module configuration. Each
module shall have an individual cabinet mounted battery system with a battery disconnect
switch for each cabinet. The module shall be connected to a UPS maintenance bypass panel
including solenoid key release interlocks to switch to maintenance bypass mode via closed
transition.
1. System Voltage: 480 volt, three phase, four wire input and 480 volt, three phase, four
wire output.
2. System Capacity (as indicated on the drawings/scope of work):
a. Minimum of 100kVA/100kW at unity power factor or increased kVA rating as

needed to achieve kW rating listed at output power factor.
C. Electronic Equipment: Solid-state devices. Devices include rectifier-charger, inverter, static

bypass transfer switch, and system controls.
D. Enclosures: Comply with NEMA 250, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Control Assemblies: Mount on modular plug-ins, readily accessible for maintenance.
F. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by

G. Seismic-Restraint Design: UPS assemblies, subassemblies, and components (and fastenings and
supports, mounting, and anchorage devices for them) shall be designed and fabricated to
withstand static and seismic forces.
H. UPS Cabinet Ventilation: Redundant fans or blowers draw in ambient air near the bottom of
cabinet and discharge it near the top rear.
I. Output Circuit Neutral Bus: Conductor, and Terminal Ampacity: Rated phase current times a
multiple of 1.73, minimum.
2.4 SURGE SUPPRESSION
A. Protect internal UPS components from surges that enter at each ac power input connection
including main disconnect switch, static bypass transfer switch. Protect rectifier-charger,
inverter, controls, and output components.
1. Use factory-installed surge suppressors tested according to IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE
C62.41.2, Category B.
2. Alternate surge protection may be provided by utilizing a PFC rectifier. Incoming AC
power shall be converted to a regulated DC voltage by an IGBT power factor correction
(PFC) rectifier. The PFC rectifier shall meet all requirements outlined in IEEE C62.41.1
as outlined in the 2.4.A.1 above for surge suppression.
2.5 RECTIFIER-CHARGER
A. Capacity: Adequate to supply the inverter during rated full output load conditions and
simultaneously recharge the battery from fully discharged condition to 95 percent of full charge
within 10 times the rated discharge time for duration of supply under battery power at full load.
B. Output Ripple: Limited by output filtration to less than 0.5 percent of rated current, peak to peak.
C. Control Circuits: Immune to frequency variations within rated frequency ranges of normal and
emergency power sources.
1. Response Time: Field adjustable for maximum compatibility with local generator-set
power source.
D. Battery Float-Charging Conditions: Comply with battery manufacturer's written instructions for
battery terminal voltage and charging current required for maximum battery life. The battery
charger shall be matched to the battery type supplied.
2.6 INVERTER
A. Description: Pulse-width modulated, IGBT with sinusoidal output. Include a bypass phase
synchronization window adjustment to optimize compatibility with local engine-generator-set
power source.

2.7 CONTROLS AND INDICATIONS
A. Description: Group displays, indications, and basic system controls on a common control panel
on front of UPS enclosure.
B. Minimum displays, indicating devices, and controls include those in lists below. Provide
sensors, transducers, terminals, relays, and wiring required to support listed items. Alarms
include audible signals and visual displays.
C. Indications: Plain-language messages on a digital LCD.
1. Quantitative indications shall include the following:
a. Input voltage, each phase, line to line.

b. Input current, each phase, line to line.
c. Bypass input voltage, each phase, line to line.
d. Bypass input frequency.
e. System output voltage, each phase, line to line.
f. System output current, each phase.
g. System output frequency.
h. DC bus voltage.
i. Battery current and direction (charge/discharge).
j. Elapsed time discharging battery.
2. Basic status condition indications shall include the following:
a. Normal operation.
b. Load-on bypass.
c. Load-on battery.
d. Inverter off.
e. Major Alarm condition.
f. Minor Alarm condition.
3. Alarm indications shall include the following:
a. Bypass ac input overvoltage or undervoltage.

b. Bypass ac input overfrequency or underfrequency.
c. Bypass ac input and inverter out of synchronization.
d. Bypass ac input wrong-phase rotation.
e. Internal frequency standard in use.
f. Battery system alarm.
g. Control power failure.
h. Fan failure.
i. UPS overload.
j. Battery-charging control faulty.
k. Input overvoltage or undervoltage.
l. Input circuit breaker tripped.
m. Input wrong-phase rotation.
n. Approaching end of battery operation.
o. Battery undervoltage shutdown.

p. Maximum battery voltage.

q. Inverter fuse blown.
r. Inverter transformer overtemperature.
s. Inverter overtemperature.
t. Static bypass transfer switch overtemperature.
u. Inverter power supply fault.
v. Identification of faulty inverter section/leg.
w. Inverter output overvoltage or undervoltage.
x. UPS overload shutdown.
y. Inverter current sensor fault.
z. Inverter output contactor open.
aa. Inverter current limit.
bb. Battery cell over temperature
cc. Battery cell fault.
4. Controls shall include the following:
a. Inverter on-off.
b. UPS start.
c. Battery test.
d. Alarm silence/reset.
e. Output-voltage adjustment.
D. Dry-form "C" contacts shall be available for remote indication of the following conditions:
1. UPS on battery.
2. UPS on-line.
3. UPS load-on bypass (static or maintenance).
4. UPS in alarm condition.
5. UPS off.
E. Emergency Power off Switch Provision: Capable of receiving emergency power off signal via
remote emergency power off (EPO) switch by means of activation by external dry contacts.
2.8 STATIC BYPASS TRANSFER SWITCH
A. Description: Solid-state switching device providing uninterrupted transfer with a contactor or

electrically operated circuit breaker to automatically provide electrical isolation for the switch.
B. Switch Rating: Continuous duty at the rated full-load UPS current with overload capability.
Switch shall be fully rated. Parallel switches to achieve full rating are not permitted.
C. Protection: UPS shall have built-in protection against: surges, sags and overcurrent from the AC
source.

2.9 MAINTENANCE BYPASS/ISOLATION SWITCH
A. Description: Manually operated arrangement of switching circuit breaker devices with key
interlocked arranged to route the flow of power to the load around the rectifier-charger, inverter,
and static bypass transfer switch.
1. Switch shall be electrically and mechanically interlocked to prevent interrupting power to

the load when switching to bypass mode.
2. Switch shall electrically isolate other UPS components to permit safe servicing.
3. Solenoid key release system and keyed circuit breakers for selection between inverter
output and external maintenance bypass supplied to load. Key interlocked such that
inverter and bypass cannot supply load simultaneously.
4. 4 breaker bypass cabinet to supply power to UPS module inverter and static bypass, as
well as maintenance bypass breaker and UPS isolation breaker.
B. Comply with NEMA PB 2 and UL 891.
C. Switch Rating: Continuous duty at rated full UPS load current. Switch shall be fully rated.
Parallel switches to achieve full rating are not permitted.
D. Mounting Provisions: Separate wall- or floor-mounted cabinet. Cabinet may be integrated into
UPS enclosure.
E. Key interlock requires unlocking maintenance bypass/isolation switch before switching from
normal position with key that is released only when the UPS is bypassed by the static bypass
transfer switch. Lock is designed specifically for mechanical and electrical component
interlocking.
F. Include Remote I/O module and AUX (Auxiliary) breaker contact monitoring in UPS input and
bypass boards. Each breaker position (open/closed) shall report back as open contact to I/O
module when breaker is open, and contact shall close when breaker is closed. Additionally the
Tripped status for each breaker shall also be monitored. When breaker is in tripped state the
contact shall be open, and inversely shall be closed when the breaker is not tripped. Remote I/O
to monitor digital inputs for remote visibility, allow Ethernet connectivity for secure web
application viewing and a minimum of 5 ModbusTCP masters. Allowable models include Moxa
IOLogik E1210 series or Amazon approved equivalent
2.10 REMOTE MONITORING BY ELECTRICAL POWER MONITORING SYSTEM (EPMS)
A. Description: Communication module in unit control panel provides capability for remote
monitoring of status, parameters, and alarms specified in "Controls and Indications" Article. The
remote computer and the connecting signal wiring are not included in this Section. Include the
following features:
1. Connectors and network interface units for data transmission via RS-485, Ethernet, or
Modbus TCP interface.
2. Software designed for control and monitoring of UPS functions and to provide on-screen
explanations, interpretations, diagnosis, action guidance, and instructions for use of
monitoring indications and development of meaningful reports. Permit storage and
analysis
of power-line transient records. Designs for Windows applications, software, and

computer are not included in this Section.
3. Software and Hardware: Compatible with that specified in the Current Revision of the
Controls Specifications
2.11 BATTERY
A. Description: Seal, Lithium battery cabinets, factory assembled in separate matching

cabinets, complete with individual battery disconnect switches.
1. Battery cabinets must be easily maintained with individual batteries easily tested and
replaced upon failure.
2. Battery interconnects shall be premanufacturerd quick connectors provided by battery
vendor.
3. Battery control system shall be capable of reporting out per cell information and alarms
via RS485, TCP/IP and dry contacts (for major and minor alarm notification).
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:
1. Samsung
2. Toshiba
3. LG
C. Battery Cabinet.
1. Top panels shall have knock-outs for cable routing. Provide top hat where required for
feeder sizes shown on drawings.
2. Access to circuit breakers shall be possible without any tools per UL 1778.
3. Battery cabinet shall be UL9540A tested.
D. Battery cabinet system.
1. Each system is to include pre-wired inter-cell cabling to series-connect the battery string.
2. Cabling to be included between main terminal and DC breaker.
E. Seismic-Restraint Design: Battery racks, cabinets, assemblies, subassemblies, and components

(and fastenings and supports, mounting, and anchorage devices for them) shall be designed and
fabricated to withstand static and seismic forces as required by the local building code.
F. Battery cabinet disconnect and overcurrent protection device.
1. DC molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB) with thermal-magnetic trip.
a. Comply with UL489, with full interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents.
b. Minimum AIC rating: 20kA.
c. Position auxiliary contacts.
G. Cell end voltage: 3.0V at listed environmental criteria given in section 2.1.

H. Battery cabinet control power: Monitor dual source battery cabinet power supply source health.
Provide contacts for external monitoring of power source health and disconnect position
(disconnect position may be monitored by load side source power health).
A. Factory test complete UPS system before shipment. Use simulated battery testing. Include the
following:
1. Test and demonstration of all functions, controls, indicators, sensors, and protective
devices.
a. Full-load test.
b. Transient-load response test.
c. Overload test.
d. Power failure test.
B. Observation of Test: Give 14 days' advance notice of tests and provide opportunity for Owner's
representative to observe tests at Owner's choice.
C. Report test results. Include the following data:
1. Description of input source and output loads used. Describe actions required to simulate
source load variation and various operating conditions and malfunctions.
2. List of indications, parameter values, and system responses considered satisfactory for
each test action. Include tabulation of actual observations during test.
3. List of instruments and equipment used in factory tests.
4. Provide factory test report with equipment delivery.
A. Manufacturer to include allowance for FWT as follows: Equipment manufactured for Phase 1 of
each build, first of a kind equipment (Design Changes, Component Changes, Firmware
Changes) and whenever the owner deems necessary.
PART 3 - RELIABILITY REQUIREMENTS1
A. Annual Failure Rate (AFR) Requirement: The AFR calculated using field failures (LOR Events
after commissioning) should be less than 2.0% for a minimum of 15 years for the UPS.
Definition of failure to calculate AFR is below:
1. Load loss event

2. Any event leading to by-pass
3. UPS running at reduced capacity
B. HALT Requirement: The manufacturer must perform HALT (Highly Accelerated Life Test)
test during design phase of the UPS.

C. Temperature Requirement:
1. For UPS, 0°C to 40°C during operation2, -20°C to 40°C during storage3
2. Battery Temperature Requirement & Life Expectancy: Li-ion battery (0°C to 30°C during
operation (10 Years of life expectancy during operation), -20°C to 40°C during storage 3
(Li ion Battery)
D. Humidity Requirement: 5% to 95% RH (non-condensing) during operation 2 & 5% to 95% RH

during storage3:
1. Humidity Test Requirements: If vendors have not performed the tests described below,
they can share details of alternate equivalent testing performed during design of the UPS
a. Reliability testing (1000 hours or more) for humidity must be performed with the
UPS unit Powered, with a minimum UPS load of 80% at 40°C & 95% RH (non-
condensing).
b. Reliability testing for storage must be performed at 40°C & 95% RH for a
minimum of 1000 hours (Unpowered). The UPS must be functioning without any
anomalies and within specifications after the test.
c. Refer the temperature-humidity cycle test defined in the EQT Test Section (J) below.
40 cycles (960 Hours) of the profile below must be performed.
E. Conformal Coating: Polyurethane/Acrylated Polyurathane or Parylene conformal coating as per

latest revision of conformal coating standard included in IPC-A-610, Acceptability of Electronic
Assemblies. The above mentioned conformal coating materials provide protection from
humidity, external contaminants like dust, corrosive gases and chemical contaminants.
1. If all PCBA’s of the UPS are not conformal coated, vendor must provide justification to
AWS for the omission and the risk analysis of not coating certain PCBAs.
F. Tin Whisker Mitigation Requirement: Comply with iNEMI & JEDEC recommendations during
product design to reduce the risk of tin whiskers.
G. Package Shock & Vibration Test Requirement: The packaged product must pass the packaged
shock and vibration testing (Telecordia/ASTM or other equivalent test) to qualify for the
transportation stresses.
H. Packaging Requirements: The packaging for the UPS must have desiccant in the packaging to
avoid risk of damage due to humidity. The packaging must have tilt and shock sensor to detect
any damage during transportation. For packages shipped via sea, sea-worthy packaging must be
used.
I. EQT (Equipment Qualification Test) Requirement: This test is to test only one unit (first of its
kind (model) at AWS). Below is the test profile, humidity must be maintained at 95% (non-
condensing) at all temperature conditions. UPS must be powered and at a minimum 80%
loaded. UPS history logs from before and after the test must be shared with AWS and a test
report with all the pertinent test details must be provided. Below are the steps of the single cycle
of the test. Total 2 cycles (48 Hours or 2 days) must be run for EQT.
1. Start at 20⁰C
2. Ramp-up Temperature to 40⁰C (Temp Ramp Time: 1 Hour, Stay at 40 ⁰C for 8 Hours)

3. Ramp-down Temperature to 10⁰C (Temp Ramp Time: 1.5 Hour, Stay at 10 ⁰C for 3 Hours)
4. Ramp-up Temperature to 40⁰C (Temp Ramp Time: 1.5 Hour, Stay at 40 ⁰C for 8 Hours)
5. Ramp-down Temperature to 20⁰C (Temp Ramp Time: 1 Hour)
1
J. Vendors must provide documentation/reports of the tests and requirements
2
K. When the unit is powered & operational
L. 3
During the storage at the UPS vendor and during transportation
PART 4 - EXECUTION
1.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
conditions affecting performance of the UPS.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
C. Verify installation conditions are representative of the conditions used in the coordination
studies for the electrical system. Provide fuse protection according to Section 262813 "Fuses" if
required for coordination with UPS overcurrent protective device requirements.
1.2 INSTALLATION
B. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways and cable trays except within consoles, cabinets,
desks, and counters.
1. Comply with requirements for cable trays specified in Section 260536 "Cable Trays for
2. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Section 260533
"Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems."
C. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess
and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Install lacing bars and
distribution spools.
D. Equipment Mounting: Install UPS on concrete base. Comply with requirements for concrete
base specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated,
install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around the full perimeter of concrete
base 6 inches (150 mm) from the outer edge of the base.
2. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete
base and anchor into structural concrete floor.
3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,
instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
E. Maintain minimum clearances and workspace at equipment according to manufacturer's written

instructions and NFPA 70.
F. Connections: Interconnect system components. Make connections to supply and load circuits
according to manufacturer's wiring diagrams unless otherwise indicated. Apply oxide inhibitor
on battery terminals.
1.3 GROUNDING
A. Comply with NFPA 70 requirements for connecting to grounding main ground bar. Comply
with requirements in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
1.4 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for
identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
1. Identify each battery cell individually.
1.5 BATTERY EQUALIZATION
A. Equalize charging of battery cells according to manufacturer's written instructions. Record

individual-cell voltages.
A. Manufacturer to execute field quality control, startup services and burn-in in accordance with
specification 019113 General Commissioning Requirements section, inclusive of levels 1, 2, 3
and other testing.
1.7 FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTING
A. Manufacturer to support commissioning activities in accordance with specification section

019113 General Commissioning Requirements.
B. Level 4 System Testing: include allowance for 12 hours per unit

C. Level 5 Final Integrated Systems Testing: include allowance for 8 hours per project phase
3.8 DEMONSTRATION
D. Manufacturer to engage with the Owner’s representative to coordinate training for personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain the UPS. (Provide a minimum of 4 hours onsite training per
building, to be coordinated by Operations)

SECTION 263353.3 – CRITICAL STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Specifications:

9. 260536 Cable Trays for Electrical Systems.
C. This section refers to the Critical Uninterruptable Power Supplies designated as “Critical UPS
#X#” or “CUPS #X#” throughout the construction documents. Refer to specification section
263353.1 “HOUSE STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY” for equipment
specifications pertaining to the house UPS systems, designated as “HUPS #X.
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Three-phase, on-line, double conversion, static-type, UPS units with the following
features:
a. Surge suppression.
b. Rectifier-charger.
c. Single UPS module
d. Input harmonics reduction.
e. Inverter.
f. Controls and indications.
g. UPS input cabinet.
h. Static bypass transfer switch.
i. UPS internal inverter input breaker (as required).
j. Remote UPS monitoring provisions.
k. Battery, battery control/monitoring system and battery disconnect device(s).
l. Maintenance bypass panel (with key interlocks).

B. The Uninterruptable Power Supply shall be purchased by Amazon, furnished by the equipment
vendor and installed by the awarded electrical contractor. All factory testing shall be carried out
by the UPS vendor as outlined in this specification. All testing of the installed UPS shall be by
the electrical contractor, with assistance from other testing parties as detailed in this
specification. All vendor provided testing and factory startup assistance shall be included in the
equipment purchase agreement as outlined in part 3 of this specification.
for owner approval.
D. Bidders shall provide an overall Compliance Statement confirming overall compliance with the
previously approved AWS master equipment submittals.
A. Product Data: For each type of UPS.

and profiles, and finishes for UPS.
B. Shop Drawings: For UPS.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting attachment details.

connection.
3. Show access, workspace, and clearance requirements; details of control panels; and
battery arrangement.
C. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For UPS and battery equipment, from manufacturer.


D. Manufacturer Certificates: For each product, from manufacturer.
E. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.
F. Factory Test Reports: Comply with specified requirements.
G. Product Test Reports: Indicate test results compared with specified performance requirements,
H. Field quality-control reports.
I. Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's warranties showing compliance with Amazon master
purchase agreement.
J. Battery calculations: Provide beginning and end of life battery calculations showing equipment
meets the required run times identified in this specification.
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For UPS units to include in emergency, operation, and
1. UPS and Battery Cabinet Ventilation Filters: One complete set(s).
A. Power Quality Specialist Qualifications: A registered professional electrical engineer or

engineering technician, currently certified by the National Institute for Certification in
Engineering Technologies, NICET Level 4, minimum, experienced in performance testing UPS
installations and in performing power quality surveys similar to that required in "Performance
Testing" Article.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by
C. UL Compliance: Listed and labeled under UL 1778 by an NRTL.

1.8 WARRANTY
A. As specified in
2.1 OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Automatic operation includes the following:

1. Normal Conditions (Double Conversion, IGBT): Load is supplied with power flowing
from the normal power input terminals, through the rectifier-charger and inverter, with
the battery connected in parallel with the rectifier-charger output.
2. Abnormal Supply Conditions: If normal supply deviates from specified and adjustable
voltage, voltage waveform, or frequency limits, the battery supplies energy to maintain
constant, regulated inverter power output to the load without switching or disturbance.
3. Power Failure: If normal power fails, energy supplied by the battery through the inverter
continues supply-regulated power to the load without switching or disturbance.
4. When power is restored at the normal supply terminals of the system, controls shall
automatically synchronize the inverter with the external source before transferring the
load. The rectifier-charger shall supply power to the load through the inverter and
simultaneously recharge the battery.
5. If the battery becomes discharged and normal supply is available, the rectifier-charger
shall charge the battery. The rectifier-charger shall automatically shift to float-charge
mode on reaching full charge.
6. If any element of the UPS system fails and power is available at the normal supply
terminals of the system, the static bypass transfer switch shall switch the load to the
normal ac supply circuit without disturbance or interruption.
7. The inverter shall sustain steady-state overload conditions of up to 110 percent of rated
full-load current for equal or more than 60 seconds, up to 125 percent for equal or more
than 30 seconds and up to 150 percent for equal or more than 10 seconds in normal
operation.
8. Should overloads persist past the time limitations, the automatic static transfer switch
shall switch the load to the bypass output of the UPS. When the fault has cleared, the
static bypass transfer switch shall return the load to the UPS system.
9. If the battery is disconnected, the UPS shall supply power to the load from the normal
supply with no degradation of its regulation of voltage and frequency of the output bus.
10. UPS overcurrent protection shall be provided via internal components. Operation of
external devices (breakers, contactors, etc.) shall not be permitted.
B. Manual operation includes the following:
1. Turning the inverter off causes the static bypass transfer switch to transfer the load
directly to the normal ac supply circuit without disturbance or interruption.
2. Turning the inverter on causes the static bypass transfer switch to transfer the load to the
inverter.
C. Maintenance Bypass/Isolation Switch Operation: Switch is interlocked so it cannot be operated

unless the static bypass transfer switch is in the bypass mode (including if the UPS is turned
off).
Device provides manual selection among the three conditions in subparagraphs below without
interrupting supply to the load during switching:
1. Full Isolation: Load is supplied, bypassing the UPS. Normal UPS ac input circuit, static
bypass transfer switch, and UPS load terminals are completely disconnected from
external circuits.
2. Maintenance Bypass: Load is supplied, bypassing the UPS. UPS ac supply terminals are
energized to permit operational checking, but system load terminals are isolated from the
load.
3. Normal: Normal UPS ac supply terminals are energized and the load is supplied through
either the static bypass transfer switch and the UPS rectifier-charger and inverter, or the
battery and the inverter.
D. UPS Bypass cabinet: Selects between online UPS source and external maintenance bypass via
keyed interlocked system.
1. Interlocked UPS output and maintenance bypass breakers via solenoid key release system
and circuit breaker keyed operation.
2. Input breakers for UPS invertor and internal bypass feed.
3. Operation per paragraph “C” in this specification section.
E. Environmental Conditions: The UPS shall be capable of operating continuously in the following
environmental conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of operating
capability, except battery performance:
1. Ambient Temperature for Electronic Components: 32 to 95 deg F.

2. Ambient Battery Temperature: 32 to 95 deg F.
3. Relative Humidity: 5 to 95 percent, noncondensing.
4. Altitude: Sea level to 6000 feet.
5. Conformal Coating: All UPS control PCBs at risk of exposure to corrosive airborne
pollutants shall be treated with a conformal coating to protect against corrosive pollutant
build and damage. UPS vendor shall submit information on which control boards are
conformally coated and which are not, with the reason for the choice made detailed.
Follow IPC and FTF standards for conformal coating process. UPS air filters may not
form the sole method of protection from environmental pollution.
A. Seismic Performance: UPS shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined
according to ASCE/SEI 7. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without
separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified.
B. The UPS shall perform as specified in this article while supplying rated full-load current,
composed of any combination of linear and nonlinear load, up to 100 percent nonlinear load
with a maximum load crest factor of 3.0, under the following conditions or combinations of the
following conditions:
1. Inverter is switched to battery source.

2. Steady-state ac input voltage deviates up to plus or minus 10 percent from nominal voltage.

3. Steady-state input frequency deviates up to plus or minus 5 percent from nominal

frequency.
4. THD of input voltage is up to 15 percent with a maximum crest factor of 3.0, and the
largest single harmonic component is a maximum of 5 percent of the fundamental value.
5. Load is 30 percent unbalanced continuously.
C. Minimum Duration of Supply: If battery is sole energy source supplying 100% rated full-load
UPS current, duration of supply is:
1. End of battery life: 4 minutes.

2. Beginning of battery life: As required to meet end of life value.
End of life value as calculated per IEEE 1632 at the environmental criteria detailed elsewhere
in this specification. Manufacturer shall submit beginning and end of life run time values.
D. Input Voltage Tolerance: System steady-state and transient output performance remains within
specified tolerances when steady-state ac input voltage varies plus 10 percent and minus 10
percent from nominal voltage.
E. Overall UPS Efficiency: Equal to or greater than 95 percent at 100 percent load, and 96 percent
at 50 percent load, without use of static bypass mode.
F. Input Frequency Tolerance: 60Hz, minimum of minus and plus 8 percent.
G. Maximum Acoustical Noise: 85dB, "A" weighting, emanating from any UPS component under
any condition of normal operation, measured 36 inches (1 meter) from nearest surface of
component enclosure.
H. Maximum Energizing Inrush Current: Soft start linear input current rise to 100 percent over a 1-
to 40-second period, factory set at 30 seconds.
I. Output Frequency: 60 Hz, plus or minus 0.8 percent over the full range of input voltage, load,
and battery voltage.
J. Limitation of harmonic distortion of input current to the UPS shall be as follows:
1. Description: Rectifier-charger circuits shall limit THD to 6 percent, maximum, at rated

full-load UPS current, for power sources with X/R ratio between 2 and 30. Provide tuned
harmonic filter if required to meet harmonic distortion limit.
K. Maximum Harmonic Content of Output-Voltage Waveform: 6 percent rms total and 3 percent
rms for any single harmonic, for 100 percent rated nonlinear load current with a load crest factor
of 3.0.
L. Minimum Overload Capacity of UPS at Rated Voltage: 125 percent of rated full load for 30
seconds, and 150 percent for 10 seconds all operating modes.

A. Maximum Output-Voltage Transient Excursions from Rated Value: For the following
instantaneous load changes, stated as percentages of rated full UPS load, voltage shall remain
within stated percentages of rated value and recover to, and remain within, plus or minus 2
percent of that value within 50 ms:

3. Loss of AC Input Power: Plus or minus 1 percent.
4. Restoration of AC Input Power: Plus or minus 1 percent.
N. Input Power Factor: A minimum of 0.95 lagging when supply voltage and current are at
nominal rated values and the UPS is supplying rated full-load current without additional filters.
O. EMI Emissions:
1. Comply with IEC 62040-2 Category C3.
2.3 UPS SYSTEMS
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
2. Vertiv Inc.
3. Mitsubishi Electric Automation, Inc.
4. Toshiba Corporation; Industrial Systems.
5. Schneider Electric.
B. System Configuration: UPS System shall consist of a single UPS module configuration. Each
module shall have an individual cabinet mounted battery system with a battery disconnect
switch for each cabinet. The module shall be connected to a UPS maintenance bypass panel
including solenoid key release interlocks to switch to maintenance bypass mode via closed
transition.
1. System Voltage: 208 volt, three phase, four wire input and 208 volt, three phase, four
wire output.
2. System Capacity (as indicated on the drawings/scope of work):
a. Minimum of 20kVA/20kW at unity power factor or increased kVA rating as

needed to achieve kW rating listed at output power factor.
C. Electronic Equipment: Solid-state devices. Devices include rectifier-charger, inverter, static

bypass transfer switch, and system controls.
D. Enclosures: Comply with NEMA 250, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Control Assemblies: Mount on modular plug-ins, readily accessible for maintenance.
F. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by

G. Seismic-Restraint Design: UPS assemblies, subassemblies, and components (and fastenings and
supports, mounting, and anchorage devices for them) shall be designed and fabricated to
withstand static and seismic forces.
H. UPS Cabinet Ventilation: Redundant fans or blowers draw in ambient air near the bottom of
cabinet and discharge it near the top rear.
I. Output Circuit Neutral Bus: Conductor, and Terminal Ampacity: Rated phase current times a
multiple of 1.73, minimum.
2.4 SURGE SUPPRESSION
A. Protect internal UPS components from surges that enter at each ac power input connection
including main disconnect switch, static bypass transfer switch. Protect rectifier-charger,
inverter, controls, and output components.
1. Use factory-installed surge suppressors tested according to IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE
C62.41.2, Category B.
2. Alternate surge protection may be provided by utilizing a PFC rectifier. Incoming AC
power shall be converted to a regulated DC voltage by an IGBT power factor correction
(PFC) rectifier. The PFC rectifier shall meet all requirements outlined in IEEE C62.41.1
as outlined in the 2.4.A.1 above for surge suppression.
2.5 RECTIFIER-CHARGER
A. Capacity: Adequate to supply the inverter during rated full output load conditions and
simultaneously recharge the battery from fully discharged condition to 95 percent of full charge
within 10 times the rated discharge time for duration of supply under battery power at full load.
B. Output Ripple: Limited by output filtration to less than 0.5 percent of rated current, peak to peak.
C. Control Circuits: Immune to frequency variations within rated frequency ranges of normal and
emergency power sources.
1. Response Time: Field adjustable for maximum compatibility with local generator-set
power source.
D. Battery Float-Charging Conditions: Comply with battery manufacturer's written instructions for
battery terminal voltage and charging current required for maximum battery life. The battery
charger shall be matched to the battery type supplied.
2.6 INVERTER
A. Description: Pulse-width modulated, IGBT with sinusoidal output. Include a bypass phase
synchronization window adjustment to optimize compatibility with local engine-generator-set
power source.

2.7 CONTROLS AND INDICATIONS
A. Description: Group displays, indications, and basic system controls on a common control panel
on front of UPS enclosure.
B. Minimum displays, indicating devices, and controls include those in lists below. Provide
sensors, transducers, terminals, relays, and wiring required to support listed items. Alarms
include audible signals and visual displays.
C. Indications: Plain-language messages on a digital LCD.
1. Quantitative indications shall include the following:
a. Input voltage, each phase, line to line.

b. Input current, each phase, line to line.
c. Bypass input voltage, each phase, line to line.
d. Bypass input frequency.
e. System output voltage, each phase, line to line.
f. System output current, each phase.
g. System output frequency.
h. DC bus voltage.
i. Battery current and direction (charge/discharge).
j. Elapsed time discharging battery.
2. Basic status condition indications shall include the following:
a. Normal operation.
b. Load-on bypass.
c. Load-on battery.
d. Inverter off.
e. Major Alarm condition.
f. Minor Alarm condition.
3. Alarm indications shall include the following:
a. Bypass ac input overvoltage or undervoltage.

b. Bypass ac input overfrequency or underfrequency.
c. Bypass ac input and inverter out of synchronization.
d. Bypass ac input wrong-phase rotation.
e. Internal frequency standard in use.
f. Battery system alarm.
g. Control power failure.
h. Fan failure.
i. UPS overload.
j. Battery-charging control faulty.
k. Input overvoltage or undervoltage.
l. Input circuit breaker tripped.
m. Input wrong-phase rotation.
n. Approaching end of battery operation.
o. Battery undervoltage shutdown.

p. Maximum battery voltage.

q. Inverter fuse blown.
r. Inverter transformer overtemperature.
s. Inverter overtemperature.
t. Static bypass transfer switch overtemperature.
u. Inverter power supply fault.
v. Identification of faulty inverter section/leg.
w. Inverter output overvoltage or undervoltage.
x. UPS overload shutdown.
y. Inverter current sensor fault.
z. Inverter output contactor open.
aa. Inverter current limit.
bb. Battery cell over temperature
cc. Battery cell fault.
4. Controls shall include the following:
a. Inverter on-off.
b. UPS start.
c. Battery test.
d. Alarm silence/reset.
e. Output-voltage adjustment.
D. Dry-form "C" contacts shall be available for remote indication of the following conditions:
1. UPS on battery.
2. UPS on-line.
3. UPS load-on bypass (static or maintenance).
4. UPS in alarm condition.
5. UPS off.
E. Emergency Power off Switch Provision: Capable of receiving emergency power off signal via
remote emergency power off (EPO) switch by means of activation by external dry contacts.
2.8 STATIC BYPASS TRANSFER SWITCH
A. Description: Solid-state switching device providing uninterrupted transfer with a contactor or

electrically operated circuit breaker to automatically provide electrical isolation for the switch.
B. Switch Rating: Continuous duty at the rated full-load UPS current with overload capability.
Switch shall be fully rated. Parallel switches to achieve full rating are not permitted.
C. Protection: UPS shall have built-in protection against: surges, sags and overcurrent from the AC
source.

2.9 MAINTENANCE BYPASS/ISOLATION SWITCH
A. Description: Manually operated arrangement of switching circuit breaker devices with key
interlocked arranged to route the flow of power to the load around the rectifier-charger, inverter,
and static bypass transfer switch.
1. Switch shall be electrically and mechanically interlocked to prevent interrupting power to

the load when switching to bypass mode.
2. Switch shall electrically isolate other UPS components to permit safe servicing.
3. Solenoid key release system and keyed circuit breakers for selection between inverter
output and external maintenance bypass supplied to load. Key interlocked such that
inverter and bypass cannot supply load simultaneously.
4. 4 breaker bypass cabinet to supply power to UPS module inverter and static bypass, as
well as maintenance bypass breaker and UPS isolation breaker.
B. Comply with NEMA PB 2 and UL 891.
C. Switch Rating: Continuous duty at rated full UPS load current. Switch shall be fully rated.
Parallel switches to achieve full rating are not permitted.
D. Mounting Provisions: Separate wall- or floor-mounted cabinet. Cabinet may be integrated into
UPS enclosure.
E. Key interlock requires unlocking maintenance bypass/isolation switch before switching from
normal position with key that is released only when the UPS is bypassed by the static bypass
transfer switch. Lock is designed specifically for mechanical and electrical component
interlocking.
F. Include Remote I/O module and AUX (Auxiliary) breaker contact monitoring in UPS input and
bypass boards. Each breaker position (open/closed) shall report back as open contact to I/O
module when breaker is open, and contact shall close when breaker is closed. Additionally the
Tripped status for each breaker shall also be monitored. When breaker is in tripped state the
contact shall be open, and inversely shall be closed when the breaker is not tripped. Remote I/O
to monitor digital inputs for remote visibility, allow Ethernet connectivity for secure web
application viewing and a minimum of 5 ModbusTCP masters. Allowable models include Moxa
IOLogik E1210 series or Amazon approved equivalent
2.10 REMOTE MONITORING BY ELECTRICAL POWER MONITORING SYSTEM (EPMS)
A. Description: Communication module in unit control panel provides capability for remote
monitoring of status, parameters, and alarms specified in "Controls and Indications" Article. The
remote computer and the connecting signal wiring are not included in this Section. Include the
following features:
1. Connectors and network interface units for data transmission via RS-485, Ethernet, or
Modbus TCP interface.
2. Software designed for control and monitoring of UPS functions and to provide on-screen
explanations, interpretations, diagnosis, action guidance, and instructions for use of
monitoring indications and development of meaningful reports. Permit storage and
analysis
of power-line transient records. Designs for Windows applications, software, and

computer are not included in this Section.
3. Software and Hardware: Compatible with that specified in the Current Revision of the
Controls Specifications
2.11 BATTERY
A. Description: Seal, Lithium battery cabinets, factory assembled in separate matching

cabinets, complete with individual battery disconnect switches.
1. Battery cabinets must be easily maintained with individual batteries easily tested and
replaced upon failure.
2. Battery interconnects shall be premanufacturerd quick connectors provided by battery
vendor.
3. Battery control system shall be capable of reporting out per cell information and alarms
via RS485, TCP/IP and dry contacts (for major and minor alarm notification).
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:
1. Samsung
2. Toshiba
3. LG
C. Battery Cabinet.
1. Top panels shall have knock-outs for cable routing. Provide top hat where required for
feeder sizes shown on drawings.
2. Access to circuit breakers shall be possible without any tools per UL 1778.
1. Battery cabinet shall be UL9540A tested.
D. Battery cabinet system.
1. Each system is to include pre-wired inter-cell cabling to series-connect the battery string.
2. Cabling to be included between main terminal and DC breaker.
E. Seismic-Restraint Design: Battery racks, cabinets, assemblies, subassemblies, and components

(and fastenings and supports, mounting, and anchorage devices for them) shall be designed and
fabricated to withstand static and seismic forces as required by the local building code.
F. Battery cabinet disconnect and overcurrent protection device.
1. DC molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB) with thermal-magnetic trip.
a. Comply with UL489, with full interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents.
b. Minimum AIC rating: 20kA.
c. Position auxiliary contacts.
G. Cell end voltage: 3.0V at listed environmental criteria given in section 2.1.

H. Battery cabinet control power: Monitor dual source battery cabinet power supply source health.
Provide contacts for external monitoring of power source health and disconnect position
(disconnect position may be monitored by load side source power health).
A. Factory test complete UPS system before shipment. Use simulated battery testing. Include the
following:
1. Test and demonstration of all functions, controls, indicators, sensors, and protective
devices.
a. Full-load test.
b. Transient-load response test.
c. Overload test.
d. Power failure test.
B. Observation of Test: Give 14 days' advance notice of tests and provide opportunity for Owner's
representative to observe tests at Owner's choice.
C. Report test results. Include the following data:
1. Description of input source and output loads used. Describe actions required to simulate
source load variation and various operating conditions and malfunctions.
2. List of indications, parameter values, and system responses considered satisfactory for
each test action. Include tabulation of actual observations during test.
3. List of instruments and equipment used in factory tests.
4. Provide factory test report with equipment delivery.
A. Manufacturer to include allowance for FWT as follows: Equipment manufactured for Phase 1 of
each build, first of a kind equipment (Design Changes, Component Changes, Firmware
Changes) and whenever the owner deems necessary.
PART 3 - RELIABILITY REQUIREMENTS1
A. Annual Failure Rate (AFR) Requirement: The AFR calculated using field failures (LOR Events
after commissioning) should be less than 2.0% for a minimum of 15 years for the UPS.
Definition of failure to calculate AFR is below:
1. Load loss event

2. Any event leading to by-pass
3. UPS running at reduced capacity
B. HALT Requirement: The manufacturer must perform HALT (Highly Accelerated Life Test)
test during design phase of the UPS.

C. Temperature Requirement:
1. For UPS, 0°C to 40°C during operation2, -20°C to 40°C during storage3
2. Battery Temperature Requirement & Life Expectancy: Li-ion battery (0°C to 30°C during
operation (10 Years of life expectancy during operation), -20°C to 40°C during storage 3
(Li ion Battery)
D. Humidity Requirement: 5% to 95% RH (non-condensing) during operation 2 & 5% to 95% RH

during storage3:
1. Humidity Test Requirements: If vendors have not performed the tests described below,
they can share details of alternate equivalent testing performed during design of the UPS
a. Reliability testing (1000 hours or more) for humidity must be performed with the
UPS unit Powered, with a minimum UPS load of 80% at 40°C & 95% RH (non-
condensing).
b. Reliability testing for storage must be performed at 40°C & 95% RH for a
minimum of 1000 hours (Unpowered). The UPS must be functioning without any
anomalies and within specifications after the test.
c. Refer the temperature-humidity cycle test defined in the EQT Test Section (J) below.
40 cycles (960 Hours) of the profile below must be performed.
E. Conformal Coating: Polyurethane/Acrylated Polyurathane or Parylene conformal coating as per

latest revision of conformal coating standard included in IPC-A-610, Acceptability of Electronic
Assemblies. The above mentioned conformal coating materials provide protection from
humidity, external contaminants like dust, corrosive gases and chemical contaminants.
1. If all PCBA’s of the UPS are not conformal coated, vendor must provide justification to
AWS for the omission and the risk analysis of not coating certain PCBAs.
F. Tin Whisker Mitigation Requirement: Comply with iNEMI & JEDEC recommendations during
product design to reduce the risk of tin whiskers.
G. Package Shock & Vibration Test Requirement: The packaged product must pass the packaged
shock and vibration testing (Telecordia/ASTM or other equivalent test) to qualify for the
transportation stresses.
H. Packaging Requirements: The packaging for the UPS must have desiccant in the packaging to
avoid risk of damage due to humidity. The packaging must have tilt and shock sensor to detect
any damage during transportation. For packages shipped via sea, sea-worthy packaging must be
used.
I. EQT (Equipment Qualification Test) Requirement: This test is to test only one unit (first of its
kind (model) at AWS). Below is the test profile, humidity must be maintained at 95% (non-
condensing) at all temperature conditions. UPS must be powered and at a minimum 80%
loaded. UPS history logs from before and after the test must be shared with AWS and a test
report with all the pertinent test details must be provided. Below are the steps of the single cycle
of the test. Total 2 cycles (48 Hours or 2 days) must be run for EQT.
1. Start at 20⁰C
2. Ramp-up Temperature to 40⁰C (Temp Ramp Time: 1 Hour, Stay at 40 ⁰C for 8 Hours)

3. Ramp-down Temperature to 10⁰C (Temp Ramp Time: 1.5 Hour, Stay at 10 ⁰C for 3 Hours)
4. Ramp-up Temperature to 40⁰C (Temp Ramp Time: 1.5 Hour, Stay at 40 ⁰C for 8 Hours)
5. Ramp-down Temperature to 20⁰C (Temp Ramp Time: 1 Hour)
1
J. Vendors must provide documentation/reports of the tests and requirements
2
K. When the unit is powered & operational
L. 3
During the storage at the UPS vendor and during transportation
PART 4 - EXECUTION
1.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
conditions affecting performance of the UPS.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
C. Verify installation conditions are representative of the conditions used in the coordination
studies for the electrical system. Provide fuse protection according to Section 262813 "Fuses" if
required for coordination with UPS overcurrent protective device requirements.
1.2 INSTALLATION
B. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways and cable trays except within consoles, cabinets,
desks, and counters.
1. Comply with requirements for cable trays specified in Section 260536 "Cable Trays for
2. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Section 260533
"Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems."
C. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess
and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Install lacing bars and
distribution spools.
D. Equipment Mounting: Install UPS on concrete base. Comply with requirements for concrete
base specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated,
install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around the full perimeter of concrete
base 6 inches (150 mm) from the outer edge of the base.
2. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete
base and anchor into structural concrete floor.
3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,
instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
E. Maintain minimum clearances and workspace at equipment according to manufacturer's written

instructions and NFPA 70.
F. Connections: Interconnect system components. Make connections to supply and load circuits
according to manufacturer's wiring diagrams unless otherwise indicated. Apply oxide inhibitor
on battery terminals.
1.3 GROUNDING
A. Comply with NFPA 70 requirements for connecting to grounding main ground bar. Comply
with requirements in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
1.4 IDENTIFICATION
1. Identify each battery cell individually.
1.5 BATTERY EQUALIZATION
A. Equalize charging of battery cells according to manufacturer's written instructions. Record

individual-cell voltages.
A. Manufacturer to execute field quality control, startup services and burn-in in accordance with
specification 019113 General Commissioning Requirements section, inclusive of levels 1, 2, 3
and other testing.
1.7 FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTING
A. Manufacturer to support commissioning activities in accordance with specification section

019113 General Commissioning Requirements.
B. Level 4 System Testing: include allowance for 12 hours per unit

C. Level 5 Final Integrated Systems Testing: include allowance for 8 hours per project phase
3.9 DEMONSTRATION
D. Manufacturer to engage with the Owner’s representative to coordinate training for personnel to

SECTION 263533 - POWER FACTOR CORRECTION EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes 700 KVAR 100 KVARfactor correction equipment rated 600 V and less.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Capacitor Element: The basic component of a capacitor unit consisting of two electrodes
separated by a dielectric.
B. Power Capacitor: An assembly of dielectric and electrodes in a container (case), with terminals
brought out, that is intended to introduce capacitance into an electric power circuit. The term
"power capacitor" is used interchangeably with "capacitor" or "capacitor unit" throughout the
Section and the standards referenced in this Section.
C. Power Capacitor Bank: An assembly at one location of capacitors and all necessary accessories,
such as switching equipment, protective equipment, controls, and so forth, required for a
complete operating installation. It may be a collection of components assembled at the operating
site or may include one or more piece(s) of factory-assembled equipment.
A. Product Data: For each type of product.

and profiles, and finishes for power capacitor banks.
B. Shop Drawings: For automatic power factor correction units.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting details.

connection.

4. Wire Termination Diagrams and Schedules: Identify terminals and wiring designations
and color-codes to facilitate installation, operation, and maintenance. Indicate
recommended types, wire sizes, and circuiting arrangements for field-installed wiring,
and show circuit protection features. Differentiate between manufacturer- and field-
installed wiring.
A. Qualification Data: For testing agency.
A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels re-
quired; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar

to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as
well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. As applicable, procure products
from manufacturers able to meet qualification requirements, warranty requirements, and
technical or factory-authorized service representative requirements.
C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated

for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient
production capacity to produce required units.
D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, applying, or as-

sembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose
work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to

practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering
services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for
installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar in material, design, and extent
to those indicated for this Project.
A. sting Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the expe-
rience and capability to conduct testing and inspection indicated, as documented according to
ASTM E329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where re-
quired by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.
1 NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7.
2 NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory

Accreditation Program
B. nufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manu-

facturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of
manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for
this Pro- ject.

C. ctory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of man-

ufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's
products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.
D. econstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing for
compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the fol-
lowing:
1. Contractor responsibilities include the following:
a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction.
b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing
results to prevent delaying the Work.
c. Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and
methods of construction indicated for the completed Work.
d. When testing is complete, remove test specimens and test assemblies, and
mockups; do not reuse products on Project.
2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, in-
spection, and similar quality-assurance service to Architect, Owner Construction Man-
ager, and Commissioning Authority with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and
inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with
or deviates from the Contract Documents.
E.ckups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each
form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using ma-
terials indicated for the completed Work:
1. Build mockups of size indicated.
2. Build mockups in location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect or
Owner Construction Manager.
3. Notify Architect and Owner Construction Manager seven days in advance of dates and
times when mockups will be constructed.
4. Employ supervisory personnel who will oversee mockup construction. Employ workers
that will be employed to perform same tasks during the construction at Project.
5. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
6. Obtain Architect's and Owner Construction Manager's approval of mockups before
starting corresponding work, fabrication, or construction.
a. Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup.
7. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judg-
ing the completed Work.
8. Demolish and remove mockups when directed unless otherwise indicated.

B. Seismic Qualification Data: Certificates, for power capacitor banks, accessories, and
components, from manufacturer.
1. Basis of Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment: Identify center of gravity and locate and
describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
C. Product Test Reports: Factory production test reports.
D. Evaluation Reports: Energy loss statement for each type of power capacitor.
E. Field quality-control reports.
F. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For equipment to include in emergency, operation, and
1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data,"

include the following:
a. Lists of spare parts and replacement components recommended for storage at

Project site.
b. Detailed instructions covering operation under both normal and abnormal
conditions.
c. Hard copies of manufacturer's operating specifications, user's guides for software
and hardware, and PDF files on a USB storage device of hard-copy submittal.
1. Fuses: One for every three of each type and rating, but no fewer than three of each.
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Accredited by NETA.

1.9 WARRANTY
As specified in MPA
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
B. Comply with IEEE 18.
1. The measured capacitance of a unit shall not vary more than minus zero percent to plus
10 percent of the nominal value.
A. Seismic Performance: Power factor correction equipment shall withstand the effects of earthquake
motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7 Requirements for a Seismic Zone B.
B. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the
device when subjected to the seismic forces specifiedService Conditions: Power capacitors
equipment suitable for the following conditions:
1. Operating Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 115 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 46 deg C).
2. Maximum Altitude: 6000 feet (1800 m).
3. Humidity: Zero to 95 percent, noncondensing.
2.3 POWER CAPACITOR
Un. Comply with UL 810.
B. Capacitor Element: Dry metallized-dielectric, self-healing type. Each cell shall be encapsulated in
thermosetting resin inside a plastic container.
C. Rupture Protection: Pressure-sensitive circuit interrupter for each cell.
D. Losses: Maximum dielectric losses of 0.2 W/kVAr, and a total loss of 0.45 W/kVAr.

2.4 MOTOR-MOUNTED POWER CAPACITOR BANK
A. Description: One power capacitor per phase, factory wired, ready for field connection to external
circuits at a single set of pressure terminals. Comply with UL 810.
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. EATON
2. SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC
3. SIEMENS
C. Fuses: Current-limiting, noninterchangeable type; factory installed in each phase and located
within the equipment enclosure. Performance requirements include the following:
1. Interrupting Capacity: 200,000 A.

2. Fuse Ratings and Characteristics: As recommended by power capacitor manufacturer.
3. Indicator Lamp for Each Fuse: Connect to illuminate when fuse has opened, but is still in
place, and locate so it is visible from outside the enclosure.
D. Discharge Device: Factory installed and wired.
E. Enclosure: NEMA 250, steel or aluminum, arranged to contain the fluid leakage from capacitor
cells; factory equipped with mounting brackets suitable for type of mounting indicated.
1. Indoor Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 12 or as indicated.
2.5 AUTOMATIC POWER CAPACITOR BANK
1. EATON
2. SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC
3. SIEMENS
B. Description: Factory-assembled unit, consisting of power capacitors, inductors, contactors,

controls, and accessories, factory installed in independent enclosures. Comply with UL 508A.
C. Performance Requirements: Controls permit selection of a target power factor, adjustable to any
value between unity and 0.95 lagging. Controls continuously sense the power factor on circuits
being corrected and, when the power factor differs from the target setting for more than 10
seconds, operate a contractor to switch a power capacitor bank into or out of the circuit.
Contactors are opened or closed as required to bring the corrected circuit power factor closest to
the high (unity) end of target setting. Provide number of switching steps indicated in the Three-
Phase Power Capacitor Bank Scheduleon Drawings.
D. Disconnect and Overcurrent Protective Device: Comply with requirements in Section 262816
"Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers." Operable from outside the enclosure to disconnect
the unit, the cover may be opened only when the disconnect switch is open.

1. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker: Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame
sizes 250 A and larger.
2. Type HD fusible or non-fusible
switch. 3.
E. Fuses for Protection of Power Capacitor Bank: Current limiting; listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency as complying with UL 248-12 for Class R and Class RK
fuses, or UL 249-15 for Class T fuses, as recommended by manufacturer; providing an
interrupting capacity of 200kA. Provide blown fuse indicator light and "push-to-test" for each
fuse on the bank cover.
1. Spare-Fuse Cabinet: Compartmented steel box.
un. Comply with equipment identification requirements in Section 260553

F. Controls: Solid-state, microprocessor-based controls; control power shall be from the low-
voltage power conductors associated with the bank. Include the following:
1. Reactive Current Control: Field programmable:
a. Target power factor selector switch, with setting range from 70 to 95 percent lagging
b. Time delay between steps with setting range from 5 seconds to 20 minutes to
reduce hunting and allow for voltage decay.
2. Current Transformers: Type, configuration, and ratio recommended by manufacturer to

suit sensing and mounting conditions.
3. Undervoltage Relay: Interrupts switching of power capacitors and disconnects the power
capacitors for power-supply interruptions longer than 15 minutes.
4. "Advance" and "Retard" push buttons on the control panel to permit manually controlled
power capacitor bank switching.
G. Contactors: Three pole; rated for the repetitive high-inrush-switching duty in the power
capacitor application. Comply with NEMA ICS 2.
H. Discharge Devices: Factory installed and wired for each switched group of power capacitors.
I. Inductors: Air-core type, rated to limit switching surges to be within contactor ratings.Precharge
Power Capacitor Circuit: Resistive, precharge circuit to charge power capacitors prior to
switching and to limit switching surges to within contactor ratings.
J. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 1 Type 12, steel or aluminum, with hinged door and hand-
operated catch. Door shall be interlocked with controls or main circuit breaker to de-energize
power capacitors when door is opened.
1. Factory Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel over corrosion-resistant treatment or

primer coat.
2. Comply with equipment identification requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for

K. Local Display: LED or LCD type, mounted in door of enclosure, indicating the following:
1. Target and actual power factors accurate to plus or minus 1 percent of reading.
2. Steps energized.
3. Step reconnection delay.
4. Real and reactive currents.
5. Voltage total harmonic distortion.
6. Alarm codes.
L. System Alarms: Alarm relay and local display indication of the following conditions:
1. Low power factor.

2. Leading power factor.
3. Frequency not detected.
4. Overcurrent.
5. Overvoltage.
6. Overtemperature.
7. Excessive voltage total harmonic distortion.
8. Power capacitor overload.
9. Loss of capacitance.
M. Remote Monitoring Components: Sensors, associated communication modules, and network

interface units, matched to and compatible with electrical power monitoring and control
network. Communication module shall have capability to transmit the following data to remote
monitoring devices:
1. System in alarm.
2. Power factor set point.
3. Corrected power factor.
4. Number of power capacitor bank steps activated.
2.6 ARC-FLASH WARNING LABELS
A. Arc Flash Study: Comply with requirements in Section 260573.19 "Arc-Flash Hazard Analysis."
Produce a 3.5-by-5-inch ((76-by-127-mm))thermal transfer label of high-adhesion polyester for
each work location included in the analysis.
B. Electrical Identification: Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical
Systems." Produce a 3.5-by-5-inch (76-by-127-mm)thermal transfer label of high- adhesion
polyester for each work location included in the analysis. Labels shall be machine printed, with
no field-applied markings.
1. The label shall have an orange header with the wording, "WARNING, ARC-FLASH
HAZARD," and shall include the following information taken directly from the arc-flash
hazard analysis:
un. Location designation.

b. Nominal voltage.
c. Flash protection boundary.

d. Hazard risk category.

e. Incident energy.
f. Working distance.
g. Engineering report number, revision number, and issue date.
Un. Factory test power factor correction equipment before shipment. Include the following:
1. Routine power capacitor production tests, including short-time overvoltage, capacitance,

leak, discharge resistor, loss determination, and fuse capability tests.
2. Functional test of all operations, controls, indicators, sensors, and protective devices.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. On delivery of power capacitor bank, and prior to unloading, inspect equipment for damage.
1. Verify that tie rods and chains are undamaged and tight and that blocking and bracing are
tight.
2. Verify that there is no evidence of load shifting in transit and that readings from
transportation shock recorders, if equipped, are within manufacturer's recommendations.
3. Examine power capacitor bank for external damage, including dents or scratches in doors
and sill, and termination provisions.
4. Compare power capacitor bank and accessories received with the bill of materials to
verify that the shipment is complete. Verify that bank and accessories comply with
manufacturer's quotation and Shop Drawings. If the shipment is incomplete or does not
comply with Project requirements, immediately notify manufacturer in writing.
5. Unload power capacitor bank, observing packing label warnings and handling instructions.
6. Open compartment doors and inspect components for damage or displaced parts, loose or
broken connections, cracked or chipped insulators, bent mounting flanges, dirt or foreign
material, and water or moisture.
B. Handling:
1. Handle power capacitor bank according to manufacturer's recommendations; avoid

damage to the enclosure, termination compartments, base, frame, capacitors, and internal
components. Do not subject bank to impact, jolting, jarring, or rough handling.
2. Transport power capacitor bank upright, to avoid internal stresses on equipment
mounting assemblies. Do not tilt or tip bank.
3. Use spreaders or a lifting beam to obtain a vertical lift and to protect power capacitor
bank from straps bearing against the enclosure. Lifting cable pull angles may not be
greater than 15 degrees from vertical.
C. Storage: Store power capacitor bank with compartment doors closed.

D. Examine roughing-in of conduits and grounding systems to verify the following:
1. Wiring entries comply with layout requirements.

2. Entries are within conduit-entry tolerances specified by manufacturer.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with equipment installation requirements in NECA 1.
B. For installation as part of switchboard, comply with the installation requirements of that Section.
C. Install freestanding equipment on concrete bases. Cast-in-place concrete is specified in Section

033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
1. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Section 260548.16

"Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
2. Maintain minimum workspace according to manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Install arc-flash labels as required by NFPA 70.
E. Connect remote monitoring communication module to electrical power monitoring and control
data network through appropriate network interface unit.
F. Identify components according to Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
A. Perform tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
a. Inspect physical and mechanical condition.

b. Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding, and clearances.
c. Verify that unit is clean.
d. Verify that capacitors are electrically connected in their specified configuration.
e. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the two
following methods:
1) Use a low-resistance ohmmeter.

a) Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar

connections. Investigate values that deviate from those of similar
bolted connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value.
2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated

torque-wrench method according to manufacturer's published data or NETA
ATS, Table 100.12.
a) Bolt-torque levels shall be according to manufacturer's published

data. In the absence of manufacturer's published data, use NETA
ATS, Table 100.12.
2. Infrared Inspection: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final
Acceptance, perform infrared inspection of the electrical power connections of the power
capacitor bank. Perform infrared inspection during periods of maximum possible loading.
Remove all necessary covers prior to the inspection.
a. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of

each switchgear 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.
b. Instrument: Inspect distribution systems with imaging equipment capable of
detecting a minimum temperature difference of 1 deg. C at 30 deg. C.
c. Record of Infrared Inspection: Prepare a certified report that identifies the testing
technician and equipment used and that lists the following results:
1) Description of equipment to be tested.

2) Discrepancies.
3) Temperature difference between the area of concern and the reference area.
4) Probable cause of temperature difference.
5) Areas inspected. Identify inaccessible and unobservable areas and equipment.
6) Load conditions at time of inspection.
7) Photographs and thermograms of the deficient area.
d. Act on inspection results according to recommendations of NETA ATS, Table

100.18. Correct possible and probable deficiencies as soon as Owner's operations
permit. Retest until deficiencies are corrected.
3. Electrical Tests:
a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low-resistance

ohmmeter. Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar
connections. Investigate values that deviate from adjacent poles or similar switches
by more than 50 percent of the lowest value.
b. Perform insulation-resistance tests from phase terminals to case for one minute.
Apply voltage according to manufacturer's published data. In the absence of
manufacturer's published data, use NETA ATS, Table 100.1.
c. Measure capacitance of all terminal combinations. Investigate capacitance values
differing from manufacturer's published data.
d. Measure resistance of the internal discharge resistors. Investigate capacitance
values differing from manufacturer's published data. Measure capacitor residual
voltage at

one minute after disconnecting the power capacitor bank from its power supply.
Investigate the cause if the residual voltage exceeds 50 V.
e. Electrical Tests of Current Transformers:
1) Perform insulation-resistance test of each current transformer and its

secondary wiring for ground at 1000-V dc for one minute. For units with
solid-state components that cannot tolerate the applied voltage, follow
manufacturer's recommendations. Investigate and correct values of
insulation resistance less than manufacturer's recommendations or NETA
ATS, Table 100.5.
2) Perform a polarity test of each current transformer according to IEEE
C57.13.1. Polarity results shall agree with transformer markings.
3) Perform a ratio-verification test using the voltage or current method
according to IEEE C57.13.1. Ratio errors shall be according to IEEE
C57.13.
4) Perform an excitation test on transformers used for relaying applications
according to IEEE C57.13.1. Excitation results shall match the curve
supplied by manufacturer or be according to IEEE C57.13.1.
5) Measure current circuit burdens at transformer terminals according to IEEE
C57.13.1. Measured burdens shall be compared to, and shall match,
instrument transformer ratings.
6) Perform insulation-resistance tests on the primary winding with the
secondary grounded. Test voltages shall be according to NETA ATS, Table
100.5.
7) Perform dielectric withstand tests on the primary winding with the
secondary grounded. Test voltages shall be according to NETA ATS, Table
100.9.
8) Perform power factor or dissipation-factor tests according to test equipment
manufacturer's published data.
9) Verify that current-transformer secondary circuits are grounded and have only
one grounding point according to IEEE C57.13.3.
3.4 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to performstartup service.
1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Connect and run installed motors and equipment to verify the automatic switching of the
power capacitors. Verification shall include automatic switching of the total capacity of
installed power capacitors.
a. Provide sufficient inductive/reactive load banks, in combination with resistive load

banks, for the test.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to trainOwner's maintenance personnel to

adjust, operate, and maintain automatic power factor correction units.


SECTION 263600 – TRANSFER SWITCHES
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Specifications:

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes transfer switches rated 600 V and less, including the following:
1. Automatic transfer switches.
for owner approval.
D. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, weights, operating
characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.
E. Shop Drawings: Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details showing minimum
clearances, conductor entry provisions, gutter space, installed features and devices, and material
lists for each switch specified.

1. Single-Line Diagram: Show connections between transfer switch, bypass/isolation

switch, power sources, and load; and show interlocking provisions for each combined
transfer switch and bypass/isolation switch.
A. Qualification Data: For testing agency.
B. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that transfer switches

accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section
"Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the following:
any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the
unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."
C. Field quality-control test reports.
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in emergency, operation,
and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and
Maintenance Data," include the following:
1. Features and operating sequences, both automatic and manual.

2. List of all factory settings of relays; provide relay-setting and calibration instructions,
including software, where applicable.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Maintain a service center capable of providing training, parts, and
emergency maintenance repairs within a response period of less than eight hours from time of
notification.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain automatic transfer switches through one source from a single
manufacturer.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
D. Comply with NEMA ICS 1.
G. Comply with NFPA 110.
H. Comply with UL 1008 unless requirements of these Specifications are stricter.
Un. Interruption of Existing Electrical Service: Do not interrupt electrical service to facilities
after arranging to provide temporary electrical service:
1. Notify Construction Manager and Owner no fewer than 14 days in advance of proposed
interruption of electrical service.
2. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without Construction Manager's
and Owner's written permission.
1.8 COORDINATION
Un. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,
reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.
1.9 WARRANTY
Un. As specified in MPA.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

following:
1. Contactor Transfer Switches:
a. AC Data Systems, Inc.

b. Caterpillar; Engine Div.

c. Emerson; ASCO Power Technologies, LP.

d. Generac Power Systems, Inc.
e. GE Zenith Controls.
f. Kohler Power Systems; Generator Division.
g. Onan/Cummins Power Generation; Industrial Business Group.
h. Russelectric, Inc.
i. Spectrum Detroit Diesel.
j. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer.
k. ABB, Inc.
2. Transfer Switches Using Molded-Case Switches or Circuit Breakers:
a. AC Data Systems, Inc.

b. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer.
c. GE Zenith Controls.
d. Hubbell Industrial Controls, Inc.
e. Lake Shore Electric Corporation.
2.2 GENERAL TRANSFER-SWITCH PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
A. Indicated Current Ratings: Apply as defined in UL 1008 for continuous loading and total system
transfer, including tungsten filament lamp loads not exceeding 30 percent of switch ampere
rating, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Tested Fault-Current Closing and Withstand Ratings: Adequate for duty imposed by protective
devices at installation locations in Project under the fault conditions indicated, based on testing
according to UL 1008.
1. Where transfer switch includes internal fault-current protection, rating of switch and trip
unit combination shall exceed indicated fault-current value at installation location.
C. Solid-State Controls: Repetitive accuracy of all settings shall be plus or minus 2 percent or
better over an operating temperature range of minus 20 to plus 70 deg C.
D. Resistance to Damage by Voltage Transients: Components shall meet or exceed voltage-surge

withstand capability requirements when tested according to IEEE C62.41. Components shall
meet or exceed voltage-impulse withstand test of NEMA ICS 1.
E. Electrical Operation: Accomplish by a nonfused, momentarily energized solenoid or electric-

motor-operated mechanism, mechanically and electrically interlocked in both directions.

F. Switch Characteristics: Designed for continuous-duty repetitive transfer of full-rated current

between active power sources.
1. Limitation: Switches using molded-case switches or circuit breakers or insulated-case

circuit-breaker components are not acceptable.
2. Switch Action: Double throw; mechanically held in both directions.
3. Contacts: Silver composition or silver alloy for load-current switching. Conventional
automatic transfer-switch units, rated 225 A and higher, shall have separate arcing
contacts.
G. Neutral Switching. Where four-pole switches are indicated, provide neutral pole switched
simultaneously with phase poles.
H. Neutral Terminal: Solid and fully rated, unless otherwise indicated.
I. Factory Wiring: Train and bundle factory wiring and label, consistent with Shop Drawings,
either by color-code or by numbered or lettered wire and cable tape markers at terminations.
Color- coding and wire and cable tape markers are specified in Division 26 Section
1. Designated Terminals: Pressure type, suitable for types and sizes of field wiring indicated.
2. Power-Terminal Arrangement and Field-Wiring Space: Suitable for top, side, or bottom
entrance of feeder conductors as indicated.
3. Control Wiring: Equipped with lugs suitable for connection to terminal strips.
J. Enclosures: General-purpose NEMA 250, Type 1 or 3R, complying with NEMA ICS 6 and UL
508, unless otherwise indicated.
2.3 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES
A. Comply with Level 1 equipment according to NFPA 110.
B. Switching Arrangement: Double-throw type, incapable of pauses or intermediate position stops

during normal functioning, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Manual Switch Operation: Under load, with door closed and with either or both sources
energized. Transfer time is same as for electrical operation. Control circuit automatically
disconnects from electrical operator during manual operation.
D. Manual Switch Operation: Unloaded. Control circuit automatically disconnects from electrical
operator during manual operation.
E. Signal-Before-Transfer Contacts: A set of normally open/normally closed dry contacts operates

in advance of retransfer to normal source. Interval is adjustable from 1 to 30 seconds.
F. Digital Communication Interface: Matched to capability of remote annunciator or annunciator

and control panel.
G. Transfer Switches Based on Molded-Case-Switch Components: Comply with NEMA AB 1, UL

489, and UL 869A.

H. Automatic Delayed-Transition Transfer Switches: Pauses or stops in intermediate position to

momentarily disconnect both sources, with transition controlled by programming in the
automatic transfer-switch controller. Interlocked to prevent the load from being closed on both
sources at the same time.
1. Adjustable Time Delay: For override of normal-source voltage sensing to delay transfer
and for alternative source. Adjustable from zero to six seconds, and factory set for one
second.
2. Sources shall be mechanically and electrically interlocked to prevent closing both sources
on the load at the same time.
3. Fully automatic break-before-make operation with center off position.
4. Fully automatic break-before-make operation with transfer when two sources have near
zero phase difference.
I. In-Phase Monitor: Factory-wired, internal relay controls transfer so it occurs only when the two
sources are synchronized in phase. Relay compares phase relationship and frequency difference
between normal and emergency sources and initiates transfer when both sources are within 15
electrical degrees, and only if transfer can be completed within 60 electrical degrees. Transfer is
initiated only if both sources are within 2 Hz of nominal frequency and 70 percent or more of
nominal voltage.
J. Programmed Neutral Switch Position: Switch operator has a programmed neutral position
arranged to provide a midpoint between the two working switch positions, with an intentional,
time-controlled pause at midpoint during transfer. Pause is adjustable from 0.5 to 30 seconds
minimum and factory set for 0.5 second, unless otherwise indicated. Time delay occurs for both
transfer directions. Pause is disabled unless both sources are live.
K. Automatic Transfer-Switch Features:
1. Undervoltage Sensing for Each Phase of Normal Source: Sense low phase-to-ground
voltage on each phase. Pickup voltage shall be adjustable from 85 to 100 percent of
nominal, and dropout voltage is adjustable from 75 to 98 percent of pickup value. Factory
set for pickup at 90 percent and dropout at 85 percent.
2. Adjustable Time Delay: For override of normal-source voltage sensing to delay transfer
and engine start signals. Adjustable from zero to six seconds, and factory set for one
second.
3. Voltage/Frequency Lockout Relay: Prevent premature transfer to generator. Pickup
voltage shall be adjustable from 85 to 100 percent of nominal. Factory set for pickup at
90 percent. Pickup frequency shall be adjustable from 90 to 100 percent of nominal.
Factory set for pickup at 95 percent.
4. Time Delay for Retransfer to Normal Source: Adjustable from 0 to 30 minutes, and
factory set for 10 minutes to automatically defeat delay on loss of voltage or sustained
undervoltage of emergency source, provided normal supply has been restored.
5. Test Switch: Simulate normal-source failure.
6. Switch-Position Pilot Lights: Indicate source to which load is connected.
7. Source-Available Indicating Lights: Supervise sources via transfer-switch normal- and
emergency-source sensing circuits.
a. Normal Power Supervision: Green light with nameplate engraved "Normal Source
Available."

b. Emergency Power Supervision: Red light with nameplate engraved "Emergency

Source Available."
8. Unassigned Auxiliary Contacts: Two normally open, single-pole, double-throw contacts

for each switch position, rated 10 A at 240-V ac.
9. Transfer Override Switch: Overrides automatic retransfer control so automatic transfer
switch will remain connected to emergency power source regardless of condition of
normal source. Pilot light indicates override status.
A. Factory test and inspect components, assembled switches, and associated equipment. Ensure
proper operation. Check transfer time and voltage, frequency, and time-delay settings for
compliance with specified requirements. Perform dielectric strength test complying with NEMA
ICS 1.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Design each fastener and support to carry load indicated by seismic requirements and according
to seismic-restraint details. See Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for
B. Floor-Mounting Switch: Anchor to floor by bolting.
1. Concrete Bases: 4 inches (100 mm) high, reinforced, with chamfered edges. Extend base
no more than 4 inches (100 mm) in all directions beyond the maximum dimensions of
switch, unless otherwise indicated or unless required for seismic support. Construct
concrete bases according to Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical
Systems."
B. Annunciator and Control Panel Mounting: Flush in wall, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Identify components according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
D. Set field-adjustable intervals and delays, relays, and engine exerciser clock.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Wiring to Remote Components: Match type and number of cables and conductors to control and
communication requirements of transfer switches as recommended by manufacturer. Increase
raceway sizes at no additional cost to Owner if necessary to accommodate required wiring.
Systems."


and Cables."
D. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test,

019113 General Commissioning Requirements section inclusive of levels 1, 2, 3 and other
testing.
E. Execute site tests in accordance to specification 260801 Acceptance Testing Requirements
section.
3.3 ONSITE TRAINING
Un. Manufacturer to engage with the Owner’s representative to coordinate training for personnel to

SECTION 265119 – LED INTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Specifications:

10. 260923 Lighting Control Devices.
11. 260926 Lighting Control Panelboards.
12. 260933 Central Dimming Controls.
13. 260936 Modular Dimming Controls.
14. 260943.16 Addressable-Luminaire Lighting Controls.
15. 260943.23 Relay-Based Lighting Controls.
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Interior solid-state luminaires that use LED technology.

2. Lighting fixture supports.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. CCT: Correlated color temperature.
B. CRI: Color Rendering Index.
C. Fixture: See "Luminaire."
D. IP: International Protection or Ingress Protection Rating.
E. LED: Light-emitting diode.

F. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.
G. Luminaire: Complete lighting unit, including lamp, reflector, and housing.
B. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Arrange in order of luminaire designation.

2. Include data on features, accessories, and finishes.
3. Include physical description and dimensions of luminaires.
4. Include emergency lighting units, including batteries and chargers.
5. Include life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy efficiency data.
6. Photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests, complying with
IESNA Lighting Measurements Testing and Calculation Guides, of each lighting fixture
type. The adjustment factors shall be for lamps and accessories identical to those
indicated for the lighting fixture as applied in this Project, IES LM-79 and IES LM-80.
a. Manufacturers' Certified Data: Photometric data certified by manufacturer's

laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory
Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.
C. Shop Drawings: For nonstandard or custom luminaires.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting and attachment details.

2. Include details of luminaire assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
connection.
A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale, on which the
following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the
items involved:
1. Lighting luminaires.
2. Suspended ceiling components.
3. Partitions and millwork that penetrate the ceiling or extend to within 12 inches (300 mm)
of the plane of the luminaires.
4. Structural members to which equipment or luminaires will be attached.
5. Initial access modules for acoustical tile, including size and locations.
6. Items penetrating finished ceiling, including the following:
a. Other luminaires.

b. Air outlets and inlets.

c. Speakers.
d. Sprinklers.
e. Access panels.
f. Occupancy sensors.
7. Moldings.
B. Qualification Data: For testing laboratory providing photometric data for luminaires.
C. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For luminaires, accessories, and components, from

manufacturer.
D. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and
E. Product Certificates: For each type of luminaire.
F. Product Test Reports: For each luminaire, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaires and lighting systems to include in operation
and maintenance manuals.
1. Provide a list of all lamp types used on Project; use ANSI and manufacturers' codes.
1. Diffusers and Lenses: One for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least
one of each type.
2. Globes and Guards: One for every 20 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least
one of each type.
A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Luminaire manufacturer's

laboratory that is accredited under the NVLAP for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

B. Provide luminaires from a single manufacturer for each luminaire type.
C. Each luminaire type shall be binned within a three-step MacAdam Ellipse to ensure color
consistency among luminaires.
D. Comply with NFPA 70.
E. Comply with UL 159, as well as LM79 and LM80.
A. Protect finishes of exposed surfaces by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering

before shipping.
1.10 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other
construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC equipment, fire-
suppression system, and partition assemblies.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components of luminaires that
fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
B. Warranty Period:
1. LED Lighting Fixture: Five year(s) from date of Substantial Completion. Full warranty
shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty for the remaining four years.
2. LED Driver: Five year(s) from date of Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply
for first year, and prorated warranty for the remaining four years.
C. Five year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Seismic Performance: Luminaires shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined
according to ASCE/SEI 7.
1. The term "withstand" means "the luminaire will remain in place without separation of
any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the luminaire will be fully
operational during and after the seismic event."

2.2 LUMINAIRE REQUIREMENTS
B. NRTL Compliance: Luminaires for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for indicated
class and division of hazard by an NRTL.
C. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4.
D. Bulb shape complying with ANSI C79.1.
E. Lamp base complying with ANSI C81.61 or IEC 60061-1.
F. Minimum CRI of 80. CCT of 3500 K.
G. Rated lamp life of 40,000 hours.
H. Lamps dimmable from 100 percent to 0 percent of maximum light output.
I. Internal driver.
1. 4-Wire (0-10V DC Voltage Controlled) Dimming Drivers.
a. Must meet IEC 60929 Annex E for General White Lighting LED drivers.
b. Connect to devices compatible with 0 to 10V Analog Control Protocol, Class 2,
capable of sinking 0.6 ma per driver at a low end of 0.3V. Limit the number of
drivers on each 0-10V control output based on voltage drop and control capacity.
c. Must meet ESTA E1.3 for RGBW LED drivers.
2. Comply with UL 1310, UL 8750 and with ANSI C82.11.

3. LED dimming shall be equal in range and quality to a commercial grade incandescent
dimmer. Quality of dimming to be defined by dimming range, freedom from perceived
flicker or visible stroboscopic flicker, smooth and continuous change in level (no visible
steps in transitions), natural square law response to control input, and stable when input
voltage conditions fluctuate over what is typically experience in a commercial
environment. Demonstration of this compliance to dimming performance will be
necessary for substitutions or prior approval.
4. Ten-year expected life while operating at maximum case temperature and 90 percent non-
condensing relative humidity.
5. Driver must limit inrush current.
a. Base specification: Meet or exceed NEMA 410 driver inrush standard of 430
Amps per 10 Amps load with a maximum of 370 Amp²sec.
b. Preferred Specification: Meet or exceed 30mA²s at 277VAC for up to 50 watts of
load and 75A at 240µs at 277VAC for 100 watts of load.
6. Withstand up to a 1,000 volt surge without impairment of performance as defined by

ANSI C62.41 Category A.
7. No visible change in light output with a variation of plus/minus 10 percent line voltage
input.
8. Total Harmonic Distortion less than 20% percent and meet ANSI C82.11 maximum
allowable THD requirements at full output. THD shall at no point in the dimming curve
allow imbalance current to exceed full output THD.
9. Driver must support automatic adaptation, allowing for future luminaire upgrades and
enhancements and deliver improved performance:
a. Adjustment of forward LED voltage, supporting 3V through 55V.

b. Adjustment of LED current from 200mA to 1.05A at the 100 percent control input
point in increments of 1mA.
c. Adjustment for operating hours to maintain constant lumens (within 5 percent)
over the 50,000 hour design life of the system, and deliver up to 20 percent energy
savings early in the life cycle.
10. Driver must support automatic adaptation, allowing for future luminaire upgrades and
enhancements and deliver improved performance:
11. Driver should be UL Recognized under the component program and shall be modular for
simple field replacement. Drivers that are not UL Recognized or not suited for field
replacement will not be considered.
12. Driver shall include ability to provide no light output when the analog control signal
drops below 0.5 V, or the DALI/DMX digital signal calls for light to be extinguished and
shall consume 0.5 watts or less in this standby. Control deadband between 0.5V and
0.65V shall be included to allow for voltage variation of incoming signal without causing
noticeable variation in fixture to fixture output.

13. Over the entire range of available drive currents, driver shall provide step-free,
continuous dimming to black from 100 percent to 0.1 percent and 0% relative light
output, or 100 – 1% light output and step to 0% where indicated. Driver shall respond
similarly when raising from 0% to 100%
a. Driver must be capable of 20 bit dimming resolution for white light LED drivers or
15 bit resolution for RGBW LED drivers.
14. Driver must be capable of configuring a linear or logarithmic dimming curve, allowing
fine grained resolution at low light levels.
15. Drivers to track evenly across multiple fixtures at all light levels, and shall have an input
signal to output light level that allows smooth adjustment over the entire dimming range.
16. Driver and luminaire electronics shall deliver illumination that is free from objectionable
flicker as measured by flicker index (ANSI/IES RP-16-10). At all points within the
dimming range from 100-0.1 percent luminaire shall have:
a. LED dimming driver shall provide continuous step-free, flicker free dimming
similar to incandescent source.
b. Base specification: Flicker index shall less than 5% at all frequencies below 1000
Hz.
c. Preferred specification: Flicker index shall be equal to incandescent, less than 1%
at all frequencies below 1000 Hz.
J. Nominal Operating Voltage: As indicated on design documents.
K. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch (3.175 mm) minimum unless otherwise indicated.
L. Fully serviceable and upgradeable LED light engine.
M. 70% lumen maintenance at 60,000 hours based on IESNA LM-79 and LM-80.
N. 120-277 VAC, 50/60 hz power supply with 0-10V dimming (10-100%); rated for 50,000-hour
life.
O. Overload and short circuit protected.
2.3 MANUFACTURERS

following or approved equal:
1. Lithonia.
2. Cooper.
3. Philips.
4. GE.

2.4 DOWNLIGHT
A. Minimum 1,500 lumens.
B. Universal mounting bracket.
C. Integral junction box with conduit fittings.
2.5 LINEAR INDUSTRIAL
A. Minimum 3000 lumens per 4 foot fixture, and 6000 lumens per 8 foot fixture.
B. Integral junction box with conduit fittings for surface mount.
2.6 MATERIALS
A. Metal Parts:
1. Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.

2. Sheet metal components shall be steel unless otherwise indicated.
3. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.
B. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under
operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to
prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during
relamping and when secured in operating position.
C. Diffusers and Globes:
1. Acrylic Diffusers: One hundred percent virgin acrylic plastic, with high resistance to
yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.
2. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch (3.175 mm) minimum unless otherwise indicated.
D. Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps. Locate labels
where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal viewing angles
when lamps are in place.
1. Label shall include the following lamp characteristics:
a. "USE ONLY" and include specific lamp type.

b. Lamp diameter, shape, size, wattage, and coating.
c. CCT and CRI for all luminaires.

2.7 METAL FINISHES
A. Variations in finishes are unacceptable in the same piece. Variations in finishes of adjoining
components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and if they can be
and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
2.8 LUMINAIRE FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS
A. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems"
for channel and angle iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.
B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch (13-mm) steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling
canopy. Finish same as luminaire.
C. Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2-inch (13-mm) steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount
a single fixture. Finish same as fixture.
D. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage (2.68 mm).
E. Wires for Humid Spaces: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Composition 302 or 304, annealed stainless
steel, 12 gage (2.68 mm).
F. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch (5-mm) minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.
G. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to luminaire, line voltage, and equipment with
threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Examine roughing-in for luminaire to verify actual locations of luminaire and electrical
connections before fixture installation. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.
3.2 TEMPORARY LIGHTING
A. If approved by the Architect, use selected permanent luminaires for temporary lighting. When
construction is sufficiently complete, clean luminaires used for temporary lighting and install
new lamps.

3.3 INSTALLATION
B. Remote Mounting of Ballasts: Distance between the ballast and luminaire shall not exceed that
recommended by ballast manufacturer. Verify, with ballast manufacturers, maximum distance
between ballast and luminaire.
C. Install luminaires level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated.
D. Install lamps in each luminaire.
E. Coordinate layout and installation of luminaires and suspension system with other construction
that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them.
F. Supports:
1. Sized and rated for luminaire weight.

2. Able to maintain luminaire position after cleaning and relamping.
3. Provide support for luminaire without causing deflection of ceiling or wall.
4. Luminaire mounting devices shall be capable of supporting a horizontal force of 100
percent of luminaire weight and vertical force of 400 percent of luminaire weight.
G. Ceiling-Grid-Mounted Luminaire Supports: Use grid as a support element.
1. Install ceiling support system rods or wires, independent of the ceiling suspension
devices, for each luminaire. Locate not more than 6 inches (150 mm) from luminaire
corners.
2. Support Clips: Fasten to luminaires and to ceiling grid members at or near each luminaire
corner with clips that are UL listed for the application.
3. Luminaires of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Install as indicated on reflected ceiling
plans or center in acoustical panel, and support luminaires independently with at least two
3/4- inch (20-mm) metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees.
4. Install at least one independent support rod or wire from structure to a tab on luminaire.
Wire or rod shall have breaking strength of the luminaire weight at a safety factor of 3.
H. Flush-Mounted Luminaire Support:
1. Secured to outlet box.

2. Attached to ceiling structural members at four points equally spaced around
circumference of luminaire.
3. Trim ring flush with finished surface.
I. Wall-Mounted Luminaire Support:
1. Attached to structural members in walls.

2. Do not attach luminaires directly to gypsum board.

J. Suspended Luminaire Support:
1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches (1200 mm), brace to limit swinging.
2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Luminaires: Suspend with twin-stem hangers. Support with
approved outlet box and accessories that hold stem and provide damping of luminaire
oscillations. Support outlet box vertically to building structure using approved devices.
3. Continuous Rows of Luminaires: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing
or rod for suspension for each unit length of luminaire chassis, including one at each end.
4. Do not use ceiling grid as support for pendant luminaires. Connect support wires or rods
to building structure.
K. Ceiling-Mounted Luminaire Support:
1. Ceiling mount with two 5/32-inch- (4-mm-) diameter aircraft cable supports adjustable to
120 inches (6 m) in length.
2. Ceiling mount with pendant mount with 5/32-inch- (4-mm-) diameter aircraft cable
supports adjustable to 120 inches (6 m) in length.
3. Ceiling mount with hook mount.
L. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables" and Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" for wiring
connections and wiring methods.
3.4 IDENTIFICATION
1. Operational Test: After installing luminaires, switches, and accessories, and after
electrical circuitry has been energized, test units to confirm proper operation.
2. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation.
Verify transfer from normal power to battery power and retransfer to normal.
B. Luminaire will be considered defective if it does not pass operation tests and inspections.
C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion,

provide on-site assistance in adjusting the direction of aim of luminaires to suit occupied
conditions. Make up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal hours for this purpose.
Some of this work may be required during hours of darkness.
1. During adjustment visits, inspect all luminaires. Replace lamps or luminaires that are
defective.
2. Parts and supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies.
3. Adjust the aim of luminaires in the presence of the Architect.

SECTION 265219 – EMERGENCY AND EXIT LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
Un. Specifications:

1.2 SUMMARY
1. Emergency lighting units.

2. Exit signs.
3. Luminaire supports.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
B. CRI: Color Rendering Index.
C. Emergency Lighting Unit: A lighting unit with internal or external emergency battery powered
supply and the means for controlling and charging the battery and unit operation.
D. Fixture: See "Luminaire" Paragraph.
E. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.
F. Luminaire: Complete lighting unit, including lamp, reflector, and housing.

B. Product Data: For each type of emergency lighting unit, exit sign, and emergency lighting support.
1. Include data on features, accessories, and finishes.

2. Include physical description of the unit and dimensions.
3. Battery and charger for light units.
4. Include life, output of luminaire (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy-efficiency data.
5. Include photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests, complying
with IES LM-45, for each luminaire type.
a. Manufacturers' Certified Data: Photometric data certified by manufacturer's

C. Shop Drawings: For nonstandard or custom luminaires.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting and attachment details.

connection.
D. Samples: For each product and for each color and texture specified.
E. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of luminaire with factory-applied finishes.
F. Samples for Verification: For each type of luminaire.
1. Include Samples of luminaires and accessories to verify finish selection.
A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale, on which the
following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the
items involved:
1. Luminaires.
2. Suspended ceiling components.
3. Partitions and millwork that penetrate the ceiling or extend to within 12 inches (300 mm)
of the plane of the luminaires.
4. Structural members to which equipment will be attached.
5. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.
6. Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following:

a. Other luminaires.
b. Air outlets and inlets.
c. Speakers.
d. Ceiling-mounted projectors.
e. Sprinklers.
f. Access panels.
7. Moldings.
B. Qualification Data: For testing laboratory providing photometric data for luminaires.
C. Seismic Qualification Data: For luminaires, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.
4. Provide seismic qualification certificate for each piece of equipment.
D. Product Test Reports: For each luminaire for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
E. Sample Warranty.
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaires and lighting systems to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals.
1. Provide a list of all lamp types used on Project; use ANSI and manufacturers' codes.
1. Lamps: 10 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.
2. Luminaire-mounted, emergency battery pack: One for every 20 emergency lighting units.
Furnish at least one of each type.
3. Diffusers and Lenses: One for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least
one of each type.
one of each type.

A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Luminaire manufacturer's

laboratory that is accredited under the National Volunteer Laboratory Accreditation Program for
Energy Efficient Lighting Products.
B. FM Global Compliance: Luminaires for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for
indicated class and division of hazard by FM Global.
D. Comply with UL 159, as well as LM79 and LM80.
A. Protect finishes of exposed surfaces by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering

before shipping.
1.10 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other
construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC equipment, fire-
suppression system, and partition assemblies.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components of luminaires that
fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Five year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Warranty for Emergency Lighting Batteries: Manufacturer's standard form in which
manufacturer of battery-powered emergency lighting unit agrees to repair or replace
components of rechargeable batteries that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
1. Warranty Period for Emergency Power Unit Batteries: Five years from date of
Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year and prorated warranty for
the remaining four years.
2. Warranty Period for Self-Powered Exit Sign Batteries: Five years from date of
Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year and prorated warranty for
the remaining four years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Seismic Performance: Luminaires shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined
according to ASCE/SEI 7.
1. The term "withstand" means "the luminaire will remain in place without separation of
any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the luminaire will be fully
operational during and after the seismic event."
2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY LIGHTING
B. NRTL Compliance: Fabricate and label emergency lighting units, exit signs, and batteries to
comply with UL 924.
C. Comply with NFPA 70 and NFPA 101.
D. Comply with NEMA LE 4 for recessed luminaires.
E. Comply with UL 1598 for fluorescent luminaires.
F. Lamp Base: Comply with ANSI C81.61 or IEC 60061-1.
G. Bulb Shape: Complying with ANSI C79.1.
H. Internally Lighted Signs:
1. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 50,000 hours minimum rated lamp life.
2. Nightlight Connection: Operate lamp continuously at 40 percent of rated light output.
3. Test Push-Button and Indicator Light: Visible and accessible without opening luminaire
or entering ceiling space.
a. Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power
and demonstrates unit operability.
b. Indicator Light: LED indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle
charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.
4. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, lead-acid type.

5. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type with sealed power transfer
relay.
6. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates code-
required test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated
by an integral audible alarm and a flashing red LED.

I. External Type: Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit, suitable for powering one or more
lamps, remote mounted from luminaire.
1. Emergency Connection: Operate one fluorescent or LED lamp continuously. Connect

unswitched circuit to battery-inverter unit and switched circuit to luminaire ballast.
2. Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when power-supply circuit voltage drops to
80 percent of nominal voltage or below. Lamp automatically disconnects from battery
when voltage approaches deep-discharge level. When normal voltage is restored, relay
disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on
charger.
3. Nightlight Connection: Operate lamp in a remote luminaire continuously.
5. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type.
6. Housing: NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure listed for installation inside, on top of, or remote
from luminaire. Remote assembly shall be located no less than half the distance
recommended by the manufacturer, whichever is less.
7. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and
demonstrates unit operability.
8. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge;
bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.
2.3 EMERGENCY LIGHTING
A. General Requirements for Emergency Lighting Units: Self-contained units complying with UL
924.
1. Operating at nominal voltage of 120 V ac or 277 V ac.

3. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay.
4. Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when power-supply circuit voltage drops to
80 percent of nominal voltage or below. Lamp automatically disconnects from battery
when voltage approaches deep-discharge level. When normal voltage is restored, relay
disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on
charger.
5. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and
demonstrates unit operability.
6. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge;
bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.
7. Wire Guard: Heavy-chrome-plated wire guard protects lamp heads or fixtures.
8. Integral Time-Delay Relay: Holds unit on for fixed interval of 15 minutes when power is
restored after an outage.

2.4 EXIT SIGNS
A. General Requirements for Exit Signs: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility,
luminance, and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Internally Lighted Signs:
1. Operating at nominal voltage of 277 V ac.

2. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs; 50,000 hours minimum rated lamp life.
3. Self-Powered Exit Signs (Battery Type): Internal emergency power unit.
2.5 MATERIALS
A. Metal Parts:
1. Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.

2. Sheet metal components shall be steel unless otherwise indicated.
3. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.
B. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access:
1. Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions.

2. Designed to permit relamping without use of tools.
3. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling
accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position.
C. Diffusers and Globes:
1. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated.

2. Acrylic: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic, with high resistance to yellowing and other
changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.
3. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch (3.175 mm) minimum unless otherwise indicated.
D. Conduit: minimum 3/4 inch (21 mm) in diameter.
2.6 METAL FINISHES
A. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of
approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
2.7 LUMINAIRE SUPPORT COMPONENTS
A. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems"
for channel and angle iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.

B. Support Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage (2.68
mm).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
Un. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for conditions affecting performance of luminaires.
B. Examine roughing-in for luminaire to verify actual locations of luminaire and electrical
connections before luminaire installation.
C. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and ceilings for suitable conditions where emergency lighting
luminaires will be installed.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
Un. Comply with NECA 1.
B. Install luminaires level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install lamps in each luminaire.
D. Supports:
1. Sized and rated for luminaire and emergency power unit weight.
2. Able to maintain luminaire position when testing emergency power unit.
3. Provide support for luminaire and emergency power unit without causing deflection of
ceiling or wall.
4. Luminaire-mounting devices shall be capable of supporting a horizontal force of 100
percent of luminaire and emergency power unit weight and vertical force of 400 percent
of luminaire weight.
E. Wall-Mounted Luminaire Support:
1. Attached to structural members in walls.

2. Do not attach luminaires directly to gypsum board.
F. Suspended Luminaire Support:
1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches (1200 mm), brace to limit swinging.
2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Luminaires: Suspend with twin-stem hangers. Support with
approved outlet box and accessories that hold stem and provide damping of luminaire
oscillations. Support outlet box vertically to building structure using approved devices.

3. Continuous Rows of Luminaires: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing
or rod for suspension for each unit length of luminaire chassis, including one at each end.
4. Do not use ceiling grid as support for pendant luminaires. Connect support wires or rods
to building structure.
G. Ceiling Grid Mounted Luminaires:
1. Secure to any required outlet box.

2. Secure emergency power unit using approved fasteners in a minimum of four locations,
spaced near corners of emergency power unit.
3. Use approved devices and support components to connect luminaire to ceiling grid and
building structure in a minimum of four locations, spaced near corners of luminaire.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
Un. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for
Un. Perform the following tests and inspections:
1. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation.
Verify transfer from normal power to battery power and retransfer to normal.
B. Verify that self-luminous exit signs are installed according to their listing and the requirements
in NFPA 101.
C. Luminaire will be considered defective if it does not pass operation tests and inspections.
3.5 STARTUP SERVICE
Un. Perform startup service:
1. Charge emergency power units and batteries minimum of one hour and depress switch to
conduct short-duration test.
2. Charge emergency power units and batteries minimum of 24 hours and conduct one-hour
discharge test.
3.6 ADJUSTING
Un. Adjustments: Within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site visit to do the
following:

1. Inspect all luminaires. Replace lamps, emergency power units, batteries, signs, or
luminaires that are defective.
a. Parts and supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies.
2. Conduct short-duration tests on all emergency lighting.

SECTION 265600 – EXTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Specifications:

9. 262726 Wiring Devices.
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Exterior luminaires with lamps and ballasts.

2. Luminaire-mounted photoelectric relays.
3. Poles and accessories.
4. Luminaire lowering devices.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
B. CRI: Color-rendering index.
C. HID: High-intensity discharge.
D. LER: Luminaire efficacy rating.
E. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided.
F. Pole: Luminaire support structure, including tower used for large area illumination.
G. Standard: Same definition as "Pole" above.

1.4 STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS CRITERIA FOR POLE SELECTION
A. Dead Load: Weight of luminaire and its horizontal and vertical supports, lowering devices, and
supporting structure, applied as stated in AASHTO LTS-4-M.
B. Live Load: Single load of 500 lbf, distributed as stated in AASHTO LTS-4-M.
C. Ice Load: Load of 3 lbf/sq. ft. applied as stated in AASHTO LTS-4-M Ice Load Map.
D. Wind Load: Pressure of wind on pole and luminaire and banners and banner arms, calculated
and applied as stated in AASHTO LTS-4-M.
1. Basic wind speed for calculating wind load for poles exceeding 49.2 feet in height is 100
mph.
a. Wind Importance Factor: 1.0.

b. Minimum Design Life: 50 years.
c. Velocity Conversion Factors: 1.0.
2. Basic wind speed for calculating wind load for poles 50 feet high or less is 100 mph.
a. Wind Importance Factor: 1.0.

b. Minimum Design Life: 25 years.
c. Velocity Conversion Factors: 1.0.
B. Product Data: For each luminaire, pole, and support component, arranged in order of lighting
unit designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:
1. Physical description of luminaire, including materials, dimensions, effective projected

area, and verification of indicated parameters.
2. Details of attaching luminaires and accessories.
3. Details of installation and construction.
4. Luminaire materials.
5. Photometric data based on laboratory tests of each luminaire type, complete with
indicated lamps, ballasts, and accessories.
a. Testing Agency Certified Data: For indicated luminaires, photometric data shall be
certified by a qualified independent testing agency. Photometric data for remaining
luminaires shall be certified by manufacturer.
b. Manufacturer Certified Data: Photometric data shall be certified by manufacturer's

6. Photoelectric relays.
7. Ballasts, including energy-efficiency data.
8. Lamps, including life, output, CCT, CRI, lumens, and energy-efficiency data.
9. Materials, dimensions, and finishes of poles.
10. Means of attaching luminaires to supports, and indication that attachment is suitable for
components involved.
11. Anchor bolts for poles.
12. Manufactured pole foundations.
C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required

connection.
2. Anchor-bolt templates keyed to specific poles and certified by manufacturer.
3. Design calculations, certified by a qualified professional engineer, indicating strength of
screw foundations and soil conditions on which they are based.
4. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
D. Samples: For products designated for sample submission in the Exterior Lighting Device
Schedule. Each Sample shall include lamps and ballasts.
A. Pole and Support Component Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of poles, certifying that
products are designed for indicated load requirements in AASHTO LTS-4-M and that load
imposed by luminaire and attachments has been included in design. The certification shall be
based on design calculations by a professional engineer.
B. Qualification Data: For qualified agencies providing photometric data for lighting fixtures.
C. Field quality-control reports.
D. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaires, and poles, luminaire lowering devices to
include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
1. Lamps: One for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each
type.

2. Glass and Plastic Lenses, Covers, and Other Optical Parts: One for every 100 of each
type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.
3. Ballasts: One for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each
type.
one of each type.
A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by manufacturers'

laboratories that are accredited under the National Volunteer Laboratory Accreditation Program
for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.
B. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by an independent

agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL as
defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by
D. Comply with IEEE C2, "National Electrical Safety Code."
A. Package aluminum poles for shipping according to ASTM B 660.
B. Store poles on decay-resistant-treated skids at least 12 inches above grade and vegetation.
Support poles to prevent distortion and arrange to provide free air circulation.
C. Retain factory-applied pole wrappings on metal poles until right before pole installation. For
poles with nonmetallic finishes, handle with web fabric straps.

3.11 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace products that fail in materials or workmanship; that corrode; or that fade, stain,
perforate, erode, or chalk due to effects of weather or solar radiation within specified warranty
period. Manufacturer may exclude lightning damage, hail damage, vandalism, abuse, or
unauthorized repairs or alterations from special warranty coverage.
1. Warranty Period for Luminaires: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
2. Warranty Period for Metal Corrosion: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
3. Warranty Period for Color Retention: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
4. Warranty Period for Poles: Repair or replace lighting poles and standards that fail in
finish, materials, and workmanship within manufacturer's standard warranty period, but
not less than three years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
Un. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to, product(s) indicated on Drawings.
2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LUMINAIRES
Un. Luminaires shall comply with UL 1598 and be listed and labeled for installation in wet locations
by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. LER Tests Incandescent Fixtures: Where LER is specified, test according to

NEMA LE 5A.
2. LER Tests Fluorescent Fixtures: Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5
and NEMA LE 5A as applicable.
3. LER Tests HID Fixtures: Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5B.
B. Lateral Light Distribution Patterns: Comply with IESNA RP-8 for parameters of lateral light
distribution patterns indicated for luminaires.
C. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.
D. Sheet Metal Components: Corrosion-resistant aluminum unless otherwise indicated. Form and
support to prevent warping and sagging.
E. Housings: Rigidly formed, weather- and light-tight enclosures that will not warp, sag, or deform
in use. Provide filter/breather for enclosed luminaires.
F. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under
operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to
prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during
relamping

and when secured in operating position. Doors shall be removable for cleaning or replacing
lenses. Designed to disconnect ballast when door opens.
G. Exposed Hardware Material: Stainless steel.
H. Plastic Parts: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and
UV radiation.
I. Light Shields: Metal baffles, factory installed and field adjustable, arranged to block light
distribution to indicated portion of normally illuminated area or field.
J. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows unless otherwise indicated:
1. White Surfaces: 85 percent.

2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent.
3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent.
K. Lenses and Refractors Gaskets: Use heat- and aging-resistant resilient gaskets to seal and
cushion lenses and refractors in luminaire doors.
L. Luminaire Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested

luminaire before shipping. Where indicated, match finish process and color of pole or support
materials.
M. Factory-Applied Finish for Steel Luminaires: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual
for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating
finishes.
1. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning," to

remove dirt, oil, grease, and other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Grind
welds and polish surfaces to a smooth, even finish. Remove mill scale and rust, if present,
from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast
Cleaning," or SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling."
2. Exterior Surfaces: Manufacturer's standard finish consisting of one or more coats of
primer and two finish coats of high-gloss, high-build polyurethane enamel.
a. Color: As selected from manufacturer's standard catalog of colors.

b. Color: Match Architect's sample of [manufacturer's standard] [custom] color.
c. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
N. Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps and ballasts.
Labels shall be located where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from
normal viewing angles when lamps are in place.
1. Label shall include the following lamp and ballast characteristics:
a. "USES ONLY" and include specific lamp type.

b. Lamp diameter code (T-4, T-5, T-8, T-12), tube configuration (twin, quad, triple),
base type, and nominal wattage for fluorescent and compact fluorescent
luminaires.
c. Lamp type, wattage, bulb type (ED17, BD56, etc.) and coating (clear or coated)

for HID luminaires.

d. Start type (preheat, rapid start, instant start) for fluorescent and compact
fluorescent luminaires.
e. ANSI ballast type (M98, M57, etc.) for HID luminaires.
f. CCT and CRI for all luminaires.
2.3 LUMINAIRE-MOUNTED PHOTOELECTRIC RELAYS
A. Comply with UL 773 or UL 773A.
B. Contact Relays: Factory mounted, single throw, designed to fail in the on position, and factory
set to turn light unit on at 1.5 to 3 fc and off at 4.5 to 10 fc with 15-second minimum time delay.
Relay shall have directional lens in front of photocell to prevent artificial light sources from
causing false turnoff.
1. Relay with locking-type receptacle shall comply with ANSI C136.10.

2. Adjustable window slide for adjusting on-off set points.
2.4 FLUORESCENT BALLASTS AND LAMPS
A. Ballasts for Low-Temperature Environments:
1. Temperatures 0 Deg F and Higher: Electronic type rated for 0 deg F starting and
operating temperature with indicated lamp types.
2. Temperatures Minus 20 Deg F and Higher: Electromagnetic type designed for use with
indicated lamp types.
B. Ballast Characteristics:
1. Power Factor: 90 percent, minimum.

2. Sound Rating: Class A.
3. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent.
4. Electromagnetic Ballasts: Comply with ANSI C82.1, energy-saving, high power factor,
Class P, automatic-reset thermal protection.
5. Case Temperature for Compact Lamp Ballasts: 65 deg C, maximum.
6. Transient-Voltage Protection: Comply with IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2,
Category A or better.
C. Low-Temperature Lamp Capability: Rated for reliable starting and operation with ballast
provided at temperatures 0 deg F and higher.
2.5 BALLASTS FOR HID LAMPS
A. Comply with ANSI C82.4 and UL 1029 and capable of open-circuit operation without reduction
of average lamp life. Include the following features unless otherwise indicated:
1. Ballast Circuit: Constant-wattage autotransformer or regulating high-power-factor type.

2. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 22 deg F.

3. Normal Ambient Operating Temperature: 104 deg F.

4. Ballast Fuses: One in each ungrounded power supply conductor. Voltage and current
ratings as recommended by ballast manufacturer.
B. Auxiliary, Instant-On, Quartz System: Factory-installed feature automatically switches quartz

lamp on when fixture is initially energized and when momentary power outages occur. System
automatically turns quartz lamp off when HID lamp reaches approximately 60 percent of light
output.
C. High-Pressure Sodium Ballasts: Electromagnetic type with solid-state igniter/starter and capable
of open-circuit operation without reduction of average lamp life. Igniter/starter shall have an
average life in pulsing mode of 10,000 hours at an igniter/starter-case temperature of 90 deg C.
1. Instant-Restrike Device: Integral with ballast, or solid-state potted module, factory

installed within fixture and compatible with lamps, ballasts, and mogul sockets up to 150
W.
a. Restrike Range: 105- to 130-V ac.

b. Maximum Voltage: 250-V peak or 150-V ac rms.
2. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 40 deg F.
2.6 HID LAMPS
A. High-Pressure Sodium Lamps: ANSI C78.42, CRI 21 (minimum), CCT color temperature
1900K, and average rated life of 24,000 hours, minimum.
1. Dual-Arc Tube Lamp: Arranged so only one of two arc tubes is lighted at one time and,
when power is restored after an outage, the cooler arc tube, with lower internal pressure,
lights instantly, providing an immediate 8 to 15 percent of normal light output.
B. Low-Pressure Sodium Lamps: ANSI C78.43.
C. Metal-Halide Lamps: ANSI C78.43, with minimum CRI 65and CCT color temperature 4000K.
D. Pulse-Start, Metal-Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 65, and CCT color temperature 4000 K.
E. Ceramic, Pulse-Start, Metal-Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 80, and CCT color temperature 4000
K.
2.7 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR POLES AND SUPPORT COMPONENTS
A. Structural Characteristics: Comply with AASHTO LTS-4-M.
1. Wind-Load Strength of Poles: Adequate at indicated heights above grade without failure,
permanent deflection, or whipping in steady winds of speed indicated in "Structural
Analysis Criteria for Pole Selection" Article.

2. Strength Analysis: For each pole, multiply the actual equivalent projected area of
luminaires and brackets by a factor of 1.1 to obtain the equivalent projected area to be
used in pole selection strength analysis.
B. Luminaire Attachment Provisions: Comply with luminaire manufacturers' mounting

requirements. Use stainless-steel fasteners and mounting bolts unless otherwise indicated.
C. Mountings, Fasteners, and Appurtenances: Corrosion-resistant items compatible with support

components.
1. Materials: Shall not cause galvanic action at contact points.
2. Anchor Bolts, Leveling Nuts, Bolt Caps, and Washers: Hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication unless otherwise indicated.
3. Anchor-Bolt Template: Plywood or steel.
D. Handhole: Oval-shaped, with minimum clear opening of 2-1/2 by 5 inches with cover secured
by stainless-steel captive screws.
E. Concrete Pole Foundations: Cast in place, with anchor bolts to match pole-base flange.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place
Concrete."
F. Power-Installed Screw Foundations: Factory fabricated by pole manufacturer, with structural

steel complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M and hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A
123/A 123M; and with top-plate and mounting bolts to match pole base flange and strength
required to support pole, luminaire, and accessories.
G. Breakaway Supports: Frangible breakaway supports, tested by an independent testing agency

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, according to AASHTO LTS-4-M.

3.8 LEDs
A. Light Emitting Diodes: White light output with minimum CRI 65 and color temperature 4000K,
and rated life (70% of light output) of 40,000 hours, minimum. Color light output, state specific
spectral power distribution, rated life (70% of light output) of 60,000 hours, minimum. Light
output (lumen/watt) to be stated for a complete luminaire (power supply, light source, fixture),
not on lab bench momentary test but under normal project-specific operating conditions
(temperature, humidity, orientation) and for a published duration of the photometry test after the
system has stabilized its light output and heat management. Capability to dim shall be
published. Color constancy amongst LEDs shall be published in # of MacAdam ellipses of
variation. Photometry for all LED products to follow IES recommendations for testing. All LED
products must have a 5-year warranty. Recycling program provided by manufacturer, and
availability of spare parts at expected end of life must be stated by manufacturer.
2.9 STEEL POLES
A. Poles: Comply with ASTM A 500, Grade B, carbon steel with a minimum yield of 46,000 psig;
one-piece construction up to 40 feet in height with access handhole in pole wall.
1. Shape: Round, tapered, Round, straight, Square, tapered, Square, straight.

2. Mounting Provisions: Butt flange for bolted mounting on foundation or breakaway
support.
B. Steel Mast Arms: Single-arm, Truss, Davit type, continuously welded to pole attachment plate.
Material and finish same as pole.
C. Brackets for Luminaires: Detachable, cantilever, without underbrace.
1. Adapter fitting welded to pole, allowing the bracket to be bolted to the pole mounted
adapter, then bolted together with galvanized-steel bolts.
2. Cross Section: Tapered oval, with straight tubular end section to accommodate luminaire.
3. Match pole material and finish.
D. Pole-Top Tenons: Fabricated to support luminaire or luminaires and brackets indicated, and
securely fastened to pole top.
E. Steps: Fixed steel, with nonslip treads, positioned for 15-inch vertical spacing, alternating on
opposite sides of pole; first step at elevation 10 feet above finished grade.
F. Intermediate Handhole and Cable Support: Weathertight, 3-by-5-inch handhole located at

midpoint of pole with cover for access to internal welded attachment lug for electric cable
support grip.
G. Grounding and Bonding Lugs: Welded 1/2-inch threaded lug, complying with requirements in
Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems," listed for attaching
grounding and bonding conductors of type and size listed in that Section, and accessible through
handhole.

H. Cable Support Grip: Wire-mesh type with rotating attachment eye, sized for diameter of cable
and rated for a minimum load equal to weight of supported cable times a 5.0 safety factor.
I. Platform for Lamp and Ballast Servicing: Factory fabricated of steel with finish matching that
of pole.
J. Prime-Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting.
K. Galvanized Finish: After fabrication, hot-dip galvanize complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M.
L. Factory-Painted Finish: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and
Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
1. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning," to

remove dirt, oil, grease, and other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Grind
welds and polish surfaces to a smooth, even finish. Remove mill scale and rust, if present,
from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast
Cleaning," or with SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling."
2. Interior Surfaces of Pole: One coat of bituminous paint, or otherwise treat for equal
corrosion protection.
3. Exterior Surfaces: Manufacturer's standard finish consisting of one or more coats of
primer and two finish coats of high-gloss, high-build polyurethane enamel.
a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.10 POLE ACCESSORIES
A. Duplex Receptacle: 120 V, 20 A in a weatherproof assembly complying with Division 26

Section "Wiring Devices" for ground-fault circuit-interrupter type.
1. Recessed, 12 inches above finished grade.

2. Nonmetallic, polycarbonate plastic or reinforced fiberglass, weatherproof in use, cover,
that when mounted results in NEMA 250, Type 3R enclosure.
3. With cord opening.
4. With lockable hasp and latch that complies with OSHA lockout and tag-out requirements.
B. Minimum 1800-W transformer, protected by replaceable fuses, mounted behind access cover.
C. Base Covers: Manufacturers' standard metal units, arranged to cover pole's mounting bolts and
nuts. Finish same as pole.
D. Transformer Type Base: Same material and color as pole. Coordinate dimensions to suit pole's
base flange and accept indicated accessories.
E. Decorative accessories, supplied by decorative pole manufacturer, include the following:
1. Banner Arms.
2. Flag Holders.
3. Ladder Rests.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 LUMINAIRE INSTALLATION
A. Install lamps in each luminaire.
B. Fasten luminaire to indicated structural supports.
1. Use fastening methods and materials selected to resist seismic forces defined for the
application and approved by manufacturer.
C. Adjust luminaires that require field adjustment or aiming. Include adjustment of photoelectric
device to prevent false operation of relay by artificial light sources, favoring a north orientation.
3.2 POLE INSTALLATION
A. Alignment: Align pole foundations and poles for optimum directional alignment of luminaires
and their mounting provisions on the pole.
B. Clearances: Maintain the following minimum horizontal distances of poles from surface and
underground features unless otherwise indicated on Drawings:
1. Fire Hydrants and Storm Drainage Piping: 60 inches.

2. Water, Gas, Electric, Communication, and Sewer Lines: 10 feet.
3. Trees: 15 feet from tree trunk.
C. Concrete Pole Foundations: Set anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt templates furnished by
pole manufacturer. Concrete materials, installation, and finishing requirements are specified in
Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
D. Foundation-Mounted Poles: Mount pole with leveling nuts, and tighten top nuts to torque level
recommended by pole manufacturer.
1. Use anchor bolts and nuts selected to resist seismic forces defined for the application and
approved by manufacturer.
2. Grout void between pole base and foundation. Use nonshrink or expanding concrete
grout firmly packed to fill space.
3. Install base covers unless otherwise indicated.
4. Use a short piece of 1/2-inch- diameter pipe to make a drain hole through grout. Arrange
to drain condensation from interior of pole.
E. Embedded Poles with Tamped Earth Backfill: Set poles to depth below finished grade indicated
on Drawings, but not less than one-sixth of pole height.
1. Dig holes large enough to permit use of tampers in the full depth of hole.
2. Backfill in 6-inch layers and thoroughly tamp each layer so compaction of backfill is
equal to or greater than that of undisturbed earth.

F. Embedded Poles with Concrete Backfill: Set poles in augered holes to depth below finished
grade indicated on Drawings, but not less than one-sixth of pole height.
1. Make holes 6 inches in diameter larger than pole diameter.

2. Fill augered hole around pole with air-entrained concrete having a minimum compressive
strength of 3000 psi at 28 days, and finish in a dome above finished grade.
3. Use a short piece of 1/2-inch- diameter pipe to make a drain hole through concrete dome.
Arrange to drain condensation from interior of pole.
4. Cure concrete a minimum of 72 hours before performing work on pole.
G. Poles and Pole Foundations Set in Concrete Paved Areas: Install poles with minimum of 6-inch-
wide, unpaved gap between the pole or pole foundation and the edge of adjacent concrete slab.
Fill unpaved ring with pea gravel to a level 1 inch below top of concrete slab.
H. Raise and set poles using web fabric slings (not chain or cable).
3.3 BOLLARD LUMINAIRE INSTALLATION
A. Align units for optimum directional alignment of light distribution.
B. Install on concrete base with top 4 inches above finished grade or surface at bollard location.
Cast conduit into base, and shape base to match shape of bollard base. Finish by troweling and
rubbing smooth. Concrete materials, installation, and finishing are specified in Division 03
Section "Cast- in-Place Concrete."
3.4 INSTALLATION OF INDIVIDUAL GROUND-MOUNTING LUMINAIRES
A. Install on concrete base with top 4 inches above finished grade or surface at luminaire location.
Cast conduit into base, and finish by troweling and rubbing smooth. Concrete materials,
installation, and finishing are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
3.5 CORROSION PREVENTION
A. Aluminum: Do not use in contact with earth or concrete. When in direct contact with a
dissimilar metal, protect aluminum by insulating fittings or treatment.
B. Steel Conduits: Comply with Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems."
In concrete foundations, wrap conduit with 0.010-inch-thick, pipe-wrapping plastic tape applied
with a 50 percent overlap.
3.6 GROUNDING
A. Ground metal poles and support structures according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and
Bonding for Electrical Systems."
1. Install grounding electrode for each pole unless otherwise indicated.

2. Install grounding conductor pigtail in the base for connecting luminaire to grounding
system.
B. Ground nonmetallic poles and support structures according to Division 26 Section "Grounding
and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
1. Install grounding electrode for each pole.

2. Install grounding conductor and conductor protector.
3. Ground metallic components of pole accessories and foundations.
A. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.
B. Illumination Observations: Verify normal operation of lighting units after installing luminaires
and energizing circuits with normal power source.
1. Verify operation of photoelectric controls.
C. Illumination Tests:
1. Measure light intensities at night. Use photometers with calibration referenced to NIST
standards. Comply with the following IESNA testing guide(s):
2. IESNA LM-5, "Photometric Measurements of Area and Sports Lighting Installations."
3. IESNA LM-50, "Photometric Measurements of Roadway Lighting Installations."
4. IESNA LM-52, "Photometric Measurements of Roadway Sign Installations."
5. IESNA LM-64, "Photometric Measurements of Parking Areas."
6. IESNA LM-72, "Directional Positioning of Photometric Data."
D. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and
interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate
compliance with standards.


SDF 26 Electrical-Es

Cargado por

Información del documento

Título original

Derechos de autor

Formatos disponibles

Compartir este documento

Compartir o incrustar documentos

Opciones para compartir

¿Le pareció útil este documento?

¿Este contenido es inapropiado?

Copyright:

Formatos disponibles

SDF 26 Electrical-Es

Cargado por

Copyright:

Formatos disponibles

AWS DATA CENTER DESIGN ENGINEERING (DCDE) REVISION 1.

SECCIÓN 260001 - REQUISITOS GENERAL ES PARA SISTEMAS ELÉCTRICOS .................................................2

SECCIÓN 260001 - REQUISITOS GENERALES PARA SISTEMAS ELÉCTRICOS

 AHJ: Autoridad que tiene jurisdicción.

 ARC: Conducto rígido de aluminio.

 ATS: interruptor de transferencia automática o esquema de transferencia automática

 BF: Factor de lastre.

 CCT: Temperatura de color correlacionada.

 CRI: Índice de reproducción cromática.

 ENT: Tubería eléctrica no metálica.

 EPDM: Caucho terpolímero etileno-propileno-dieno.

 EMT: Tubería metálica eléctrica.

 EPMS: Sistema de Monitoreo de Energía Eléctrica.

 EQT: Prueba de calificación de equipos

 Ethernet: Red de área local basada en los estándares IEEE 802.3.

 FAT: Prueba de aceptación de fábrica

 FMC: Conducto metálico flexible.

 FWT: Prueba de testigos de fábrica

 GRC: Conducto de acero rígido galvanizado.

 HTML: Lenguaje de marcado de hipertexto.

 Descarga de alta intensidad.

 IBC: Código Internacional de la Construcción.

 IMC: Conducto metálico intermedio.

 LFMC: Conducto metálico flexible estanco.

 LFNC: Conducto no metálico flexible y resistente a líquidos.

 LAN: Red de área local; a veces plural como "LAN."

 LCD: Pantalla de cristal líquido.

 LER: Clasificación de la eficacia de las luminarias.

 Lumen: Salida medida de lámpara y luminaria, o ambos.

 Luminaria: Luminaria completa, incluida la carcasa de lastre si se proporciona.

 Modbus TCP/IP: Un protocolo abierto para el intercambio de datos de proceso.

 Monitoreo: Adquisición, procesamiento, comunicación y visualización de datos de estado del equipo,

 MPA: Acuerdo Maestro de Compra

 NETA ATS: Especificación de prueba de aceptación.

 NC: Normalmente está cerrado.

 NO: Normalmente está abierto.

 NBR: Caucho acrilonitrilo-butadieno

 PDU: Unidad de distribución de energía

 RFI: Interferencia de radiofrecuencia.

 RMC: Conducto metálico rígido.

 RNC: Conducto rígido no metálico

 SVR: Clasificación de tensión suprimida.

 Un poste, doble tiro.

 TCP/IP: Protocolo de control de transporte/protocolo de Internet incorporado en Microsoft Windows.

 THD: Distorsión armónica total.

 TVSS: Supresor de tensión transitoria.

 UTP: Par trenzado sin blindaje.

 UPS: Fuente de alimentación ininterrumpida; utilizado tanto en singular como en plural.

 WAN: Wide area network.

 Cumplimiento de las adaptaciones y requisitos del código AHJ local.

 Datos del producto: Para cada tipo de producto indicado.

 Incluir datos del producto que indiquen las dimensiones.

 Diagramas de interconexión que muestran el cableado instalado en el campo.

 Presentación de diseño delegado: Para restricciones sísmicas.

 Datos de calificación: Para la agencia de pruebas.

 Informes de control de calidad de la fuente.

 Informes de control de calidad de campo.

 Certificados de producto: Firmado por el fabricante del producto.

 "C" Cumplir sin excepciones.

 Planos de coordinación: Planos de planta

 La portada de presentación indicará si el equipo coincide idénticamente con el equipo de la fase(s)

 Dibujos dimensionados de la unidad de equipo: Identifique el centro de gravedad y localice y describa

 PRESENTACIONES DE MATERIAL DE MANTENIMIENTO